JP6663373B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including an effect control unit capable of executing an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operation units and having different operation units operated by a player according to an effect (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a gaming machine that reflects a single operation on both of a plurality of effects when the generation timing of an operation effect for operating one operation unit overlaps with respect to a plurality of effects (for example, Patent Document 2). .

JP 2013-078509 A JP-A-2006-047442

  However, in a case where the occurrence timing of a composite operation (composite operation effect) for performing operations on a plurality of operation units or performing operations on one operation unit in a plurality of modes overlaps with respect to a plurality of effects, the composite operation is performed without discomfort. It is difficult to reflect on both productions.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to reduce or prevent a situation in which the occurrence timing of a composite operation (composite operation effect) is duplicated and the effect is uncomfortable.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine including a game control unit capable of executing a game and an effect control unit capable of executing an effect related to the game, a player can operate in a plurality of operation modes. Operating means for operating the operating means in a first operation mode and operating the operating means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A composite operation effect in which a two-operation effect is executable, the operation means being displaceable between the operation in the first operation mode and the operation in the second operation mode, in relation to the effect, the ratio to perform the complex operation effect, in the first fraction to perform the operation effect or the second operation effect, many people in proportion to execute the complex operation effect, the first The second production of a different type from the production To a rate of performing the combined operation effect, the a in the first fraction to perform the operation effect or the second operation effect, towards the percentage executing the first operation effect or the second operation effect much The first effect and the second effect can be executed in an overlapping manner.
In another representative embodiment, a game machine including a game control unit capable of executing a game and an effect control unit capable of executing an effect related to the game can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation modes. The operation control means operates the operation means in a first operation mode and a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A second operation effect can be executed, a composite operation effect can be executed, the operation means can be displaced between the operation in the first operation mode and the operation in the second operation mode, in relation to 1 effect, the the ratio to perform the combined operation effect, the a in the first operation effect or proportion for executing the second operation effect, towards the percentage executing the combined operation effect is large, the first For a second production of a type different from one production And communicating, a rate of performing the combined operation effect, in the first fraction to perform the operation effect or the second operation effect found the percentage executing the first operation effect or the second operation effect In many cases , the first effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the game has a special result that gives a player a game value.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to reduce or prevent a situation in which the timing of occurrence of a composite operation (composite operation effect) is duplicated and a sense of incongruity occurs in the effect.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the discharge ball number display part. The display mode of the payout rate display section will be described. The display mode of the accessory ratio display section will be described. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a random number update process 1. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a table showing the priority of winning opening monitoring. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the modification of a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a figure explaining the number-of-ejected-balls area | region, the acquired ball-number area | region, and the acquired ball-number area | region for each accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout performance monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure suspension information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a high probability change frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting setting process 1 during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an ordinary process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process change setting process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal power operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting-port signal edit process. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a layout example of a display screen of a display device. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the payout command (payout number command) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of a gaming machine according to a modification. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of payout performance monitoring processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the payout performance monitoring processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of single command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of count information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production point control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a first half of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a latter half of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a figure in the 3rd Embodiment which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the ending at the time of the end of a big hit state. In the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a player setting mode waiting for a customer. It is a front view of the game board provided with the sub display concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the number-of-ejected-balls area | region, the acquired ball-number area | region by each accessory which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the payout command (payout number command) concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of single command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability (time saving) completion | finish process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 14 is a first half of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is the latter half of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the payout performance monitoring processing concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the over winning a prize information processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the notification mode of 1st over winning notification and 2nd over winning notification concerning 6th Embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the other example of the notification mode of 1st over winning notification and 2nd over winning notification concerning 6th Embodiment. FIG. 15 is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series in a sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display in a hall setting mode concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the state of movement of each decoration special design in the decoration special design change display game by a 7th embodiment. FIG. 17 is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in chronological order in a seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game by the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 25 is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series in Modification Example 1 of the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game by the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a display device according to a second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen which applied the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment to the case of the big hit without re-lottery, and the case of the big hit with re-lottery. It is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of CPU of the game microcomputer concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the flag register concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing at the time of power supply concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the game control device program start preparation processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of random number updating processing 2 concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special figure suspension information judgment processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the main processing concerning an 8th embodiment. 21 is a program list showing a program structure of a timer interrupt process according to an eighth embodiment. It is a program list showing a part of program structure of a starting opening switch monitoring processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a program list showing a part of program structure of hard random number acquisition processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the procedure which detects rising information concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the special figure starting port switch common processing concerning a modification of a 9th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a special figure 1 reserved storage area according to each embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 reserved storage area according to each embodiment. It is a program list showing a part program structure of special figure suspension information judging processing concerning a 10th embodiment. It is a program list showing the program structure of a part of special figure suspension information judgment processing concerning a modification of a 10th embodiment. It is a program list showing a part of program structure of change start information setting processing concerning an 11th embodiment. 38 is a program list showing a partial program structure of a gate switch monitoring process according to a twelfth embodiment. 39 is a program list showing a partial program structure of a segment LED editing process according to a thirteenth embodiment. 9 is a program list showing a conventional program structure of an LED editing process. It is a figure explaining the display data corresponding to the number of general drawing reservations concerning a 13th embodiment. 39 is a program list showing a partial program structure of an external information editing process according to a thirteenth embodiment. It is a program list of random number update processing 2 concerning a 14th embodiment. 39 is a program list for explaining a part of the special figure game process according to the fourteenth embodiment. 38 is a program list for explaining a part of a special figure game sequence branch table according to a fourteenth embodiment. 38 is a program list of a first modification of the special figure game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 39 is a program list of a second modification of the special figure game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 30 is a conventional second-half fluctuation group table for describing a compression method according to a sixteenth embodiment. It is a latter half fluctuation group table concerning a 16th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a view for explaining a compression method according to a sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a view for explaining a data read format according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a program list of the change pattern setting processing concerning a 17th embodiment. 39 is a program list of a conventional 2-byte distribution process for describing a compression method according to a seventeenth embodiment. It is a program list of the 2 byte distribution processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a second half fluctuation group table according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a view for explaining a compression method according to an eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 41 is a view for explaining a data read format according to the eighteenth embodiment. It is a program list of the 2 byte distribution processing concerning an 18th embodiment. It is another example of the latter half fluctuation group table concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead change system command processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production button input processing concerning a 19th embodiment. It is an example of the table showing the selectivity of the operation (operation effect) according to the nineteenth embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the case where the selectivity of the operation (operation effect) according to the nineteenth embodiment is different from the big hit. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a composite operation by operating a plurality of operation units. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating another example of a composite operation by operating a plurality of operation units. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (1) showing a display screen of a display device in chronological order in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (2) showing a display screen of the display device in chronological order in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (3) showing a display screen of the display device in chronological order in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (4) showing a display screen of the display device in chronological order in the nineteenth embodiment. It is an example of a compound operation for performing an operation on a first operation unit (first operation means) in a plurality of modes. It is an example of a compound operation for performing an operation on the second operation unit (second operation means) in a plurality of modes. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the production button input processing concerning a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the production button input processing concerning a 20th embodiment. It is an example of the table showing the selectivity of the operation (operation effect) according to the twentieth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting processing concerning a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production button input processing concerning a 21st embodiment. It is an example of the table showing the selectivity of the operation (operation effect) according to the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 25 is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in a time series in a twenty-first embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame which is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and the like. Can be.

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18a and 18b each contain an illumination member such as an LED therein, and emit light according to a game state. The illumination members provided inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is provided at each of the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15. Apart from the upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (toward the player) is provided. The protruding effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a luminous effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is interposed in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and if the variable display game is simply referred to as a variable figure display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device during the non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a fluctuation display game is high (probable change state, probability change state), or a big hit state (special game state). ), A small hitting game state (small hitting state).

  Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Furthermore, whether or not to generate a probability change state may not necessarily be determined by the big hit symbol random number, but may be made to always generate a probability change state when a big hit occurs, or a prize winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided and specified. A probable change state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a lighting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 having the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower right speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The shooting speed of the game ball fired from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball firing device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) at which game balls are fired into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and play the game in various firing modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing modes include left-handed (normal hit) in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

(Game board)
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of a gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, but may be a device having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a character that creates a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a into a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are transferred to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 (general winning region) is arranged in the gaming region 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the gaming region 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35. In the present embodiment, there are two winning opening switches 35a for the general winning opening 35 on the left and a winning opening switch 35b for the general winning opening 35 on the right.

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure change display game is provided, and immediately below the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening) (second start winning area). A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning region) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the state in which the game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, game balls cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general-purpose change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor variation display game higher than normal, By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, the time saving state (general power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that, also in the probable change state (except the latent probable change state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an attacker type in which the large winning opening is opened by turning the upper end side to the front side by the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. The special fluctuation winning device 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and obtains the special winning state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening.

  As described above, in the gaming area 32, the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) are provided as a plurality of winning areas in which game balls can be won without any particular conditions. In addition, as a variable prize device that is activated when a predetermined condition (predetermined result of the special figure variable display game or the general figure variable display game) is established, a game ball can be awarded, the normal variable prize device 37 (second A starting winning port) and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning port) are provided.

  When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening), the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) sets the winning opening. The number of prize balls according to the type of prize balls are discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In the present embodiment, the prizes of the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize port), the start prize port 36 (first start prize port), the general prize port 35 and the special variable prize device 39 (large prize port). The number of balls is 2, 3, 10, and 14, respectively, and increases in this order.

  Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that enters the out port 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

  In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure change for a change display game, which is configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. A display unit 52 (a special figure 2 display, a lamp D2), a variable display unit 53 for a general figure variable display game (a general figure display, lamps D10, D18), and the number of start (hold) storage of each variable display game It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56). The special figure 1 hold display 54 includes lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold display 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, a lamp) for notifying that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-handed). D8) The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. A third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D17) for displaying the state, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed) are displayed. A round display section 60 (lamp D3-D7) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing a variable display. In addition, all of the LEDs provided as a display are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinking), cyclically turned on (turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one of the LEDs), or a plurality. The lighting may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the ordinary figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the general figure display 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a discharge ball number display section 66 for displaying the discharge ball number of the gaming machine 10, a payout rate display section 67 for displaying the payout rate of the gaming machine 10, and an accessory ratio of the gaming machine 10. Is displayed. Each of the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 includes a plurality (even one) of seven-segment displays (LED lamps) and the like. The display unit constitutes display means for displaying the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are not limited to those that directly display the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. The number of balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed indirectly (for example, a countdown display of the number of discharged balls described below). That is, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 only need to be able to display information on the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. In addition, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the ball-out rate display section 67, and the accessory-ratio display section 68 may display the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory ratio numerically on a 7-segment display. Instead, it may be displayed by a level meter or the like.

  Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32, and is the sum of the number of game balls passing through the winning opening and the number of game balls passing through the out port 30b. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls which is the number of game balls fired from the ball launching device to the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special fluctuation winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. As will be described later, a counting means for counting the number of ejected balls (the number of fired balls) is provided. By displaying the number of discharged balls by the discharged ball number display unit 66 (discharged ball number display means), the player can grasp the number of game balls fired in the game area 32, and the convenience is improved.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (acquired number of balls / number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of award balls). The payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even if the actual prize balls are not paid out because the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning. Note that the payout rate may be easily obtained from the number of obtained balls from the time when the number of ejected balls becomes 0 to 100 every time the number of ejected balls becomes 100 as in the present embodiment, Using the number of acquired balls (total prize balls) and the number of ejected balls accumulated from the power-on of the gaming machine to the present, the number of ejected balls may be accurately calculated from the above definition. Conventionally, the display of the payout rate has not been performed, but in the present embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (the payout rate display means) displays the payout rate to provide the player with the payout rate. The interest and interest in the general winning opening 35 can be given. Then, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ratio of the bonuses is, among the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present, during the big hit state (that is, during the fanfare or ending). Is excluded)), the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) obtained by winning the special winning opening (so-called continuous role ratio). Note that the ratio of the bonuses is the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) (big winning prize). Ratio) or a ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (so-called official ratio used commonly) (The ratio of all officials)). Since the number of winning balls is counted at the time of winning a prize ball, the winning agent ratio can be calculated even if the actual winning ball is not paid out due to a ball exhaustion or the like. In the present embodiment, the role ratio display unit 68 (the role ratio display means) displays the ratio of the role, thereby increasing the interest of the game and the impression that the player can easily win the variable prize device (open state). ), Which motivates the player to continue playing the game. In addition, the accessory ratio display is an index for determining whether or not the player should continue to play the game. Further, since the winning in the general winning opening 35 influences the winning ratio, the player can be made interested in the general winning opening 35 through the displaying of the winning ratio.

  With reference to FIG. 2B, a display mode of the number-of-ejected-balls display section 66 will be described. The number-of-discharged-balls display section 66 includes two 7-segment displays (8-segment displays including a point portion) (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown in the discharged ball number display section 66, and (100−the number of discharged balls) is displayed. The number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). As will be described later, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate displayed on the payout rate display section 67 is changed until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. It is updated to the latest ball rate in between. As a result, if the acquired ball count (total prize ball count) is displayed as it is on the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of discharged balls is counted down from “99” to “00” in the discharged ball number display section 66, but may be displayed by counting up from “00” to “99”. When the number of discharged balls reaches 100, “00” is displayed on the discharged ball number display section 66. In the present embodiment, at the timing when “00” is displayed on the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display of the payout rate display section 67 is updated to the latest one. After the power is turned on (including restoration from a power failure), the number-of-discharged-balls display unit 66 starts counting down from "00". Further, the number of ejected balls is cleared to 0 at the timing of the end of the big hit, and the number-of-ejected balls display section 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00” after the end of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in a state other than during the launch of a game ball or in a demonstration state waiting for a customer, the discharged ball number display unit 66 is in a non-display state in which the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off. Good. The states other than the launching of the game ball and the demonstration state waiting for customers are collectively referred to as a “waiting customer state”. The state other than during the firing of the game ball is a state in which a touch switch signal from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is an off signal. Also, when the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits the customer waiting demonstration command to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4), the gaming machine 10 enters a customer waiting demonstration state (a state during the customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, in a state in which the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or a game ball is being fired, a segment (light emitting unit) of the display is lit on the discharged ball number display unit 66 so that a player who is playing can be recognized, and a countdown display is performed. Execute. Since this is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the number-of-discharged-balls display unit 66 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during an error or a fraud that affects the game. Here, the errors and injustices that affect the game are errors and injustices related to the opening of the glass frame and the opening of the front frame (glass opening errors and an opening error of the front frame, which will be described later). (Shoot ball cut error, overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game balls can be manually inserted into the winning opening while the frame is open, the display of the discharged ball number display section 66 is not updated, but the number of discharged balls is counted by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. .

  The display mode of the payout rate display section 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 2C. The payout rate display section 67 is composed of two 7-segment displays (8-segment displays including a point portion) (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), in the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate is displayed only from 0 to 99, and when the payout rate becomes 100 or more, “99” is blinked or lit or displayed. FF "is displayed.

  As described above, the payout rate display of the payout rate display section 67 is performed until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100 each time the number of ejected balls becomes 100 (predetermined number). Updated to the latest payout rate. Each time the payout rate display section 67 updates the payout rate display, it changes the emission color of the segment (light emitting portion) to clearly indicate that the payout rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display section 67 changes from red to green or from green to red each time the payout rate display is updated. Note that the payout rate display section 67 may always display the payout rate in a single color without changing the color.

  In addition, the payout rate display section 67 may change the color of the payout rate display in accordance with the payout rate based on a design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state). Thereby, the deviation of the payout rate from the design value can be notified and warned. For example, the payout ratio is displayed in green in the range of 30 to 50, displayed in yellow in the range of 10 to 29 and 51 to 60, and displayed in red in the range of 0 to 9 and 61 or more. In addition, during the big hit, since the payout rate becomes very large, it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) instead of red. In the configuration in which the payout rate is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the payout rate display blinks when the payout rate largely deviates from the design value (when it is equal to or more than a predetermined value or equal to or less than a predetermined value). May do it.

  Further, the payout rate display section 67 displays "00" after the power is turned on (including the restoration of the power failure). Further, the payout rate is cleared to 0 at the timing when the big hit ends, and the payout rate display section 67 displays “00”.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in a state other than during the launch of the game ball or in a customer waiting demonstration state (that is, a customer waiting state), the payout rate display unit 67 displays a segment of the display unit turned off and not displayed. May be. On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being fired, the segment of the display unit is lit in the ball rate display unit 67, and the ball rate is displayed so that the player who is playing can be recognized. Since this is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased. Furthermore, since the payout rate cannot be obtained until the number of ejected balls reaches 100 after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the payout rate display section 67 may be in a non-display state.

  Conversely, when the game ball is not being fired or in a waiting state for a customer, the payout rate display section 67 displays the payout rate, and the ball is displayed when the demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being fired. The configuration may be such that the ball rate is not displayed. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to be played in consideration of the payout rate.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the payout rate display section 67 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player when an error or irregularity affecting the game occurs. Here, the errors and injustices that affect the game are errors and injustices related to the opening of the glass frame and the opening of the front frame (glass opening errors and an opening error of the front frame, which will be described later). (Shoot ball cut error, overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game balls can be manually inserted into the winning opening while the frame is open, the display of the payout rate display section 67 is not updated, but the payout rate is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. are doing.

  The display mode of the accessory ratio display section 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 2D. The accessory ratio display section 68 is composed of three 7-segment displays (8-segment displays including a point portion) (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the accessory ratio display section 68 displays the value of the accessory ratio (%) from “00.0” to the first decimal place of “99.9”. When the accessory ratio is 100%, "100" is displayed. For example, when the accessory ratio display section 68 includes four 7-segment displays (LED lamps), the value of the accessory ratio (%) up to the second decimal place is displayed.

  In addition, the accessory ratio display section 68 displays the accessory ratio display in accordance with the accessory ratio with reference to a reference value determined by a rule (for example, a continuous bonus agent ratio of 60%, which is a prize ball by the continuous operation of the accessory). The color may be changed. As a result, it is possible to notify and warn the deviation of the accessory ratio from the reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio is equivalent to the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio is displayed in green in a range of 00.0% to 55.0%, and yellow in a range of 55.1% to 60.0%. , And red in the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, during the big hit, the ratio of the accessory becomes large, so that it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) or the like. In addition, for example, the winning combination is obtained by winning a so-called winning ratio (a special winning prize device 39 and a normal winning prize device 37 among all winning prizes) among commonly used so-called winning ratios. In this case, the reference value is set to 70% and the accessory ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0%, and 65.1% to 70.0%. Is displayed in yellow, and red in a range of 70.1% to 100%. In the configuration in which the accessory ratio is displayed in a single color without changing the color, when the accessory ratio greatly deviates from the design value (when it is equal to or greater than a predetermined value or equal to or less than a predetermined value), the display of the accessory ratio blinks. May do it.

  The number of prize balls for each accessory for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio display section 68 (the number of acquired balls for each accessory) is accumulated until the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and is cleared when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (including the restoration of the power failure), the display of the accessory ratio is displayed as “00.0”. Thereafter, in the accessory ratio display section 68, each time a winning occurs, the accessory ratio is updated as needed. In addition, the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) is set as one set, and the number of obtained balls for each set (also referred to as the number of obtained balls) is divided into a plurality of blocks (storage area of predetermined bytes). It is also possible to sequentially store the number of balls in the accessory in the ring buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in a state other than during the launch of the game ball or in a customer waiting demonstration state (that is, a customer waiting state), the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off when the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off. It may be in the state of display. On the other hand, in a state in which a customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or a game ball is being fired, a segment (light emitting unit) of the display is lit on the accessory ratio display section 68, and the accessory ratio is set so that a player who is playing can be recognized. indicate. Since this is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  Conversely, in a state other than during the launch of the game ball or in a demonstration waiting for a customer, the accessory ratio display section 68 displays the ratio of the accessory, and in a state where the demonstration is not waiting for the customer or in a state where the game ball is being launched. A configuration in which the object ratio is not displayed may be adopted. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to be played in consideration of the ratio of the bonuses.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the accessory ratio display unit 68 executes an error display (“EEE” display) to notify the player during an error or a fraud that affects the game. Here, the errors and injustices that affect the game are errors and injustices related to the opening of the glass frame and the opening of the front frame (glass opening errors and an opening error of the front frame, which will be described later). (Shoot ball cut error, overflow error described later) are not included. Note that the game ball can be manually inserted into the winning opening while the frame is open, so that the display of the accessory ratio display section 68 is not updated. However, the accessory ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. are doing.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the player wins the normal fluctuation prize device 37 or the special fluctuation prize device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening that has been won is provided via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

  The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the winning prize ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, each change pattern random number, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) and the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) are identified by the identification information (the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the special symbols and special symbols. The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order (scroll display), the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuating display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). In other words, the special winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 is widely opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, a privilege is given that a player can acquire many game balls. You.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting a small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In this case, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure change display game, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count switch (39a) includes a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like includes a machine. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110 with the input section 120 and the output section 130. Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach systems having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving special result modes, normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach) , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a small jackpot for determining the small jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including an execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without various reach or reach), and the like. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, For example, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  An input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34 a of the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning port 36. The switch 36a is connected to the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V. And an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a low level of 7V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. Is done.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and an out ball detection switch 65 for detecting a game ball entering the out port 30b. , A frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not it is.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a not-shown test shooting device via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the third input port 124 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 includes a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A signal, a shot ball out switch signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 are taken in through the data bus 140 to play a game. A first input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 outputs opening / closing data of a solenoid (a general-purpose solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 has third output ports 135-1, 135-135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the batch display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal based on a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. Drivers 138b-1 and 138b-2 that output on / off drive signals for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output ports 135-1 and 135-2, and the fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the port 136, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided. In addition, the second driver 138 b-2 outputs an on / off drive signal of a segment line for the number of discharged balls display unit 66, the payout ratio display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 in the collective display device 50. The second driver 138b-1 outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line for another display unit (display) of the collective display device 50.

  32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. A random number for use is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is hit or not.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has been hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stop-displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls the large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, for example, to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. The opening of the special winning opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 or 4 times). That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state (probable change state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. The control is performed so that the opening time of the battery is substantially increased, so that the power transmission support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) except the latent probability change state, the time reduction state is duplicated and the general power support is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-reduction variation in which the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the general-purpose variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time reduction state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal-floating display game is hit and the normal-variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal-power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be longer than the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of general power release times, the general power release time, and the general figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “A ****”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (the first input port 122) (A1006).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times) ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. A determination is made (A1010). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal.

  When the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 read earlier (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, as the validity determination, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power-off (A1020). In addition, the area | region which memorize | stores the information regarding the number of throwing balls and the number of obtained balls (for example, the number of discharged balls, the number of obtained balls, the number of obtained balls for each accessory) may be excluded from the target of the validity determination. If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process in the case where the power is normally restored from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”), and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A1026 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  The game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at power-on) in an area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure check area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. The areas to be initialized include the number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls, and the number of acquired balls for each accessory, which will be described later. These areas are initialized by clearing to 0 (initial value = 0). As a result, the number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls for each accessory, the payout ratio obtained from the number of acquired balls, and the ratio of the bonus calculated from the number of acquired balls for each accessory are also cleared to zero. become. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number-of-acquired-spheres-by-principal-object area (and, by extension, the accessory-ratio) is not cleared to zero. In addition, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Thereafter, the game control device 100 checks an area in the RWM in which the game state is stored to determine whether the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not the high-probability state (result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1023 and step A1024 and shifts to the processing of step A1025. If the gaming state is the high probability state (result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), and the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50, for example. The ON (lighting) data of the (error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1024). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1025), and the process proceeds to step A1031. Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when performing the processing of step A1026 after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for initializing the RAM to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the processing of step A1025 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1030 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine, and a hold of special figures 1 and 2. The command includes a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command indicating the number, a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, and a probability information command indicating the probability state. Also, depending on the state at the time of power-off or power-on, a restoration screen command if the special figure fluctuation display game is running at the time of power-off, and a customer waiting demo command if the customer is waiting at the time of power-off If the initialization is performed at the time of power-on, a power-on command is included. Further, it includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time reduction information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the execution of the CTC activation process in step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random number for determining a big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number for determining the small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number for determining the hit of the ordinary figure (hit random number), random number for determining the hit symbol of the ordinary figure (hit symbol random number) Etc.) are saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1033), and interruption is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are in the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which the start value is changed using the initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitors the power failure. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number updating process (A1035), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is initialized. By being made to wait by the value random number update processing, it is possible to prevent the interruption processing from being overwhelmed.

  Note that the initial value random number update processing in step A1035 may be a method of performing the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing. When such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing is performed in both cases. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, and only in the main processing, the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing. However, there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified thereby.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is ON (result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. A determination is made (A1038). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is prohibited (A1039), and off data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control unit (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111c that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the elapse of the standby time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation processing is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (A1107).

  When the calculation of the checksum is not completed (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control device 100 repeats the processing from Step A1104 to Step A1107. If the calculation of the checksum has been completed (result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation processing ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the big hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number updating process ends.

  Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number for determining the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" determines the small hit stop symbol of the special figure. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number to be performed. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the ordinary figure changing game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the ordinary figure. It is a random number that becomes the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets a higher address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). Note that when a signal of prohibition of firing is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a signal of firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and furthermore, a random number update process 1 (A1306), Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, the monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of an error (front side) A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether the frame or the glass frame is open (A1308).

  Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure change display game is executed (A1309), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general view change display game is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure changing game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1311).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegal monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio fraud monitoring process) for checking a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the gaming board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1313).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank specification are automatically performed. However, depending on the CPU used, the interruption is permitted after the external information editing processing. May be performed, or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the input process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further, bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, switch reading processing is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the switch reading process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved (stored) in the port input state of the target switch control area. ) (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading has elapsed (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first data) ) And save the inverted data (second time data) (A1509). After that, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern in which the same bit in the state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 is created (A1510), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time is set. Bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undefined bit pattern and the value of the last interrupt are set. The logical product with the final state is calculated and set as a previously held bit (A1513). This makes it possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the currently determined bit and the previously held bit, and saves the current determined state (A1514). Further, the exclusive OR of the previous and the final determined states is calculated and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the determination cannot be performed correctly. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the output process.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off data to the ports 135-1, 135-2 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of 0 to 4 (A1603). Further, output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135-1 (A1608).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a touch switch signal from a touch switch (a firing touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an ON signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 24 is operated. When the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an ON signal (result of A1609 is “Y”), the segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and the segment output data is transferred to the segment output port 2 (A1610). The data is output to the port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data output here is segment output data for the number-of-ejected-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68. Accordingly, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the number of ejected balls is displayed on the number-of-ejected balls display section 66, the number of balls ejected on the number-of-balls display section 67, and the number of balls ejected on the accessory ratio display section 68. It becomes possible to display the accessory ratio.

  On the other hand, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (the result of A1609 is “N”), the game control device 100 turns off the 7-segment display (LED lamp) (LED off). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). Thereby, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the number of ejected balls is displayed on the number-of-discharged balls display section 66, the payout rate is displayed on the payout rate display section 67, and the number of discharged balls is displayed on the accessory ratio display section 68. The display of the accessory ratio is hidden.

  In step A1609, instead of determining whether or not the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is turned on, it may be determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being performed (customer waiting demonstration state). When a demonstration is waiting for a customer, display is executed on the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 (A1610, A1612), and the demonstration is waiting for the customer. Otherwise, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 may be hidden (A1611, A1612). In addition, as described later, when the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer is waiting demonstration state (state during the customer waiting demonstration) is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control device 100 produces an effect. When a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted to control device 300, it can be determined that a customer waiting demonstration is being performed.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1613), further combines the combined data with the output data of firing permission (A1614), and finally combines the data. The data is output to the external information / emission permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and combines the data with the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620). Next, data to be output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized with the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 The output data is output (A1621). The data in step A1621 is data on the payout rate. Then, data to be output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70. The data is output (A1622), and the output process ends. The data of step A1622 is data of the accessory ratio.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission processing (A1305) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the payout command transmission process.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize port reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball in which the main prize ball signal is not generated in the used area is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). An area is provided, and the count of the corresponding number-of-wins counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted irrespective of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the processing of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 determines, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a winning object to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  If there is no count in the winning number counter area 2 (result of A1701 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Furthermore, it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks have been completed (result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  If there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the remaining prize ball area as a new prize ball remaining area (A1707). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before the process of step A1707, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not 0 or more (result of A1709 is "N"), the flow shifts to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining area (A1711). Then, the process returns to step A1708.

  With the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A1712), and determines whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission processing is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). It is said. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state that can immediately start the payout control. One of a state, a busy state in which the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The case where the state is not the busy state includes the case where the state is the idle state and the case where the state is the undefined state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Note that the undefined state is set by clearing the busy signal status area in the processing at the time of turning on the power, for example. The indefinite state is that the idle state or the busy state is set based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to indicate that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be performed. To eliminate. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead of transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control device 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is included in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether there is.

  When there is no count number (result of A1715 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and updates all the winning number counter areas. It is determined whether the check of the count number has been completed (A1717). When all the checks have been completed (result of A1717 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is completed. On the other hand, if all checks have not been completed (result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  If there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target prize number counter area (A1718), and sets the target prize number counter. The payout command corresponding to the area is obtained (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission processing is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up on the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on this data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Further, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can output the prize ball. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the prize areas (the first start prize port 36, the second start prize port 37, the general prize port 35, and the special variable prize apparatus 39) provided in the game area 32 are provided. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout control means for controlling payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means) Payout control device 200), and the game control means outputs a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Is transmitted to the payout control means, and if a power outage occurs and the power supply recovers from the power outage, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize is immediately received. Ball command A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means being continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted to the payout control means. That is what you are trying to do.

  Further, a plurality of prize areas (first start prize port 36, second start prize port 37, general prize port 35, special variable prize apparatus 39) having different numbers of prize balls are provided in the game area 32, and game control means (game control apparatus). 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball is provided for each number of prize balls, and a state signal starts payout control. If the prize ball command counter indicates that the prize ball command is not transmitted and the prize ball command counter has not transmitted the prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). This means that the control means determines whether or not the payout control can be started before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

  In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and based on the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area (first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command, and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a prize ball command when the state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main prize) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area. Game machine with ball signal) External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the outside, wherein the external information output means determines whether or not the status signal output from the payout control means allows the payout control means to start the payout control. Irrespective of the above, the prize ball signal is output.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined prize area (first start prize port 36, second start prize port 37, general prize port 35). Prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize winning device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued to the payout control means (payout). The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the information of the prize in units of one prize to the predetermined prize area, and to transmit the information of the prize to the predetermined prize area. Game balls At the same time, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by performing the update in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, updating when a game ball is awarded in the predetermined winning area, and accumulating the number of winning balls by an external information output means. By performing the update in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the accumulation processing.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is “Y”), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding a start value of a corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding a start value of a corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1807 is "N"), the processing after step A1810 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the winning initial random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1810). If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “N”), the random number updating process 1 ends.

  On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1811). Then, the next initial value of the loaded symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1812), and the random number updating process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Further, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  First, the game control device 100 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is a target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper one byte of the two-byte random number (result of A1906 is “Y”), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper one byte as an added value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as a "masked value"), a mask update value is set by adding "1" to the mask update value, the lower one byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1909.

  When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as an added value and sets the lower 1 byte to The mask update value is set (A1908), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1909. Note that the reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, so that adding “0” does not change the value.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “Y”), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the lower one byte of the random number value is set as the lower one byte of the random number value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A1912.

  The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the processing of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random number value, and determines whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value obtained in the processing of A1903. It is determined whether or not it is (A1913).

  Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control device 100 stores the new random number value in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is set as a new random number value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number updating process 2 ends. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, the value is saved) in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and ends the random number update processing 2.

  As described above, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start area of the first startup winning port 36 or the second startup winning port 37. Random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the random number.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 of the timer interrupt process. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process constitutes monitoring means for monitoring winning in each winning opening and executing a predetermined process when a winning is achieved. As the predetermined process, the number of ejected balls is updated by +1 (addition of 1 is added), or an addition process is performed on the number of awarded balls due to the winning to calculate a payout ratio (total number of awarded balls) and an accessory ratio. There are things.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares the winning port monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the two special winning port switches 39a in the special winning port (special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2002). The details of the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described later.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the two winning opening switches 39a in the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39) (A2003). Then, a fraud & win monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2004). Next, it is determined whether it is in the normal power support state, that is, whether it is in the time saving state or the probable change state (excluding the latent probable change state) (A2005).

  Then, when the game control device 100 is in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, a fraudulent and win monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2007). Subsequently, a winning port monitoring table for a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2008). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the normal power support state (result of A2005 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table of a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring (A2010). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning port monitoring table corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, a fraudulent & winning monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2013).

  FIG. 15B is a table showing, for each gaming state, a priority order relating to winning opening monitoring. This priority is realized by the order of the winning opening monitoring in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 15A) and the winning number counter updating process (FIG. 17A) described later.

  Here, the winning opening monitoring means the counting of winning numbers, the updating (calculation) of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate in the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing or the winning counter updating processing (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring processing). , Calculation of the accessory ratio, and the like. In particular, even when there is a prize in the winning opening at the same time, the calculation of the payout ratio and the ratio of the role and the duty ratio are performed with priority given to the prize in the predetermined winning opening based on a predetermined priority as shown in FIG. 15B. Done. In the case of the normal gaming state and the normal power support state, the special winning opening is not opened unless there is an improper operation, and is not added to the priority order table.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (I), it is possible to change the priority order relating to winning opening monitoring according to the gaming state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, in accordance with the determination (A2005) of whether or not it is in the normal power support state, the winning number counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process) is performed by the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening). It is possible to set (determine) which of the winning openings (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening)) does not require fraud monitoring.

  In particular, when the system is in the normal telephone support state (result of A2005 is “Y”), the normal fluctuation prize device 37 (second start prize port) does not need to be monitored for fraud. ), The monitoring of the winning opening (that is, counting the number of winnings, updating the number of ejected balls, adding the number of acquired balls, etc.) can be executed before the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). As will be described later, among the winning ports having a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring, the monitoring of the winning port of the general winning port 35 is prioritized prior to the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port). Shall be executed. In addition, in the case of not being in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), that is, in the normal game state or the special game state, the start winning prize having the prize opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring. The winning opening monitoring can be performed on the opening 36 (first starting winning opening) before the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15B (II), when the normal power support state is in effect (result of A2005 is “Y”), among the winning prize ports of the prize port switches that do not need the fraud monitoring, the general prize port 35 is selected. If only the winning opening monitoring (winning number counter updating process) is executed before the winning opening monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening), the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting). The winning opening monitoring for the general winning opening 35 having more prize balls than the winning opening) can be executed with priority over the winning opening monitoring of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  In a game state other than the normal power support state (a special game state, a normal game state, or the like), winning port monitoring is performed preferentially in the order of winning ports having the largest number of obtained prize balls (the number of prize balls). As a result, the highest possible payout ratio is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation of the game can be improved.

  Further, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 15C, the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of FIG. 15A may be deleted and the processing of steps A2010 to A2013 may be executed after step A2004. Good. In this case, in all game states (independent of the game state), the winning prize balls (the number of prize balls) in the order of winning prize balls (large winning prize → general prize winning opening → first starting prize opening → (In the order of the second starting winning opening), the winning opening monitoring can be executed with priority. In this case, the largest possible payout rate is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation of the game can be improved. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process in FIG. 15C monitors winning in each winning opening in descending order of the obtained winning balls, and when there is a winning, adds the winning balls of the winning and adds the payout rate. A monitoring means for calculating the (sum of the number of prize balls) and the accessory ratio is configured.

  Then, after step A2009 or A2013, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (A2014). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (result of A2014 is "Y"), the value of the number of discharged balls area storing the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 to add the number of discharged balls by 1, (A2015) The following payout performance monitoring processing is executed (A2016). Then, an out ball detection command indicating that the ball has entered the out port 30b is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). After that, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals to be monitored for the status, such as whether an error has occurred, and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated ( A2018).

  In the present embodiment, the number of ejected balls is updated by +1 and counted by detecting the game balls ejected outside the game area 32 by the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch (A2015, A2210). . However, since the number of shooting balls fired from the ball shooting device is basically equal to the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, a switch (sensor) for directly detecting the shooting ball from the ball shooting device is used. ) May be provided to count the number of ejected balls. In addition, since the launching ball from the ball launching device has a return to the ball launching device, it is more accurate to use the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch as in the present embodiment, so that the number of ejected balls is more accurate. Can count.

  When there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A2014 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the state scan counter (A2018). The status scan counter is updated in the range from 0 to 3. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (A2019). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2020). The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later.

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 is monitored, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shot ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the abnormal dispensing status signal (discharge abnormal error). Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2022).

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on a signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (fraud frame fraud) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2023). When the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2023 is "N"), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2023 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2024) and determines whether an error has occurred. (A2025).

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of a disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control (A2026). ), Finish the winning port switch / state monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from step A2024 to step A2026 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so that the processing is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2024 to A2026 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & winning monitoring process. The fraud & winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007 and A2013 in the winning port switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed for the big winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 and the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. Regarding the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39), forcibly open the opening / closing member using a piano wire or a device for illegal use, insert a game ball, and place a prize ball. Since it is easy for fraud to be paid out, fraud is monitored in addition to detecting a winning.

  The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the big winning switch 39a.

  Then, when it is during the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the added illegal winning number after addition is determined as the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination. It is determined whether the number is equal to or greater than the number (for example, five) (A2105).

  The reason why the determination number is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball passes the validity period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where the player wins a prize or a case where noise is present on a signal from being determined to be invalid, and to prevent an error from being easily determined even if the signal is not invalid.

  If the number is not equal to or greater than the determined number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings is kept at the number of determined fraud occurrences (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud command as a production command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud prize occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch (A2110), and sets a winning ball. A counter updating process is executed (A2111). The details of the winning counter updating process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the update of the notification timer is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the prize port switch to be monitored for error is the prize port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37. The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning switch for error monitoring is one of the special winning switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning switch for error monitoring is the other special winning switch 39a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification for the special variable prize winning device 39, thereby preventing the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115). If the value is not 0 (result of A2115 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up. Terminates the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, the target unauthorized release command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). Then, an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as an illegal flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, Clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

  Also, the game control device 100, after the processing of step A2119 ends, or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (result of A2118 is "N"), that is, the fraudulent & winning monitoring processing before the previous time When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the production command setting is performed. The processing is executed (A2122). Then, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.

  By the above processing, a fraudulent command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, and a fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 with the release of fraud, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing a procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (exactly, an input change). (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2217). The table address is updated so that the target winning opening switches are changed in the order of the left winning opening switch 35a, the right winning opening switch 35b, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the winning opening of the general winning opening 35 is updated. The monitoring is executed preferentially before the start winning port 36 (first starting winning port).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and stores the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). In the winning number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 (addition of 1) for each winning in the target winning opening, and the winning number (winning number) of the target winning opening is stored. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  When no overflow has occurred (result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of winning balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning opening) is set (A2207). Then, the set number of prize balls is added to the value of the acquired number of balls area (A2208), and the set number of prize balls is added to the value of the obtained number of obtained balls number area for each target character (A2209). The value is updated by +1 (A2210). Thereafter, a payout performance monitoring process (described later) for calculating the payout ratio and the accessory ratio and controlling the display of the number of ejected balls display unit 66, the payout ratio display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is executed. I do.

  In the processing of steps A2204 and A2209, if the change in the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 or the starting winning openings 36, 37 during a predetermined period (for example, one minute) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, five), the winning number is determined. The configuration may be such that (the value of the winning number counter area) is not updated by +1 and the number of winning balls is not added to the value of the number of acquired balls area for each accessory. That is, in such a case, the counting of the number of winning balls and the number of winnings for calculating the ratio of the bonuses may be stopped for winnings exceeding the predetermined number. According to this configuration, for example, when a prize ball cannot be appropriately given to a player due to occurrence of some trouble, it is assumed that the number of winnings has been extremely increased due to compensation processing by a clerk of a hall (game store). Also, it is possible to properly calculate the accessory ratio. In addition, it is possible to prevent a malicious person from operating a number of game balls in the general winning opening 35 or the like in a short time in order to control the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35, thereby preventing improper operation.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch detect a game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the game control device 100 updates and counts the number of discharged balls by +1 ( A2015, A2210), a discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls. However, since the number of shot balls of the game balls fired from the ball shooting device is basically equal to the number of shot balls of the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, a switch for detecting the shot ball from the ball shooting device ( A sensor may be provided, and the discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of fired balls by the game control device 100 counting the number of fired balls may be configured instead of the discharged ball number counting means. It should be noted that since the launching ball from the ball launching device returns to the ball launching device, the number of ejected balls can be counted more accurately by using a game ball with the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch.

  After the process of step A2211, or when an overflow has occurred (result of A2205 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (A2212). Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2214).

  When no overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After completion of the process in step A2215 or when an overflow has occurred (result of A2214 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2217).

  If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (result of A2217 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202, which determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all switches is completed (result of A2217 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is completed. Through the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information (the winning number, the winning number) is stored.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17B, the number of ejected balls that stores the number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls that stores the number of acquired balls per 100 ejected balls (the total number of awarded balls), A description will now be given of the acquired ball count area for each accessory that stores the acquired ball count for each accessory. The number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls, and the number of acquired balls for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, or the like) of the game control device 100.

  The number of acquired balls is used to obtain a winning rate. The number of acquired balls for each role is used to calculate the ratio of the role. The number of balls obtained for each role is the number of balls obtained for each winning opening (government) (however, the big winning opening is distinguished between the big hit state and the small hit state). In addition, when the total value (total number) of the number of obtained balls for each role is calculated, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the winning opening is obtained. The ratio of the bonuses is, for example, a ratio of the total number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot with respect to the total value of the number of acquired balls for each bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the number-of-ejected-balls area is a storage area having a size of 1 byte, and is used to store values of 0 to 99 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquired ball count area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used to store a value of 0 to 1500.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (III), the acquired ball count area for each accessory is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used to store values from 0 to 65535. Note that the acquired ball count area for each accessory may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. If the value exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit (65535) is set. The number-of-acquired-balls area for each role is an area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning at a plurality of general winning ports 35, and the total number of prize balls by winning at the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1). , An area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2), an area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning a large winning opening during a big hit, This corresponds to an area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning in the special winning opening during the hit (except during the hit).

[Outgoing performance monitoring processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process. The payout performance monitoring processing is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of ejected balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A2301). If the number of ejected balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2313. When the number of ejected balls is 100 or more (result of A2301 is “Y”), the acquired ball count area (RWM) is used to update the payout rate displayed on the payout rate display section 67 to the latest payout rate. Is loaded (A2302). The acquired ball count area stores the number of acquired balls per 100 ejected balls (total prize balls), that is, the payout rate. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of obtained balls is 100 or more (A2303).

  When the number of acquired balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2303 is “N”), the game control device 100 indicates the light emission color (red or green in the present embodiment) of the segment (light emitting portion) of the payout rate display section 67. The value of the segment color number area (within RWM) storing the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the number of acquired balls (ie, the payout rate%) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305). ). Note that the segment area not corresponding to the color number is cleared to zero. In this manner, in the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate display can be updated and displayed by changing the emission color (for example, from red to green), and the player is notified that the payout rate has been updated. Can be recognized.

  As described above, by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate (total of the acquired balls and the awarded balls) is updated and displayed on the payout rate display section 67. it can. If a plurality of prizes are simultaneously received at a plurality of prize ports at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100, a plurality of prize ports are determined based on a predetermined priority order for each prize port as shown in FIG. 15B. Winning to the winning opening with the highest priority among the winnings is adopted, and the winning ball number of the adopted winning is added to calculate the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of winning balls) (priority calculating means) ). As a result, in the normal game state and the special game state, the largest possible payout rate is required at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), and the player's expectation of the game can be improved. Further, in the specific game state (general power support state), there are many prizes to the normal variable prize device 37, so that the prize to the normal variable prize device 37 is preferentially adopted. Note that the number of prize balls due to a prize that has not been adopted among a plurality of prizes is added to the payout rate (total number of acquired balls and total number of prize balls) in the payout performance monitoring processing in the next timer interrupt processing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning ports are arranged in the order of the winning prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) in large order (large winning opening → general winning opening → first starting winning opening → second starting winning opening). When priority is given to monitoring (calculation of the payout rate), a payout rate as large as possible is required at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100, and the player's sense of expectation of the game can be improved.

  When the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (the result of A2303 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), and “99”. Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the payout rate can only be displayed from 0 to 99 in the payout rate display section 67, in this way, when the number of obtained balls (payout rate) becomes 100 or more, "99" blinks in only one color (for example, red). Let it. In particular, when the payout rate becomes 100 or more in the special game state (big hit), the payout rate display is updated to one color to prevent the color of the payout rate display from frequently changing. In the special game state (big hit), it is also possible to turn off the payout rate display section 67 and hide the payout rate. In this case, however, the number of acquired balls (payout rate) is reduced. When updating the payout rate display with 100 or more, the color change of the payout rate display may be performed.

  The game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the number of acquired balls as an effect command (A2308), and executes an effect command setting process (A2309). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the payout rate (the number of acquired balls) on the display device 41. The command here corresponds to a payout rate (acquired ball count) of less than 100 (the range of 1 byte) displayed on the payout rate display section 67.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data relating to the payout rate in a test signal output data area in the RWM (A2310). As a result, the signal data relating to the payout rate is output to the relay board 70 and further to the external trial test device via the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, by comparing the payout rate output to the test firing test apparatus with the payout rate obtained by the test firing test apparatus, it can be confirmed whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred. Here, the payout rate may be a value of 100 or more, using the value loaded from the acquired ball count area as it is. In addition, as the signal data relating to the payout rate, information indicating that there was a prize at a specific winning opening and the data of the number of ejected balls are output as is to an external test test apparatus, and the test rate is calculated by the test test apparatus. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which: Further, when the payout rate is an abnormal value that is equal to or more than a predetermined value or equal to or less than a predetermined value, signal data (ON signal) notifying the abnormality, instead of signal data (numerical value) relating to the payout rate, is stored in the test signal output data area. A configuration for saving and outputting to the test shooting test device is also possible (when the value is a normal value, an off signal). Next, the acquired ball count area is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged ball count area is cleared to 0 (A2312).

  After step A2312, or when the number of ejected balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the value of the number-of-acquired-balls area for each role shown in FIG. 17B (III). Is calculated (A2313). Next, the number of winning balls obtained (prize-winning opening (for big hits)), which is the total number of prize balls due to winning in the big winning opening in the big hit state, is loaded (A2314), and the number of winning balls for winning (big winning prize) is loaded. Based on the mouth (for big hits)), (the number of acquired ball / the total value) × 100 (%) is calculated as the accessory ratio (A2315). Here, the total value is the sum of the number of obtained balls for each role, and corresponds to the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the winning opening. The accessory ratio is calculated to the first decimal place, but since the decimal number is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the accessory ratio may be calculated.

  It should be noted that, in the number of the obtained bonus balls used for calculating the bonus ratio, not only the number of acquired bonus balls (large winning prize mouth (for big hits)) but also the number of accessory obtained balls (large winning prize mouth (for small winning hits)) And / or the number of winning ball (s) (usually a variable winning device). Note that the number of winning balls (grand prize mouth (small hit)) is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the big prize mouth during the small hit state, and The variable winning device) is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display section 68 (A2316). Thereby, the accessory ratio can be displayed on the accessory ratio display section 68 via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio (A2315) is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2318). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the accessory ratio on the display device 41. Note that the command here may correspond to a value (0 to 1000) (range of 2 bytes) of 10 times the accessory ratio.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data relating to the accessory ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). Thereby, through the output process (A1622 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means, the relay board 70 further outputs signal data relating to the accessory ratio to an external trial test device, and informs (displays) the information relating to the accessory ratio. )it can. Then, it is possible to confirm whether an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the accessory ratio outputted to the trial shooting device with the accessory ratio obtained by the trial shooting device. Note that a configuration is also possible in which the data of the number of obtained bonus balls is output as it is to the external trial test device as signal data relating to the bonus ratio, and the trial ratio is calculated by the trial test device.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the number of discharged balls area (A2320), calculates the value of (100-number of discharged balls) (A2321), and outputs the segment data corresponding to the calculation result to the discharged ball. The data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display section 66 (A2322). As a result, the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display on the discharged ball number display unit 66 via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). When the count-up display is performed, the segment data corresponding to the value of the number of ejected balls area may be saved in the segment area as it is. Further, a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2323), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2324). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the number of ejected balls on the display device 41 by the countdown display. The command here corresponds to the number of ejected balls (a range of 1 byte) having a numerical value less than 100 displayed on the ejected ball number display section 66. Thereafter, the payout performance monitoring process ends.

  In addition, as a modified example, the value of the number of ejected balls, the value of the number of acquired balls, and the value of the acquired number of balls area for each character are transmitted to the effect control device 300 as data. An object ratio may be calculated. In steps A2310 and A2319, signal data relating to the payout rate and the accessory ratio, signal data indicating that the payout rate and the accessory ratio are abnormal values (values equal to or more than a predetermined value or less than a predetermined value), and the like. Is output as an external information signal to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a gaming hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in the amusement arcade, and is information or an abnormal value relating to the payout rate or the accessory ratio. May be notified (displayed).

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check processing. The gaming machine state check processing is executed in steps A2020, A2022 and A2025 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG. 15A.

  First, the game control device 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2402). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2402 is “N”), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and the state off command is obtained. Then, preparations are made (A2404). Further, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2405). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-related signal, and indicates a state of no touch for a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and (A2407). Further, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2408). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the processing of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and resets the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A2415 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the status-on command is an error-related command, the effect control device 300 starts error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is ON (A2501). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2501 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502) and sets an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is ON (result of A2501 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the current state (on / off) of the payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2509. If they do not match (the result of A2506 is "N"), the state of the current payout busy signal is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2509), and determines whether or not the monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (result of A2510 is "N"), the payout busy signal check process ends.

  When the monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (result of A2510 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the busy signal monitoring timer at a value smaller by 1 than the timer comparison value (A2511). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

  The payout busy signal check processing sets a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately when the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal flag is changed when the state of the change over the timer comparison value continues. And so on.

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an undefined state until one of the signal states continues over the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, and performs the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start-up switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 forming the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is performed. At the stage before the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating −1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2619.

  If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing is set in the register (A2605). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure change display game, and sets the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. The special figure ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, sets information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. The processing during the figure change is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, The special figure display process is performed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, and to set information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval (A2610). The details of the special figure displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “3” in Step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. A fanfare / interval processing for setting is performed (A2611). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if it is the last round, A special winning opening process is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball process (A2612). The details of the processing during opening of the special winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning port remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). The details of the special winning port remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2614). The details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing the small hit processing. (A2615). The details of the processing during the small hit fanfare will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). The details of the small hitting medium processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “9” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). The details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2618). The details of the small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then sets the special figure 1 display. A symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). After preparing a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), a symbol change control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring processing (A2601) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start-up switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning port 36 (A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being reduced (in the state of supporting the general electric power) (A2704).

  If the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time reduction (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, when it is during special figure time reduction (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2705). A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the winning prize port 36 does not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. If the player does not hit the ball right, the game ball does not pass through the normal starting gate 34. Therefore, in the power-generating support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-handed driving. In the case where the player has left-handed, the right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquiring process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning port. A determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary power is occurring (A2713). If the number of unauthorized winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations (for example, five), it is determined that unauthorized unauthorized access is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or injustice has occurred. In the case where such a game ball wins in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714). Then, the special figure start port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. In addition, in A2713, when it is determined that a normal power fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) in the startup opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets start-up opening no-prize information indicating that there is no start-up winning (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not an input has been made to the target switch (A2802). If no input has been made to the target switch (result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. Note that the target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number obtaining process in step A2702, and is the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number obtaining process in step A2710.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 reads the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register) and determines whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data. (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing ends.

  When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads and prepares the extracted big hit random number in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), The start opening winning information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random numbers are used in the common process of the special figure starting port switch.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs information on the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (the number of start storages) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target opening opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. It is saved in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes a special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A2918) is executed to execute the special figure start port switch common. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (A2916) in the start port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination process. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead (prior determination) processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (result of A3001 is “N”), the process shifts to a process of step A3004. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during the time reduction (general power support state) (A3002).

  When it is during the special figure time reduction (during the ordinary power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination processing. On the other hand, if it is not during the special figure time reduction (result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is being made (A3003). When a big hit or a small hit is in progress (result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the game is not in a big hit or a small hit (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit. Is executed (A3004). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is obtained (A3007), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) is won (A3008). If it is not a winning in the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  If the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (A3013), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. The information is acquired (A3012), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start-up switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed (A3016), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), Effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting processing in step A3017 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) to form a preliminary judgment means. In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening processing is being performed (A3101). If the special winning opening is being processed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning game opening process is not being performed (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning game remaining ball is being processed. A determination is made (A3102).

  When the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a process of step A3105. If the special winning game remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting medium processing is being performed. (A3103). If the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A3105. When the small hitting process is not being performed (result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball process is being performed ( A3104). The special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, and thus the progress of the game can be checked based on the special figure game processing number.

  When the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the special winning opening switches 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (A3115). If the special winning opening ball is being processed (result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the special winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (result of A3115 is “N”), It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3117), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 "). ) Is determined (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3118 is “Y”), the winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the small hitting process is not being performed (the result of A3121 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 suspension number (second startup storage number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). When the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (A3209). Is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that it is in a customer waiting demonstration state (a state of a customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets "0" as a process number to a special map ordinary process (A3212). A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, if the customer waiting demonstration has already been started (result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special map ordinary processing is ended.

  As described above, the customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted when the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second startup storage number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs the setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demonstration command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is turned off.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number. The figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  As described above, the check of the number of special figure 2 reservations is performed before the check of the number of special figure 1 reservations, so that if the number of special figure 2 reservations is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the change symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is performed (A3402). The details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting information on a change start of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start processing. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 change symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game, and is the same as the process in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. 28 except for the second start storage. Is what you do.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 2 and big hit information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared (A3505).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). Then, a variation start information setting process for setting information on the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601) and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (A3604). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the missed information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether or not the prepared big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this processing, the same processing as the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 30 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not a big hit is determined according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “N”), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A3807) and ends the big hit determination processing. I do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probable change state). (A3803). If the state is in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value during high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if the state is not the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value during low probability is set (A3805).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to be out (other than the big hit) (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the above-described big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure change display game becoming a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination. However, a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier as the judgment result (A3903), The determination processing ends.

  Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) becomes the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is greater than (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), a loss is set as the judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “N”), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3403) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) ) Is loaded with jackpot symbol random numbers (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing described later. In other words, the effect mode transition information allows the effect mode to be shifted upon a big hit. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (probable variable big hit symbol / usual big hit symbol etc.), so the big hit symbol type (big hit type) and the big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode that transitions later changes. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state, and therefore, the effect mode transition destination is also affected by whether or not the current state is the special figure high probability state (probable change state).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (the result of A4011). Is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4011). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode shift information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted upon a small hit. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the loss stop symbol pattern is changed to the stop symbol pattern. It saves in the area (A4017), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A3503) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a first half changing group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires a first half changing group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, a first-half variation group selection offset table is set (A4203), and offset data corresponding to the target number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) and the stop symbol pattern are acquired (A4204). .

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when it is out of range when the number of reservations is large, so in other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a second half variable group selection pointer table (A4207), and acquires a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. The process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of a miss, the occurrence rate of reach changes according to the number of holdings (the occurrence rate of reach decreases when the number of holdings is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

  The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires and prepares the address of the second half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2, and prepares (A4302) the target variation pattern random number. The variable random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between the hit and non-hit types. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the size of the hit is one byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size of outliers is 2 bytes.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a miss (A4304), and if it is a miss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4307. If it is not a loss (the result of A4304 is "N"), a distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the flow shifts to a process of Step A4307.

  Next, the game control device 100 obtains and prepares the address of the second-half variation selection table (second-half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the sorting (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved). The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from (1) and prepared (A4308). Then, a distribution process is executed (A4309), and a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second-half variation number area (A4310). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, an address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is obtained from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area. 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). Thereafter, a distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the first data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation selection table, but defines only the second half variation selection table in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables in the case where the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

  If the first data of the selection table (second half-change group table) is a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the selection table (second half-variation group table) is not a code with no distribution (result of A4402 is “N”), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) The value is obtained (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than “0” (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), and the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, a distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A4405 to generate a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table specified in the selection table (the second-half variation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of sorting (A4407), and 2 bytes The distribution processing ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sorting process. The distribution process selects the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  The game control device 100 first sets the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table which does not need to be sorted, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

  If the first data of the target selection table (the second-half change group table, the second-half change selection table, or the first-half change selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (A4507), and the allocation process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the target selection table (the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (the second-half variation selection table) One distribution value specified first in the group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, or the variation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (result of A4505 is “N”), the address is updated to the next distribution value address (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4503. The following processing is performed.

  That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (the second-half fluctuation group table, the second-half fluctuation selection table, or the first-half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and thereafter, the random number determined in the previous step A4505 is obtained. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second-half variation selection table, second-half variation pattern (second-half variation number), and first-half variation pattern (first-half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) Any one of the second-half variation selection table, the second-half variation pattern (the second variation number), and the first-half variation pattern (the first variation number) are selected from among the (variation numbers).

  If the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4505 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of sorting. (A4507), the distribution processing ends.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears a random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (A4604), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the change start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The symbol that is changing can be determined from the changing symbol determination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). The effect control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure displaying process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, (A4710). Further, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (A2610) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure displaying process. FIG. 42A shows the first half of the special figure displaying process, and FIG. 42B shows the latter half of the special figure displaying process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process (A5101), and clears the small hit flag area of the RWM (A5102). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (A5103), the big hit flag 1 area and big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (A5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105). If it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is “Y”), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game A test signal related to the start of the (Special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is on, the special symbol 2 hit signal is on) is in the test signal output data area of the RWM. Save (A5108), and set the round number upper limit value table (A5109).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (result of A5105 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5106), In a certain case (the result of A5106 is “Y”), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, and the accessory continuous operating device is operating) related to the start of the big hit (the special map 1 big hit) of the first special figure change display game The signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and a process of setting a round number upper limit value table is executed (A5109).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a round number upper limit (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit information, and saves the round number upper limit in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5110). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepares it as a production command (A5112), and executes a production command setting process (A5113). ). Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a production command (A5114), and the production command A setting process is executed (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5117).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning as a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the outside of the RWM. It is saved in the information output data area (A5118). In the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. The ON / OFF of two big hits and three big hits is determined by the winning opening information and the state of probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when a big hit with a payout (a big win opening information other than the big win opening information 1) is turned on, and a big hit without a payout (a so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is turned on when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when there is a big hit with a payout, and turned off when the big hit has no payout.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. ) Is set (A5119), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, information on the probability state of the special map and the time saving state (general power support state) when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) corresponding to the special winning opening information (A5122), and the large corresponding to the special opening opening information. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the winning opening (A5123). Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure displaying processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 39 to an open state based on a result being a special result in one of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. A special game state generating means for generating a state is provided.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A5106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). If the small hit flag is a small hit (result of A5125 is “Y”), a high probability change frequency updating process for updating the high probability change frequency for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the special figure high probability state is performed. Execute (A5126). Subsequently, the effect mode information check processing relating to the effect mode setting is executed (A5127) to determine whether the special figure high probability is high (the occurrence probability of the special result (big hit) of the special figure change display game is in the high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is (A5128).

  If the special figure high probability is not present (the result of A5128 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure command from the decorative special figure command area, prepares it as a production command (A5129), and sets the production command setting. The processing is executed (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), an effect command setting process is executed (A5132), and the flow shifts to the process of step A5133.

  In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A5128 is “Y”), the game control device 100 causes the process to proceed to step A5133. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the special figure is in the high probability state (during the probable change state), the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is notified to the player. In order not to be conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5133). After that, the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process ends.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5125 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode when the high-probability variation count updating process (A5135) is performed ( A5136). Then, a switching preparation remaining rotation speed (switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the production mode number is set (A5137), and it is determined whether the production remaining rotation speed (production remaining game number) matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed. Is determined (A5138). In addition, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes of the plurality of production modes, or may be the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. (The number of rotations) or the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.

  When the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (result of A5138 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special figure ordinary process as the process number (A5141).

  On the other hand, when the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (the result of A5138 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a production mode switching preparation command as a production command (A5139), and After performing the command setting process (A5140), “0” related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (A5141). The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, It is possible to prevent inconsistencies or the like from occurring in the effect across modes.

  Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5142), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the special figure displaying process ends.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability-variation-number update process (A5126, A5135) in the special figure displaying process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the high-probability-variation-number update process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (during the probability change state) (A5201). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability change frequency update process is terminated.

  When the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of high probability fluctuations by −1 (subtracts by 1) (A5202), and sets the number of high probability fluctuations to 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (A5203). If the high probability change frequency is not 0 (the result of A5203 is "N"), that is, if the high probability state continues in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability change frequency update process is terminated.

  If the number of times of high probability change becomes 0 (result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, if the high probability state ends in the current special figure change display game, the game control device 100 sets a high probability notification flag. The area is cleared (A5204), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state (for example, two big hits are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal Off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A5206). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, the ordinary figure changes only the probability state, so that the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. After that, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5207), and the low figure probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (A5208).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, a signal (for example, the firing position designating signal 1 is turned off) relating to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5210), and the game state display number 2 area is set to turn off the first game state display unit 57. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high-probability-variation-number update process ends.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check processing (A5127, A5136) in the special figure display processing will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure change display game is other than the big hit (small hit or miss).

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5401). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and for example, the effect mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit is selected. .

  When the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (result of A5401 is “N”), game control device 100 determines the number of rotations that can be performed until the effect mode is changed. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed has become 0 (A5403). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check processing ends. Also, when the effect remaining rotation speed becomes 0 (result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (A5404). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (A5405).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted, saves the effect mode number area in the RWM to the effect mode number area (A5406), and acquires the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode to be shifted. Then, it saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5407), acquires the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (A5408). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5410). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (the result of A5410 is “Y”), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check processing ends.

  If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5411). ), And effect command setting processing is executed (A5412). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A5417). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (result of A5417 is "N"), the effect mode information check process ends. If the mode is a left-handed mode (result of A5417 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5418), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5419). The information check processing ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives a notice of switching before the specified number of revolutions of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect modes in the game control device 100 in this way, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (A5124) in the special figure display processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “3” which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (big hit + small hit is output), and four big hits are turned on (big hit is output)). Saved in the output data area (A5503), the signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state) The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, the ordinary figure changes only the probability state, so that the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5505), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (A5506), and the general figure game mode flag area is set. The normal figure low probability flag is saved (A5507).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variable symbol determination flag area (A5508) and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Then, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (A5511), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a high probability state The high probability change frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (A5512). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state (general power support state) are completed.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode number in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the remaining effect rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5516), and the right-handed display LED (the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5517), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (A5134) in the special figure display processing will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “7” for the small hit fanfare processing (A5601) as a processing number, and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fan fare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5603), and turns on a signal (for example, one big hit signal) related to the start of the small hit game ( Big hit + small hit) is saved in the external information output data area (A5604), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, a special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A5605).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening illegal winning number area (A5606) and saves the illegal monitoring outside period flag in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A5607). Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5608), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57) is turned on. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds (R) in the special game state by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702). And effect command setting processing (A5703).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires an opening switching determination value according to the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A5706). When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “Y”), the special winning game opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5707). If the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value (result of A5706 is “N”), the special winning game opening timer (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5708).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to “4” related to the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A5709), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5710). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening (for example, turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5711), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information of the mouth count number area is cleared (A5712). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the special winning opening information 1 (4R: all open short), the special opening opening information 2 (16R: all open long), and the special winning opening Open information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), special winning opening information 4 (4R: all open long), special winning opening information 5 (16R: all open long), large The winning opening information 6 (16R: 1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), and the winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1-4R is long opening, 5-16R is short opening) are set. I have.

  Accordingly, the special winning opening operation information table includes the special winning opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16”, and the special winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the winning opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening process (A2612) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during opening of the special winning opening according to the present embodiment.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether the current round is the last round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area ( A5901). If it is not the last round (the result of A5901 is “N”), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (A5903), and the special winning opening is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (A5904).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) to a special figure game processing timer. In the area (A5905), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area. (A5906), an interval command is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  When the game is the final round (result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the remaining ball processing time (for final use) (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5908), An ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared as an effect command (A5909), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5910).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to “5” relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing (A5911), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5912). Thereafter, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, the details of the special winning game remaining ball processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning port remaining ball processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether the current round is the last round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area ( A6101).

  If the current round in the special game state is not the last round (result of A6101 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening operation determination table (A6102) and responds to the special winning opening opening information. An open switching determination value to be performed is obtained (A6103), and a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (A6105). If the round number is greater than the open switching determination value (A6105) The result is "Y"), and the routine goes to the process of Step A6109. If the number of rounds is equal to or smaller than the opening switching determination value (the result of A6105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A6106).

  Here, the rank down effect corresponds to an effect of executing a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round is continued, and notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, the special winning opening information indicating the jackpot pattern is the special opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the special opening opening information 3 (16R: 1-4R are long opening, 5-16R are long opening). If any one of the following is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 for the big hit rounds 1R to 3R, and a round continuation notification effect is executed at the fourth round. If the special winning opening information is the special winning opening information 2, the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the special winning opening is opened with the long opening in the round after the 5R, and the special winning opening information is displayed. In the case of the special winning opening information 3, the non-continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the special winning opening is shortly opened in the rounds after the 5R.

  When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (the result of A6106 is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A6109. If the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (result of A6106 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A6109.

  Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “Y”), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the game control device 100 determines the interval time for the rank down effect (for example, 3. 6 seconds) (A6108), and the flow shifts to the process of step A6109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special figure game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets “3” which is a processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39) (for example, the signal during the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (A6122), and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (the result of A6101 is “Y”), the special control game mode flag saves the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening information and the stop symbol pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is specified. The game is saved in the game processing timer area (A6114).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets “6” as the process number related to the big hit end process (A6115), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6116). After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (A6117), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (A6118). The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the gaming state is cleared (A6119).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds (A6120), and stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening. The information in the mouth opening information area is cleared (A6121), and a signal (for example, the special motor accessory 1 operating signal is turned off) related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39) is stored in the test signal output data area. The game is saved (A6122), and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end processing (A2614) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction determination data includes time reduction operation data (A6201). If it is not time saving operation data (result of A6201 is "N"), big hit end setting processing 1 is executed (A6202). If it is time saving operation data (result of A6201 is "Y"), big hit end setting processing 2 Is performed (A6203).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process at the start of the change (especially A4009, A4109). Then, an effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the remaining effect rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and sets the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Next mode transition information is obtained and saved (A6208).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command in the power failure restoration transmission command area as an effect command (A6210). ), And effect command setting processing is executed (A6211).

  Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the presence / absence of saving time (general power support), and the effect mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including “high probability / time saving” and “high probability / no time saving” which further include information on the effect mode. In the present embodiment, when the big hit ends, the state always changes to the probable change state (it always becomes a so-called ST state). Therefore, as the probability information commands, “high probability / time reduction / effect mode A”, “high probability / time reduction / effect mode” B "," high-probability / without-time-saving / effect mode C ", and" high-probability / without-time-saving / effect mode A ". Although not used in this process, there are other "low probability, no time saving, effect mode A", "low probability, no time saving, effect mode B", and "low probability, no time saving, effect mode C".

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6215).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a time reduction (generic power support) after the end of the big hit (A6216). If there is a time reduction (general support) (the result of A6216 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A6219. If there is no time saving (general-purpose support) (result of A6216 is "N"), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6218). Transition.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (A6219), and ends the big hit end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6202) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the absence of the time reduction state (for example, turning off the two big hits) in the external information output data area (A6301), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state (for example, Turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, turn off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302).

  Next, the number with no time reduction state is saved in the gaming state display number area (A6303), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (A6304), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The high probability & no time saving flag is saved (A6305). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (A6306), and a signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). In order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends. .

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6203) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (for example, turning on the two big hits) in the external information output data area (A6401). The signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner since it is output from the big hit. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 fluctuations) The time reduction state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6402).

  Next, the number indicating that there is a time reduction state is saved in the gaming state display number area (A6403), the general figure high probability flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (A6404), and the special figure is set in the special figure game mode flag area. The high probability & time saving flag is saved (A6405). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (A6406), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handing mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handing mode is set during the big hit, the setting related to the right-handing is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Tokuzu ordinary processing shift setting processing 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2. The special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure ordinary process (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off one signal of the jackpot, turning off three signals of the jackpot, and turning off four signals of the jackpot) in the external information output data area (A6503). Save the end signal (for example, turn off the condition device operating signal, turn off the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turn off the special symbol 1 signal, and turn off the special symbol 2 signal) in the test signal output data area. (A6504).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6506), and sets the information in the effect mode transition information area. The information is cleared (A6507). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (A6508), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A6509).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the number of discharged balls of the RWM to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data of “00” indicating the number of discharged balls in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the discharged ball number display section 66. (A6511). Thus, the number of ejected balls can be displayed as “00” on the ejected ball number display unit 66 at the end of the big hit through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the acquired ball count area of the RWM to 0 (A6512), sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A6513), and sets the payout rate to “00”. Is saved in a segment area (for example, a red display area) corresponding to the color number (A6514). Note that a segment area (for example, a green display area) that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to zero. Thereby, the payout rate can be displayed as “00” on the payout rate display section 67 at the end of the big hit through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). After that, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 ends.

  In the big hit state (special game state), the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate), which is the total number of prize balls per 100 discharged balls, is extremely large. Therefore, at the end of the big hit state, the number of ejected balls (and thus the number of ejected balls) and the acquired number of balls (and thus the payout rate) are cleared to 0, and the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate) is again accurate. To start a simple measurement. At the end of the big hit state, the display of the number of discharged balls and the display of the payout rate are reset to “00”. However, since it is more accurate to measure the accessory ratio continuously after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the acquired number-of-balls-by-accessory area (and, eventually, the accessory ratio) is not cleared to 0 even after the big hit state ends. Then, the accessory ratio display is continuously displayed before and after the big hit without being reset.

  As described above, the processing of steps A6510 to A6514 is performed at the end of the big hit (at the end of the big hit), the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total of the number of awarded balls), the display of the number of ejected balls, and the display of the payout rate. Is reset and set to an initial value (here, 0 or “00”).

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A2615) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “8” for the small hitting process as the process number (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning port in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (A6703), and outputs a signal (for example, The special electric accessory 1 operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6704). Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening (A6706), and stores the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) in the small hitting medium control pointer area. ) Is saved (A6707), and the processing during the small hit fanfare ends.

[Small hit processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle processing (A2616) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process.

  The game control device 100 first loads the value of the small hit control pointer (A6801), and determines whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”) (A6802). . If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is “N”), the small hit control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), and the small hit operation transition setting processing is executed (A6804). The hit processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A6805), and It is determined whether the flag that has been set is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not a small hit occurs during the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the employee is in the time saving state.

  When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (A6806 result is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “9” related to the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (A6809). If the loaded flag is not the flag relating to the special figure high probability (A6806 result is “N”), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared as a production command (A6807), and the production command setting process is executed (A6807). A6808), “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6810). Next, the small hitting remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6811), and OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6812). The process ends.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (A6804) in the small hit middle process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit operation shift setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the control pointer (the small hit control pointer) (A6901). When the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6902), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hit operation shift setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the control pointer is 1, 3 or 5, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A6904), and The ON data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

  Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. . Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec release (that is, at the time of switching from the first 200 msec release to the first 1500 msec close), the small hit control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 msec close is released. At the end (that is, at the time of switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the small hitting control pointer is updated to 1, and at the end of the second 200 msec opening, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 2. At the end of the second 1500 msec closing, the small hit control pointer is updated to 3, at the end of the third 200 msec opening, the small hit control pointer is updated to 4, and at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. The middle control pointer is updated to 5. At the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hit control pointer is updated to 6, and the small hit state ends after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the small hit ending time of 100 msec have elapsed. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec, the shutter is closed for 2000 msec, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A2617) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining ball processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “10” for the small hit ending process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special figure game processing timer area (A7203), and outputs a signal (for example, the special electric The operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area is cleared (A7205), the information of the small hit control pointer area is cleared (for example, cleared to 0) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (A2618) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit end processing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (A7302). When the loaded flag is not the flag relating to the special figure high probability (A7302 is “N”), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303), and the time is set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information is obtained (A7304).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted, saves the effect mode number area in the RWM in the effect mode number area (A7305), acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted, (A7306), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A7307). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (A7309). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure restoration transmission command area (result of A7309 is “Y”), the flow shifts to processing of Step A7319.

  When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (the result of A7309 is “N”), the game control device 100 converts the prepared probability information command into the power failure restoration transmission command area. (A7310), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7311). Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7313). Further, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7315).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A7316). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (result of A7316 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A7319. I do. When the mode is a left-handed mode (result of A7316 is "Y"), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A7317), and after effect command setting processing (A7318) is performed, The flow shifts to A7319.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (A7319), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time saving (during the time saving state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag relating to during special figure time reduction (result of A7320 is “Y”), the flow shifts to processing of step A7323. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special figure time saving (result of A7320 is "N"), a signal relating to left-handing instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( A7321), in order to turn off the right-displayed LED (the first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7322), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A7323. I do.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing as the processing number (A7323), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A7324). A signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, one big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A7325), and a signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off) is a test signal. It is saved in the output data area (A7326).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the variable symbol determination flag area (A7327), clears the information in the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears the information in the special figure game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hit end processing ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an effect command setting process for setting an effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7401). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (result of A7402 is “N”), game control device 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

  When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7404), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A7405 is “Y”), the process returns to step A7404.

  When the transmission buffer is not full (result of A7405 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets the effect command setting. The process ends.

  As described above, by transmitting the effect command by serial communication to the effect control device 300, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special figure game process, and a symbol variation control process in a general-purpose game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (common symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure) is changing (A7501, A7502). In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614). (For stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

  When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  If the updated flashing control timer is 0 (result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the variable flag for the symbol to be controlled is not varying (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7510), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control processing is ended.

  As the initial value of the blink control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. The initial value of the blink control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared for the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number reaches the upper limit value of the variable symbol number by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1). ) Are sequentially updated. In steps A7508 and A7511, a setting is made to acquire and display the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number, and update (change) the number of illumination patterns equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, a cycle of display is repeatedly performed.

  By defining the blink control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are repeated. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the normal winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the game control device 100 A general-purpose game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the general-purpose game processing number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, and sets the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. A normal map ordinary process for setting information necessary for performing the normal diagram change process is executed (A7608). Details of the ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, when the game processing number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-floor change process for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display process ( A7609). Details of the process during the ordinary figure change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction state is set if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a hit. The general-figure display process is performed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general-floor process (A7610). Details of the process during the ordinary figure display will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 performs continuation of the normal processing per ordinary map or setting of information necessary for performing ordinary electric remaining sphere processing. The middle processing per figure is executed (A7611). The details of the process during ordinary drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general electric remaining sphere process for setting information necessary for performing a general map end process (A7612). ). Details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-purpose hit end process for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose ordinary process (A7608). (A7613). Details of the ordinary drawing end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a general-figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general-figure display 53 (A7614). Thereafter, a symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and thereafter.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the general-purpose game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A7702). The game state in which the player hits right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general power support state). If the game state is a right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of step A7705. If it is not the right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “N”), a left-turn instruction notification command (left-turn instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-turn instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) for instructing left-turn on the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved general-purpose drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved general-purpose drawings is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of ordinary drawing reservations by +1 (A7706) and corresponds to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations. The address of the hit random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the regular winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the regular game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal winning switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is hitting the normal figure, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in the hit state and the normal change winning device 37 is executing the predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, in the case where the vehicle is in the ordinary drawing state (result of A7801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (result of A7802 is "Y"), the count of the ordinary power counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count value of the ordinary power counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). If the count reaches the upper limit value (result of A7804 is "Y"), the control pointer area during the normal drawing is hit and the operation end value (for example, 4) is saved (A7805).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the normal control pointer area per drawing (A7805). Finally, the general-purpose game process timer is cleared (A7806), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. That is, if there is a general winning of the upper limit or more in the hit state of the ordinary figure, the value of the end of the winning is saved in the ordinary figure processing control pointer area at that time, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is closed. So that the hit state of the ordinary figure ends on the way.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a when it is determined that the game is not in the ordinary drawing (the result of A7801 is “N”) (the result of A7802 is “N”). ) Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (result of A7804 is “N”), the normal power winning switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A7608) in the ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the routine of the ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is 0 (A7901). In a case where the number of ordinary figure reservations is 0 (result of A7901 is “Y”), “0” is set as a processing number for shifting to ordinary figure ordinary processing (A7921), and the processing number is designated as ordinary figure game processing. The data is saved in the number area (A7922). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the regular telephone illegal monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the ordinary processing is ended.

  In addition, when the number of ordinary figure reservations is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads a random number from the random number per ordinary figure storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM, and loads the RWM. The winning symbol random number is loaded from the ordinary symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per ordinary figure (for reserved number 1) and the symbol random number per ordinary figure storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than normal in the general-figure high probability state (in the high-probability state), that is, whether or not the time reduction state (general power support state) (A7904). In addition, the probability per figure in high probability is 250/251, and the probability per figure in low probability is 0/251.

  When the game is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) that is the lower limit determination value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7905). If the figure is in the high figure high probability (result of A7904 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in the figure figure high probability is set (A7906), and in step A7907 Move on to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or more than an upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7907). Note that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of the general figure and the low probability of the general figure. If the hit random number is equal to or larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of the range, the process shifts to the process of step A7909. If the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

  When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, when the hit is a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, a stop symbol number is set as a stop symbol number (A7910), the stop symbol information is saved in a stop symbol information area (A7911), and the flow shifts to the process of step A7915.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is “N”), that is, in the case of a winning, the gaming control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912), and stores the hit symbol random number in the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. Note that there may be several types of hit stop symbols.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916), and shifts the random number storage area per symbol. (A7917), after clearing the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7918), the ordinary figure reservation number is updated by -1 (A7919).

  In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the general-family reservation number 1 are moved up by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal-figure-changing process shift setting process (A7920), and ends the normal-figure normal process. Note that the normal-fluctuating process shift setting process will be described later.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal-fluctuating-process transition setting process. The process of setting a transition to a normal-figure process is executed in step A7920 in the normal-figure normal processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as a process number for shifting to the process of changing the general figure (A8101), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (A8102).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the general-purpose variation time (for example, 500 msec) in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8103). Here, the normal figure fluctuation time is common to the medium high probability figure and the medium low probability figure. A signal relating to the start of the normal figure change display game (normally, the pattern 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8104), and the change state flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is set. It is saved in the figure fluctuation control flag area (A8105). Then, the flash control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flash cycle timer of the general symbol display, is saved in the general symbol flash control timer area (A8106), and the initial value ( Here, “0” indicating a blank symbol is saved (A8107), and thereafter, the normal-figure-variation process shift setting process ends.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the during-fluctuating process (A7609) in the general-figure game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” (A8301) as a setting process for shifting to the process of displaying a general map, and saves the process number in the general game process number area (A8302). Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the general-purpose display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the general-purpose change display game on the general-purpose display, in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8303). .

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the change of the ordinary figure (the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is stopped is saved in the general figure change control flag area (A8305), and the normal figure change processing ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general figure display processing (A7610) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during normal-drawing display.

  First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or out-of-touch information) set in the ordinary processing and the normal processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to a normal drawing normal process (A8414). Then, the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A8415). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone illegal monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the process of displaying the general figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a hitting process setting table (A8404) and responds to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information. A hit start pointer value (in this case, any one of 0, 2, and 4) is acquired and saved in the normal-time hit control pointer area (A8405). Next, the general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general symbol game processing timer area (A8406). Through the above processing, the opening mode of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed three times.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as a process number for shifting to the process for normal drawing hitting (A8407), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A8408). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal figure change display game (the normal signal per symbol is turned on) and a signal related to the start of the normal power operation (the normal motor accessory 1 active signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, the on data is saved in a general solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general solenoid (A8410).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the ordinary number counting region storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8411), and determines the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the unauthorized unauthorized monitoring period. The stored information of the illegal number of illegally won prize area is cleared (A8412). Finally, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the general telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the process of displaying a general figure is ended.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure hit processing (A7611) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the ordinary drawing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal figure (A8601), and the loaded value of the control pointer during the normal figure is set to the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the general figure (the hit end). Is determined (A8602).

  Then, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the general figure (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the control during the general figure. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the normal power operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal time hitting process ends. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the ordinary figure (the value of the end of the collision) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Instead of performing the process of updating (+1) the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing operation in step A8603, the ordinary power operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the ordinary processing during the ordinary drawing operation ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the normal power operation shift setting process (A8604) in the normal drawing hitting process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary power operation shift setting process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37, so that the ordinary variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. The subsequent wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general-purpose operation shift setting process.

  When the value of the control pointer is one of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The ordinary power opening time (for example, 1700 msec), which is the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37, is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (A8704). Further, in order to turn on the general-purpose solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer is any one of 4, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706, ends the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37, and performs the ordinary electric ball processing (A7612). Is executed, "4" is set as the process number (A8706), and the process number is saved in the general-purpose game process number area (A8707).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary power remaining sphere processing time (for example, 600 msec) in an ordinary game processing timer area (A8708). After that, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to set the general-purpose solenoid 37c to off (A8709), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the details of the ordinary power remaining sphere process (A7612) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a processing number “5” relating to the end processing per ordinary figure (A8901), and saves the processing number in an ordinary figure game processing number area (A8902). After that, the general-purpose ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the normal electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the normal telephone count number area for counting the number of wins to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the middle control pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8906). After that, the normal electricity remaining sphere processing ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, details of the per-figure-per-end processing (A7613) in the per-figure game processing are described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the per-chart end processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a processing number “0” related to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A9101), and further saves the processing number in the ordinary figure game processing number area (A9102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game (the normal signal per symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter, ends the per-figure end processing. To end.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. The setting related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the section 58, the third game state display section 59, and the round display section 60 is performed.

  The game control device 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9202). If the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the ordinary figure reserved number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the general figure reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the general figure reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the general figure reservation display 56 (lamp D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both the tables 1 and 2 for displaying the number of ordinary drawings, so that the ordinary display indicator 56 does not blink. Since the display data of the figure reservation number display table 1 and the display data of the general figure reservation number display table 2 are different, the general figure reservation display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9206). If it is the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 reservation The number display table 2 is set (A9208), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reservation display 54 (lamp D11, D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9210). If it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 reservation The number display table 2 is set (A9212), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display 55 (lamp D13, D14) (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (the lamps D3 to D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And saves it in the segment area of the round display section 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which display modes on the second game state display unit 58 (ramp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), and the like are defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is obtained and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (the lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet unauthorized monitoring processing performed in the magnet unauthorized monitoring processing (A1312) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormally, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A9301 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets the magnet irregularity monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. The timer is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether the timer has expired (A9303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, if abnormal magnetism has been continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A9304), the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the magnet fraud notification timer is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command of magnet impropriety notification as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet improper occurrence flag indicating that a magnet impropriety has occurred as a magnet improper flag (A9307). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 has been continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A9301 is “N”), that is, when an abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet illegal monitoring timer. (A9308). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A9310). In addition, even when the time of the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (result of A9303 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, that the time has expired or that the time has already expired, Is completed or when the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for ending magnet fraudulent notification is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet illegal release flag as a magnet illegal flag (A9312), and determines whether or not the prepared magnet illegal flag matches the value of the magnet illegal flag area (A9313).

  Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, when the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A9314), and the production command setting is performed. The processing is executed (A9315). After that, the magnet illegal monitoring process ends.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (panel wave sensor) of the game board, and start and end of fraud notification are set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command for informing the dish radio wave as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a dish radio fraud flag indicating that the dish radio has occurred as a dish radio fraud flag (A9404). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (A9409). In other words, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A9401 is “N”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 If is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, that the time has expired or that the time has already expired, Is completed, or when the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command to end radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared panel radio fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio fraud flag area (A9409).

  Then, when the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag matches the value of the panel radio wave illegal flag area (the result of A9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the panel radio wave illegal monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is "N"), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio illegal flag area (A9410), and the effect command setting processing is executed (A9411). After that, the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 75A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the latter half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1305), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313), It performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device, and setting the information in an output buffer.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If a body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and off data of the security signal is stored in the external information output data. It is saved in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”) or when the body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the door / door. The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). A determination is made (A9508). As an initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1029 of main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is measured from the time of RAM initialization.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and shifts to a process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet irregularity is not occurring (result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not panel radio irregularity is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that when the dish radio fraud flag is saved in the disc radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the dish radio is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the general fraud fraud is occurring (A9513). When the irregularity of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the irregularity of the special winning opening is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the illegal winning occurrence flag regarding the special winning opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the special winning opening is being generated. If the special winning opening illegality is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y”), if the panel radio fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the frame radio fraud is generated Is in progress (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the irregularity of the telephone is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the irregularity of the winning opening is occurring (the result of A9514 is “Y”). Y "), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9516), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9517). By setting the ON data of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

  After steps A9515 and A9517, the game control device 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9518). The details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start-up signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the start-up opening (A9519). Details of the start-up signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is not 0 (A9520). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9521). When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (result of A9521 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is output to the external information output data. The area is saved in the area (A9522), and the external information editing process ends.

  When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0 (the result of A9521 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 outputs the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal, which is generated each time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated due to winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), to an external device. Processing.

  First, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0. (A9603).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A9604), and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (result of A9603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9608), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A9606). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9607). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (the result of A9606 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is output to the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, the details of the starting port signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start-up signal editing process. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first updates -1 unless the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  When the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (result of A9702 is “Y”), game control device 100 determines whether or not the starting port signal output count is 0 (A9703). If the start port signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A9704), and the start port signal output control timer area is set to the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the starting port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the starting port signal editing process.

  When the number of times the starting port signal is output is 0 (result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs off data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device to the external information output of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section. (A9706). Note that that the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (result of A9706 is “Y”), the game control device 100 stores the ON data for turning the start port signal on in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9707), and terminates the start port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start-up port signal output control timer is not in the output-on period (result of A9706 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs off data for turning off the start-up port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

[Control of production control device]
Hereinafter, the control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 using the effect control program will be described.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “B ****”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect controller 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, a command reception interruption process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, effect controller 300 clears a WDT (watch dock timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B1002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. An effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for receiving an operation (operation of operation means such as the effect button 25) such as a change in the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by a player or a person involved in a game store (hall) is executed. (B1010). In the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and the effect on the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs an effect point control process of adding and clearing effect points (B1011). The processing of adding the production points is performed by performing the production or operation to be added to the production points, and at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game, for example, information on the production points And the like can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B1012), analyzes a received command received from game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B1013). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content (effect) displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets effect display editing for setting the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The processing is executed (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the rendering preparation to the display frame buffer is completed, and the rendering command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B1016 is “N”), the process of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is “Y”), the display device 41 A screen drawing is instructed (B1017). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame switching is performed, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (１ ／ of the frame period). . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 second.

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from speaker 19 (B1018).

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) composed of an LED or the like (B1019). In the decoration control processing, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (a board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid operation is performed by driving a solenoid.

  Then, after finishing the process of B1020 described above, effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1020 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing (B1013) in the above-described main processing (FIG. 78) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as a command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the number of received commands is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and thus the received command check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, data is not overwritten.

  Then, effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read out in the order of the indexes and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N )), And repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, the analysis of the received command is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the received command to analyze the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 80. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 79) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE part and the lower byte into an ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of the command. You. Therefore, the higher order and lower order of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). Note that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special decoration symbol, and includes variation commands (A4608 and A4609). If the MODE section indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the range of the big hit command (B1207). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to a performance during a jackpot, such as a fanfare command (A5116), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5907), Ending command (A5909). If the MODE section indicates a jackpot-related command (result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot-related command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent the jackpot-related command (result of B1207 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol-related command (B1209). Note that the design commands include decorative special figure commands (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. If the MODE section indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbolic command (result of B1209 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section falls within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section indicates a one-shot command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  The effect control device 300 includes a command related to the number of ejected balls (A2323 in FIG. 18), a command corresponding to the payout rate (acquired ball number) (A2308 in FIG. 18), and a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio (A2308 in FIG. 18). (A2317 in FIG. 18) may be received as an effect command (single-shot command), and in the single-shot command processing, display setting processing for displaying the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory ratio may be performed. The effect control device 300 may back up (store) the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored content even at the time of a power failure.

  In addition, in the single command processing, the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the following processing. When the MODE unit indicates a RAM initialization command, a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed. When the MODE unit represents a command at the time of restoration from a power failure or a demo command for waiting for a customer, a power failure restoration setting process for restoring the power failure or a customer waiting demonstration setting process for displaying a demonstration of the customer waiting on the display device 41 or the like is executed. . When the MODE unit represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command or the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing and the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing are executed. When the MODE section indicates a probability information command, the probability information setting process is performed. When the MODE unit indicates an error / illegal command, an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or the illegality is executed. The error / illegal commands include, for example, a false error occurrence command (A2108), a false cancellation command (A2116), a status off command (A2404), and a status on command (A2407). When the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching, effect mode switching setting processing is executed.

  If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the range of the prefetching symbol command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol commands include the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (A3014). If the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol-related command (result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-reading symbol-related command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the prefetching symbol command (the result of B1213 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes the aforementioned prefetch variation pattern command (A3018). If the MODE section indicates the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( The result of B1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis processing ends.

[Display screen layout example]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a layout example of a display screen (display unit) of the display device 41.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharge ball number display section 691 for displaying the discharge ball number, a payout rate display section 692 for displaying the payout rate, and an accessory ratio display section 693 for displaying the accessory ratio. . In FIG. 81, 57, 36, and 59.3 are displayed as the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively.

  In addition, even if the number of ejected balls, the payout ratio, and the accessory ratio are constantly displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, it is an obstacle. For example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to displaying the front frame opening error), the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed.

  In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) for accepting an operation by a player or the like, display / non-display of the number of ejected balls, a ball-out rate, and a ratio of a public item is switched or the number of ejected balls according to selection by the player or the like. It may be possible to select which of the payout ratio and the accessory ratio is to be displayed. In the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the number of ejected balls may be selected to be displayed on the display device 41 as a countdown display or a countup display by selection by a player or the like. The selection may be performed by displaying a menu of options on the display device 41 and operating the operation means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

  Furthermore, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. During the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, the latest (latest) number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed. In this case, the display size is set only during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is made larger than in other cases, it will be possible to appeal to visitors of the game store that is not playing.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), a first special symbol in the left area 610a, a second special symbol in the right area 610b, In the middle area 610c, the third special symbol is variably displayed (in FIG. 81, a stopped symbol is displayed). The number-of-discharged-balls display section 691, the payout rate display section 692, and the accessory ratio display section 693 are provided above the variable display area 610, but are not limited thereto.

  In addition, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be hidden or reduced in display size when they interfere with the variable display of the variable display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41, The display may be increased or the display size may be increased only when the variable display is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. When a movie-type reach effect or the like is performed at the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced symbol may be variably displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, in the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced symbol may be constantly displayed in a variable manner. The variable display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The large decorative special symbol in the variable display area 610 and the special special symbol in the small variable display area 615 may be similar or completely different.

  The hold display 633 (start memory display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) is based on the special figure 1 hold information set from the decorative special figure 1 hold number command and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. The image is drawn on the screen based on the set special figure 2 suspension information (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 indicates a hold (starting memory) related to the special figure change display game before execution. As the hold display 633, the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display are arranged and displayed on the hold display unit 630 in winning order (order of occurrence of the hold).

  On the hold display section 630, a spherical (circular) hold display 633 is displayed in a state where the left side is lowered and the gutter 635 is inclined. Further, a hold corresponding display 633a (holding change display) corresponding to the hold (holding in progress) related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the holding digestion area 640 imitating a frame of a globe (frame). As the earth within). The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display section 630 moves from the left side of the gutter 635 to the hold digestion area 640 every time the special figure change display game is started.

  Further, at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 for displaying the special figure 1 reserved number by a number and a special figure 2 reserved number display for displaying the special figure 2 reserved number by a number A part 660 is provided.

  At the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41, a navi character 670 is displayed. The navi-chara 670 is usually arranged so as to be adjacent to the hold correspondence display 633a (reserve digestion area 640) indicating the suspension during digestion. The navi character 670 includes a character name display portion 670b and a meter display portion in addition to the main body 670a. Also, in association with the navi-chara 670, the serif that the navi-chara 670 appears to emit (or a serif notice) may be displayed on the serif display unit 680. The dialogue may be output not only as a display but also as a sound. In addition, the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed according to the operation on the screen of the navi-character 670 (the navigation character 670 moves to display the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory-ratio). Perform the effect to display).

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the payout control means (payout control device 200 and the like) determines whether the game ball is in a prize area (general prize port 35 or starting prize port 36) or a variable prize apparatus (normal variable prize apparatus 37 or special variable prize). When the player wins the device 39), it is possible to pay out the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each of the prize area and the variable prize device. The display means (principal material ratio display section 68, the display device 41, and the like) indicates the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize winning device to the total number of prize balls paid out (combination). Object ratio) can be displayed. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the player easily wins the variable prize winning device (an impression that the open state occurs frequently), which is an incentive (index) for the player to continuously play the game.

  The counting means (the game control device 100 or the like executing the processing of steps A2015 and A2210) is the number of ejected balls, which is the number of game balls ejected from the game area, or the number of game balls fired in the game area. Count the number of launch balls. The display means (the payout rate display section 67, the display device 41, and the like) can display a ratio (a payout rate) of the total number of awarded balls obtained by winning to the number of ejected balls or the number of fired balls. Therefore, the player can be made interested in the general winning opening 35. Then, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The display means (the number of ejected balls display section 66, the outgoing ball rate display section 67, the accessory ratio display section 68, the display device 41, and the like) displays the number of ejected balls, the outgoing ball rate, The accessory ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the customer waiting state, the display means may display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio. This is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  Each time the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the display means (the payout rate display section 67, the display device 41, and the like) displays the total number of award balls obtained by the predetermined number of game balls. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be simply displayed as the total number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in the general winning opening 35 and to increase interest in the game.

  The calculating means (the winning opening switch / the game control device 100 which executes the state monitoring process, etc.) is configured to determine whether or not each of the winning regions and the variable winning devices simultaneously wins at a predetermined number of timings. Based on the priority determined for the area and the variable winning device, the total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls obtained by winning one of the plurality of prizes. Accordingly, in the normal game state and the special game state other than the normal power support state, the total number of award balls as large as possible (the payout rate) at the timing when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. ) Is required, and the player's expectation of the game can be improved.

  The calculating means (the winning control switch / the game control device 100 which executes the status monitoring process, etc.) is configured to determine whether or not the specific gaming status (the ordinary power support status) has occurred, and the prize area to which the number of prize balls is added. The priority of each (winning area or variable winning device) can be changed. Therefore, in the specific game state (the normal power support state), since there are many prizes to the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, the prize to the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 is preferentially adopted and the total number of prize balls can be calculated.

  The reset means (the game control device 100 or the like executing the processing of steps A6510 to A6514) can reset the total number of winning prizes (ball-out rate) to an initial value when the special game state ends. . During the big hit state (special game state), the total number of prize balls is very large, but after the big hit state, accurate measurement of the total prize ball number (ball-out rate) can be started. Also, the reset means, at the end of the special game state, the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out to the number of prize balls paid out due to winning in the variable prize prize device (principal ratio) Is maintained without resetting. Thereby, the accessory ratio can be accurately measured irrespective of the big hit state (special game state).

  The game information output means (such as the game control device 100 executing the output processing) can output information on the total number of winning prizes (ball-out rate) and information on the accessory ratio to an external device. Therefore, a comparison is made between the total number of prize balls output to an external device such as a test shooting test device (ball-out rate) and the total number of prize balls determined by the external device (ball-out ratio) to determine if there is any discrepancy. You can check.

  The monitoring means (the winning opening switch / the game control device 100 which executes the state monitoring process, etc.) monitors and monitors the winning regions and the winning in the variable winning device in descending order of the number of obtained prize balls. If there is a prize, the total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls of the prize. Therefore, the largest possible prize ball total (payout rate) is obtained with priority, and the player's sense of expectation of the game can be improved.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, the display control is executed by the payout control device 200 in addition to the number-of-discharged balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 for which the display control is executed by the game control device 100. The number of discharged balls to be displayed 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853 are provided. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are provided on the collective display device 50 on the front of the gaming machine 10, as in the first embodiment. The number-of-discharged-balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. The present invention is not limited to this, and the number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853, which are display-controlled by the payout control device 200, may be provided in the upper plate unit. As described above, when the number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 or the upper plate unit, the game board 30 is replaced with another game board. However, the use can be continued without being discarded, which leads to cost reduction.

  The number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the ball-out rate display section 852, and the accessory-ratio display section 853 are each provided in the same manner as the discharge-ball number display section 66, the ball-out rate display section 67, and the accessory-ratio display section 68. (2 or 3) 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display (LED lamp, display device).

  FIG. 82 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10. A game control device 100 (main board) for integrally controlling the game via a switch base 738 is provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the game control device 100 via a control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the device is provided. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back of the effect control device 300 and the upper portion of the back of the game control device 100 is provided. In a state where the game board 30 thus configured is housed in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protection cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back surface of the game board 30 project behind the front frame 12. I do.

  A storage unit 750 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and aligns the stored game balls to flow down is disposed on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12. . A payout unit 790 that pays out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is provided in one inside portion of the front frame 12.

  In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100 and a game ball based on a rotation operation of the operation handle 24 are provided on a lower portion of the back surface of the front frame 12. A ball launching device 742 for launching, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are provided.

  The number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853 are arranged on the rear surface (back side) of the payout control device 200 (payout control board). Unlike the display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68, the display unit 67 is visible only from the back side of the gaming machine 10. The number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853 are not visible to ordinary players, but are visible only to persons involved in the game store (eg, employees). Note that the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, when the display of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the ratio of the accessory is not desired to be displayed to a general player, the number of ejected balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67 on the front of the gaming machine 10, The ratio display section 68 can be omitted. In this case, only from the back side of the gaming machine 10, the display of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the ratio of the accessory is confirmed by the number-of-discharged-balls display section 851, the ball-out rate display section 852, and the accessory-ratio display section 853. it can.

  In addition, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of awarded balls), and the ratio of bonuses based on the payout command. Display control is performed on the number-of-balls display section 851, the payout rate display section 852, and the accessory ratio display section 853. Note that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out ball detection command (A2017) in units of one prize in the winning opening (prize area). It should be noted that the payout control device 200 receives the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and displays the discharged ball number display unit 851 provided in the payout control device 200, the payout rate display. A configuration in which the display is performed on the unit 852 and the accessory ratio display unit 853 is also possible.

  The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and like the game control device 100, a discharge ball count area for storing the discharge ball count, and the number of balls obtained per 100 discharge balls (prize). In the memory, an acquired ball count area for storing the total number of balls is stored in the memory (see FIG. 17B). The method of calculating the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of awarded balls), and the ratio of the accessory is the same as in the first embodiment. The out ball detection command is used for updating the number of ejected balls by +1.

  FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of a payout command (payout number command). The payout command is composed of one byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (first bit) is an out ball flag indicating that the ball has entered the out port 30b, and the second to fourth bits have a winning in the winning port. In this case, the winning opening information for specifying the winning opening is indicated, and the fifth to eighth bits indicate the number of winning balls as they are. The winning bit information of the second bit to the fourth bit is as follows: "001" is the general winning port 35, "010" is the starting port 1 (starting port 36), and "011" is the normal variable winning device 37 (start port). 2), “100” indicates a special winning opening (winning during a big hit), and “101” indicates a special winning opening (winning other than during a big hit such as a small hit). When the out ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when there is a ball in the out port 30b, the number of award balls is zero. As in the first embodiment, the total number of awarded balls is stored in the acquired number of balls area, and the total number of awarded balls for each winning opening is stored in the acquired number of balls per accessory area as the number of acquired balls per accessory. You.

  For example, when the payout command is represented by a hexadecimal number, ten prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 35 are “1AH”, three prize balls for winning in the starting opening 1 are “23H”, The two prize balls for winning the mouth 2 are “32H”, the 14 prize balls (big hit) for winning the big winning opening are “4EH”, and the 14 prize balls for winning the big winning opening ( The small hit is “5EH”, and the notification (out-ball detection command) by out-ball detection is “80H”.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the above-described second embodiment, the same operation and effects as those of the first embodiment are obtained, and the number-of-discharged-balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory are arranged on the rear surface (back surface) of the payout control device 200. The ratio display portion 853 allows the number of ejected balls, the payout ratio, and the accessory ratio to be visually recognized even from the back side of the gaming machine 10.

[Other Modifications of First and Second Embodiments]
An embodiment in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment are modified as follows is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 controlled by the game control device 100 are provided not on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 but on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are provided on the back (back) of the game control device 100 provided on the back of the gaming machine 10. Is visible only from the back side of the. In this case, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 can also be shown only to persons involved in the game store (employees, etc.) without showing them to ordinary players. . If the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, there is a possibility that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 will not be impaired for ordinary players. is there. Further, the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are provided on a board (main board) of the game control device 100. Since the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed so as not to be opened in the case (since it is swaged), the number of discharged balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, the accessory ratio display section No improper action can be made to the display of 68.

  The number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio are displayed on the collective display device 50 on the front of the gaming machine 10 (the number of ejected balls display section 66, the attendance rate display section 67, the accessory ratio display section 68). Display units (discharged ball number display unit 851, payout rate display unit 852, accessory ratio display unit 853) provided in the payout control device 200 on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, One or only two may be displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio is not displayed but at least one is displayed. That is, one of the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the ball-out rate display section 67, and the accessory-ratio display section 68 is omitted, the number-of-ball-discharges display section 851, the ball-out rate display section 852, and the accessory-ratio display section 853. May be omitted. In addition, by increasing the number of 7-segment displays (LED lamps), a first display unit for displaying a continuous accessory ratio as the accessory ratio display unit 68 and a commonly used so-called accessory ratio ( It is also possible to provide a second display section for displaying all the ratios of the main character, and to display both the continuous ratio of the main character and the so-called ratio of the main character (all the ratio of the main character) simultaneously. Further, when the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) (A1016) is pressed and turned on, in the accessory ratio display unit 853, the display of the entire accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be alternately switched. .

  Furthermore, a common display in which four 7-segment displays are horizontally arranged without separately providing the number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68. A configuration is also possible in which only one is provided and the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio are displayed. In such a common display, every time the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is turned on, it is possible to sequentially switch which of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio is displayed. In this case, the common display displays one of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio together with an identification symbol (such as an alphabet) indicating what is being displayed. For example, the number of ejected balls is displayed as "h55", the payout rate is "d30", the total bonus ratio is "y50.8", and the continuous bonus ratio is "r58.4".

  Further, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio are held as information inside the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 and the microcomputer (CPU) of the payout control device 200, and the display unit and display of the gaming machine 10 are displayed. The device 41 does not display the number of ejected balls, the ball rate, and the ratio of the accessory at all, and merely outputs (or displays) the number of ejected balls, the ball rate, and the ratio of the accessory to an external device (testing test device or the like). Good (of course, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be output to an external device while being displayed on the display unit or the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10).

  Further, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of ejected balls, the payout ratio, and the accessory ratio are determined by a user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300. In addition to the calculation, the CPU of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 has a calculation function (hardware calculation function) and sets a parameter in an internal register ( The number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be automatically calculated by firing (ejecting) a game ball, setting information each time a prize is detected, or the like. Then, the number of ejected balls calculated by the hardware calculation function (calculation means) from the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 to an external device (such as the inspection device 500), and the number of payout balls. The ratio and the accessory ratio may be output.

  If the total number of ejected balls from power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) or if the number of times of execution of the variable display game from power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100), it is given as a privilege. It is good also as a structure which displays a payout ratio and an accessory ratio. In this way, the operation of the gaming machine may increase immediately after the amusement store is opened, and the accurate accessory ratio can be displayed.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the accessory ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (the total number of prize balls) in the entire period from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present time. The calculation may be performed on the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) of the special figure variable display game. For example, the predetermined period is a period related to one big hit (from the normal gaming state before the big hit to the end of the big hit) or a period related to one rendezvous (rensou) (the normal gaming state before the big hit is definitely changed). (The time saving (until the electric support) ends completely), and the accessory ratio may be calculated separately for each such predetermined period.

  The effect control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out-ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of ejected balls, the number of balls released (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of award balls), and the ratio of the personal belongings. May be. In this case, the effect control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 capable of retaining the stored contents even at the time of a power failure. In this way, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device 41 immediately after restoration of the power failure (after power-on). Also, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the selection method by the player or the like is used to switch the method of calculating the accessory ratio displayed on the display device 41, and the effect control device 300 is selected. The accessory ratio may be calculated according to the calculation method and displayed on the display device 41. Note that, as described above, the method of calculating the bonus ratio is based on the ratio (%) of the number of award balls obtained by winning the big winning opening during the jackpot state to the total number of award balls. However, it depends on whether the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by prize in the normal variable prize device 37 or the large prize port in the small hit state is included.

  Also, assuming that the number of acquired balls (number of paid-out prize balls) is one set (one unit), the number of acquired balls by the character (acquisition of number of objects) per set and the number of balls acquired by winning ports other than the accessory A configuration is possible in which (the number of winning opening balls) is stored in the ring buffer and used for calculating the ratio of the bonus and the payout ratio. Here, the special prizes are a special prize winning device 39 (large winning prize port) and a normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize port). (First start winning opening). The ring buffer cannot be cleared to prevent fraud, and always accumulates the number of acquired balls regardless of the time or the number of times of the special figure change display game. Based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning opening balls stored in the ring buffer, it is possible to flexibly calculate the ratio of the bonus and the payout ratio for each predetermined period or every predetermined number of obtained balls (number of payout winning balls).

  In addition, as a storage form, both the number of bonus balls and the number of winning opening balls may be stored in a ring buffer, for example, as a set (block) of 2 bytes each for 1 byte. Further, if one of the number of the winning ball and the winning opening is subtracted from 100, the other can be calculated. Therefore, only one of the number of the winning ball and the winning opening is stored in the ring buffer. Good. Further, the number of acquired balls for each accessory (see FIG. 17B) may be stored in the ring buffer as the number of acquired balls and the number of winning balls.

  The ring buffer may be provided in a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory mounted on any of the game control device 100 (main board), the payout control device 200 (payout board), and the effect control device 300 (sub-board). As a result, there is no need to specially back up the number of winning balls and the number of winning opening winning balls. The size of the ring buffer is, for example, 600 sets. Assuming that the number of balls fired per minute by the ball launching device is about 100 and the payout rate is 100%, there are payouts of 100 (one set) of prize balls per minute. With this, it is possible to save the number of obtained balls for about 10 hours.

  If there is a free space in the ring buffer, that may be notified. The display device 41 for the effect may give a notification on the screen indicating that there is a free space in the ring buffer and notify the user. This notification may be made only during the game (other than the customer waiting state), the customer waiting state, or the hall setting mode. In addition, a dedicated LED may be provided in the collective display device 50, the game control device 100, or the like, and the notification by lighting or blinking may be performed. Instead of providing a dedicated LED, an existing LED may be notified in a lighting mode (color or blinking) different from normal. Space information indicating that there is a space in the ring buffer may be transmitted as a test shot test signal or an external information signal, and may be displayed on a test test device or an external device to notify that there is space in the ring buffer. In addition, the notification may be performed by the sound of the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that configurations other than those described below can be applied to configurations common to the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and / or the time reduction end timing, the display device 41 displays the accessory ratio (all the accessory ratio (so-called accessory ratio) and the continuous accessory ratio). Is done. In addition, the value of the accessory is stored as a value (a value measured by resetting at the end of each special game) divided for each special game (big hit) consisting of a round game of a predetermined number of rounds, included in the big hit history information relating to the special game. Can be displayed on the display device 41 while being included in the big hit history information.

[Payout performance monitoring processing of the third embodiment]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating process (FIG. 17A). Steps having the same contents as the payout performance monitoring processing of FIG. 18 have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In step A2313, the game control device 100 calculates the total value (the total number of prize balls) of the values of the number of obtained ball count areas for each role shown in FIG. Loading is performed from the acquired ball count area for each role (A9801). The number of balls for each of the roles here is the total number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening during the big hit, the total number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening during the small hit (except during the big hit), ordinary This is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the variable winning device 37 (starting port 2).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates (the number of acquired ball / the number of acquired items / total value) × 100 (%) as an accessory ratio based on the number of acquired ball (A9802). Here, the so-called continuous role ratio (the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning prize during the jackpot state) and the commonly used so-called role ratio are taken as the role ratio. Both (the ratio of the entire bonus: the winning prize port and the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37) are calculated. When calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the total number of prize balls by winning in the special winning opening during the big hit is used as the number of the accessory acquisition balls. When calculating the total role ratio, the total number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening during the big hit and the prize by winning in the big winning opening in the small hit (except during the big hit) are calculated as the number of the gained balls. The sum (total) of the total number of balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is used. In addition, here, in addition to the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, a large winning opening ratio (a prize obtained by winning a large winning opening during a big hit state and a small hitting state in the total prize balls). Other ratios such as the ratio of the number of balls) may be calculated.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the segment data corresponding to the one calculation result in order to display one of the calculation results of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the character ratio display unit 68. Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display section 68 (A9803).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the big hit end timing (A9804). Here, the big hit end timing can be variously set as long as it can be recognized that the big hit state (special game state) has ended. For example, when the remaining ball processing time (final use) elapses (A5908), the big hit end timing is determined to be the last round in the special winning port remaining ball processing (FIG. 49) (the result of A6101 is "Y"). ), The timing at which the processes of steps A6112 to A6122 are executed (when ending starts). The big hit end timing may be during ending or at the end of the ending, that is, when the ending time (A6114) has elapsed.

  If the current timing is the jackpot end timing (result of A9804 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio as an effect command ( A2317), effect command setting processing is executed (A2318).

  Thereby, at the timing when the special game state ends (big hit end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio (so-called bonus ratio) on the display device 41. In the special game state (big hit state), the continuous variable ratio and the total variable ratio change greatly by opening of the special variable prize device 39 (large winning opening). Displaying the ratio merely confuses the player and is wasteful. Therefore, at the end timing of the big hit immediately after the great change, the ratio of the consecutive bonuses and the ratio of all the bonuses are displayed.

  If it is not the big hit end timing (the result of A9804 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether it is the high probability end timing or the time saving end timing at present (A9805). Here, the high-probability end timing or the time-saving end timing (specific gaming state end timing) can be variously set as long as it can be recognized that the high-probability state or the time-saving state (generic power support state) has ended. In the case where the jackpot always changes to the probable change state (so-called ST state) as in the first embodiment, the high-probability end timing and the time-saving end timing are the same timing. 0 (result of A5203 is “Y”), which is the timing at which the processes from steps A5204 to A5211 are executed. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, in a model in which a time saving state with low probability (general power support state) exists, a time saving end timing different from the high probability end timing exists.

  If it is the high-probability end timing or the time saving end timing at present (the result of A9805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs the command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. A command is prepared (A2317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2318).

  Thereby, at the timing when the specific game state ends (the high-probability ending timing or the time-saving ending timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. . In the specific gaming state, the change of the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio becomes larger than that in the normal gaming state by opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) by the public telephone support. Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is only confused and wasteful. Therefore, at the end timing of the specific game state immediately after the large change, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are displayed.

  When it is neither the high probability end timing nor the time reduction end timing at present (the result of A9805 is “N”), the game control device 100 shifts to step A2319 without executing the processing of step A2317 and step A2318.

  When the payout performance monitoring process is executed (when a prize is generated) by the above process, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are always calculated, and the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and At the time reduction end timing (timing immediately after the significant change in the bonus ratio), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the display device 41. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are displayed on the display device 41 only at one of the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing.

  Note that when the big hit end setting process 1 (FIG. 51) is executed, the latent probability change state with a high probability and no time saving (no ordinary power support) is established, but after the big hit end, the latent probability change state is reached and a predetermined number of special figure change displays are performed. When the game is executed, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (A9802) may be prepared as a production command (A2317), and the production command setting process may be executed (A2317). A2318).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating a variation of the payout performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment.

  In FIG. 86, the order of steps A9804, A9805 and steps A2313, A9801-A9803 are interchanged, and only at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are changed. It calculates (A9802), prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result as an effect command (A2317), and executes an effect command setting process. In FIG. 86, when the payout performance monitoring process is executed, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are not always calculated, and the calculation load is reduced.

  As described above, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing (timing immediately after the large change in the bonus ratio), the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are calculated, and the effect control device 300 Can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41. Note that the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41 at only one of the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 of the third embodiment]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 according to the third embodiment. The special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 is executed by the game control device 100 in step A6219 of the big hit end process (FIG. 50). Steps having the same contents as those of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 in FIG. 53 have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  At the end of the big hit, in steps A6510 to A6514, the game control device 100 clears (resets) the discharged ball count area and the acquired ball count area to 0, and initially displays the discharged ball count and the payout rate (“00”). )).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears (resets) all the acquired ball count areas for each accessory to 0 (A6515), and displays the segment data of the initial display “00.0” of the accessory ratio on the accessory ratio display section 68. Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment (A6516). This allows the accessory ratio to be displayed as “00.0” on the accessory ratio display section 68 at the end of the big hit via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  Also, every time the special game (big hit) ends, all the acquired ball count areas for each role are cleared to 0, so the gained ball count area for each role is set at the end of the previous special game (the first special game). Before the end, the number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) is stored. Therefore, the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) calculated in step A9802 and the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) transmitted to effect control device 300 in step A2318 are: In this case, the ratio of the bonuses is divided for each special game consisting of a predetermined number of round games (the ratio of the bonuses measured by resetting each special game). That is, the ratio of the bonuses classified for each special game (big hit) is from the end of one special game (before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game. Alternatively, it is the ratio of the bonus item calculated with respect to the number of prize balls in the period up to the end of the specific game state (high probability state or time saving state).

  Regulations require that the ratio of the bonuses (the ratio of the continuous bonus and the ratio of all the bonuses) be less than a reference value (for example, 60% for the continuous bonus ratio and 70% for the total bonus ratio). The ratio of the accessory to the number of prize balls in the entire period from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present is not stable unless the operating time of the gaming machine 10 is long. For example, when a special game (big hit) occurs during a short operating time and the ratio of the bonuses exceeds the reference value, the player determines that the ratio of the bonuses to the number of prize balls during the entire period indicates an abnormal value. And so on.

  On the other hand, it is known in advance that the ratio of the bonuses classified for each special game is an unstable value, and can be a value far apart from the reference value. Therefore, by calculating, from the beginning, not the ratio of the bonuses for the entire period, but the ratio of the bonuses classified for each special game, and displaying the ratio on the display device 41, the player or the like can use his or her own besides the reference value. It is determined whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value on the basis of the knowledge and information of the user, and erroneous determination is reduced.

  In addition, similarly to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, by executing the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (no steps A6515 and A6516) of FIG. 53, the game control device 100 A configuration may also be adopted in which the ratio of the accessory is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (the number of obtained balls) in the entire period from the insertion to the present. Further, in the RWM, an area for accumulating and storing the number of acquired ball of each of the attraction area of each attraction is provided in correspondence with the attained number of attained ball area of each of the attraction. A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the bonuses to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the entire period from when the power of the machine 10 is turned on to the present is calculated together with the ratio of the bonuses classified for each special game (big hit).

[Single command processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a single command processing according to the third embodiment. The single command processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80).

  First, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot system command process ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed (B1304), and a single-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE section indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the command at the time of restoration from the power failure (the result of B1305 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demonstration command ( B1307). If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 reserved number command (A3207). Is determined (B1309). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 1 pending number command (result of B1309 is “N”), then the mode unit transmits the decorative special figure 2 pending number command (A3203). It is determined whether it is represented (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command (step B1313). B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, a false error occurrence command (A2108), a false cancellation command (A2116), a status off command (A2404), and a status on command (A2407). If the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or improper notification is executed (B1316). The one-shot command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is "N"), then the mode control unit 300 sets the mode switching command (for example, A5139 effect). (B1317). Then, when the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a command for effecting mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), then the mode control section 300 determines that the MODE section has a counting command (A3107, A3111 big winning port count). (B1319). If the MODE section indicates a count command (result of B1319 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1320), and the single command processing ends. The details of the count information setting process will be described later.

  If the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1319 is "N"), then the mode control section 300 responds to the information on the prize ball (corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio in A2317). (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the information on the prize ball (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the accessory ratio setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot command process is ended. The details of the accessory ratio setting process will be described later.

  If the MODE section does not represent information on the winning prize ball (result of B1321 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1323). ). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section indicates a symbol stop command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1324).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (result of B1324 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets a stop mode of a corresponding special figure (B1325), and the game is performed after all symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1326), and the single command processing ends. In the process of B1326, as an example, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the gaming state flag is changed to a flag of “during fluctuation”, “during big hit”, “during small hit”. Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1323 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1324 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Count information setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the count information setting processing (B1320) in the above-described one-shot system command processing (FIG. 88) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process executed by effect controller 300. The count information setting process is for counting the number of acquired payouts in the special game state, and is executed when the MODE part of the command received as a single-shot command indicates the count.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (big winning opening count command) is a normal command (B1401). If the command is normal (result of B1401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the current gaming machine 10 is in a big hit operation (during a big hit state) ( B1402).

  In the case of the big hit operation (result of B1402 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number during the current round by +1 and adds the number of winning balls to the number of prize balls of the special winning opening ( Here, 14) is added (B1403, B1404). At the time when the big hit ending ends, the number of obtained payouts is cleared to zero. The acquired payout number is stored in the payout number area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322).

  Next, effect control device 300 performs update setting of the number of balls to be displayed (B1405), and ends the count information setting process. As the number of balls to be displayed, the number of obtained balls is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

  On the other hand, when the received command is not normal (result of B1401 is “N”), or when the current gaming machine 1 is not operating a big hit (result of B1402 is “N”), the count information setting process is performed. finish.

[Rotary item ratio setting processing]
Next, details of the accessory ratio setting process (B1322) in the above-described single-shot command processing (FIG. 88) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the accessory ratio setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The accessory ratio setting process saves the entire accessory ratio (so-called accessory ratio) and the continuous accessory ratio, and displays and sets them. The effect control device 300 uses the information on the prize ball as a single-shot system command ( This is executed when a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio of A2317 is received.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the command of the received information on the prize ball is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (result of B1501 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process ends.

  If the command is normal (result of B1501 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (B1502). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (result of B1502 is “N”), the process proceeds to a process of step B1505. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (the result of B1502 is “Y”), the entire bonus ratio is stored in the RAM (B1503), and the total bonus ratio is displayed on the display device 41. Display setting is performed (B1504).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (B1505). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the continuous accessory ratio (result of B1505 is "N"), the accessory ratio setting process ends. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous character ratio (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the continuous character ratio is stored in the RAM (B1506), and the continuous character ratio is displayed on the display device 41. (B1507), and ends the accessory ratio setting process.

  It should be noted that the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received at the jackpot end timing together with the number of acquired payouts at the jackpot end timing (the final acquired payout number during the jackpot) are one set in the RAM ( For example, it is stored in the big hit history area (in the RAM 322) (B1503, B1506). The big hit history area stores a big hit history 1, a big hit history 2, a big hit history 3,... In the order of big hits generated from the power-on of the gaming machine 10. The ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the number of obtained balls are stored as a set. Further, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are displayed on the display device 41 as the big hit history at the big hit end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The bonus ratio displayed at the jackpot end timing is from the end of one special game (before the end of the first special game, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game (big hit). This is the ratio of the bonuses calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the period.

  Further, in the RAM, the entire bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received at substantially the same timing at the high probability end timing and the time reduction end timing are stored in association with one set (pair). Further, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are simultaneously displayed on the display device 41 at the high probability end timing and the time reduction end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The bonus ratio displayed at the high probability end timing or the time reduction end timing is based on the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of the previous special game to the end of the specific game state (high probability state or the time reduction state). It is the accessory ratio calculated with respect to this.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, details of the symbol command processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol command processing is executed in step B1210 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area in the RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols in the special figures 1 and 2 changes, the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type includes a missing symbol, a 4R probability variable big hit symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, and the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The variable command processing is executed in step B1206 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and the symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent is determined. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variable system command of a loss is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends.

  If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and determines the effect during the variation. A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure change is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907). Then, the special figure change frequency is updated by +1 (B1908), and the change command processing is terminated. The number of times of the special figure change is the number of times the special figure change display game has been executed (the number of starts) since the power of the gaming machine 10 was turned on, and the updated number of times of the special figure change is the special figure in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). It is stored in the fluctuation count area.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot-related command processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-related command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit command indicates a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds of the current big hit. Subsequently, the game status flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare (B2103), and the big hit command processing ends. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from a symbol type determined from a symbol command (decorative special figure command corresponding to a stopped symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received jackpot-related command does not represent a fanfare (result of B2101 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the jackpot-related command represents a round (step B2101). B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot-related command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and the current gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the big hit command processing is ended.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE unit indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the big hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and executes the current game of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the big hit command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received jackpot-related command does not represent an interval (result of B2107 is "N"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the jackpot-related command indicates an ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot-related command is an ending command, the effect control device 300 sets the effect corresponding to the accessory ratio and the number of acquired balls during the big hit. A point addition effect display is set as an effect display when adding points (B2111). In the point addition effect display, for example, a character appears on the display device 41.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect corresponding to the accessory ratio (both or either of the entire accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio) (B2112). The game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to ending (B2113), and the big hit command processing ends. Note that the ending effect may be set in accordance with the final number of obtained balls.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit command processing without executing any processing. I do.

[Direction point control processing]
Next, details of the effect point control processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The effect point control process is executed in step B1011 of the main process (FIG. 78). FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the effect point control process executed by the effect control device 300. The production points include owned points, which are the total points acquired from the past game to the present, and in-game acquired points, which are points acquired during the current game (predetermined period).

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a prefetch effect for the effect point target (the target to which the effect point is to be given) has been executed (B2501). The look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the look-ahead design command and the look-ahead variation command, and is an effect such as a continuous effect (continuous notice), a pending change notice, and a look-ahead zone notice. If the prefetching effect for the effect point target has not been executed (the result of B2501 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step B2504. When the look-ahead effect for the effect point is executed (result of B2501 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of owned points (B2502), and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2503).

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a variable effect for the effect point target has been executed (B2504). Here, the fluctuating effect is an effect (notification effect, etc.) related to the result of the currently running special figure fluctuating display game. If the variable effect of the effect point target has not been executed (the result of B2504 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step B2507. When the variable production of the production point target is executed (the result of B2504 is "Y"), the point corresponding to the production is added to the number of owned points (B2505), and the point corresponding to the production is added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2506).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not an input condition to be an effect point has been satisfied (B2507). If there is an effect button operation for an effect point to which an effect point is given, it is determined that this input condition is satisfied. If the input condition targeted for the effect point is not satisfied (the result of B2507 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B2510. When the input condition for the production point is satisfied (result of B2507 is "Y"), the point corresponding to the input (operation button operation in this case) is added to the number of owned points (B2508), and the number of points acquired during the game is added to the number of points acquired during the game. The points corresponding to the input (here, the effect button operation) are added (B2509).

  After that, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is an addition timing in the ending of the big hit (B2510). If it is not the addition timing at the end of the big hit (the result of B2510 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B2513. If it is the timing of addition at the ending of the jackpot (the result of B2510 is "Y"), the number of possessed points and the ratio of the bonuses (all or either the ratio of the continuous bonuses and / or the ratio of the continuous bonuses) and the acquisition and acquisition at the current jackpot The points corresponding to the number of balls are added (B2511), and the number of points acquired during the game corresponds to the ratio of the bonuses (both or any of the ratio of all the bonuses and the continuous ratio of bonuses) and the number of balls to be acquired in the current jackpot. Points are added (B2512).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the character level up condition has been satisfied with respect to the number of points acquired during the game (B2513). For example, if the number of points acquired during the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it can be determined that the character level up condition has been satisfied. If the character level up condition is not satisfied (the result of B2513 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of Step B2516. When the character level up condition is satisfied with respect to the number of points acquired during the game (the result of B2513 is “Y”), the character level (Lv) corresponding to the character mode (for example, costume) is updated (B2514), and the character mode is changed. The drawing setting of the character level-up effect related to the level-up (change of mode) is performed (B2515). The character level-up effect may be the level-up of the above-described navi-character 670 or may be used for level-up of a character mode other than the navi-character 670.

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the point restoration condition by inputting the password is satisfied (B2516). The password input is, for example, an input by operating the effect button 25, and the password can be obtained by a mobile terminal (a mobile phone or the like) by a mobile terminal link service. The point resurrection condition is, for example, that the password is correct. If the point restoration condition is not satisfied (the result of B2516 is “N”), the flow shifts to Step B2519. If the point restoration condition is satisfied (the result of B2516 is "Y"), the number of owned points is set to a value corresponding to the password content (B2517), and the character level (Lv) and effect customization information corresponding to the password content are set. Is restored (B2518). The effect customizing information is information for each model.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not there has been a two-dimensional code drawing operation for drawing a two-dimensional code on display device 41 (B2519). For example, the two-dimensional code drawing operation is a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 (an operation on the touch panel, a pressing operation, and the like). If there is no two-dimensional code drawing operation (result of B2519 is “N”), the effect point control process ends. When a two-dimensional code drawing operation is performed (the result of B2520 is “Y”), a password is generated based on the number of owned points, the character Lv, and the effect customization information (B2520), and a two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password is generated. Drawing settings are made (B2521). Thereafter, the effect point control processing ends.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010) according to the third embodiment in the above-described main process (FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process executed by the effect control device 300. The hall / player setting mode process activates a hall setting mode in which a staff member of a hall (game store) or the like can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. be able to.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is being set (B2701). When a later-described hall setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is being performed (result of B2701 is "Y"), the processing of B2706-B2716 is performed, and the operation of the production button 25 (production button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by the staff of the hall (game store) or the like. Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the.

  When not in the hall setting mode (result of B2701 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the game is in the player setting mode (B2702). When a later-described player setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the game is in the player setting mode. When the game is in the player setting mode (result of B2702 is “Y”), processing of B2720-B2725 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When not in the player setting mode (result of B2702 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2703). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for the customer, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. Note that “waiting for a customer” is, for example, the above-described waiting state for a customer, and includes a waiting-for-customer demonstration state in which an image for waiting for a customer (customer-waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display device 41. If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), the process of B2717 is executed.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B2703 is “Y”), effect controller 300 draws a screen (draws a hole setting screen) on display device 41 in the hall setting mode. Start setting is performed (B2704). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B2705).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the sound volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the staff of the hall or the like (B2706), the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B2707) for adjusting the brightness of the LEDs of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B2708) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (such as a liquid crystal display) of the display device 41, and power saving for setting power saving The setting process (B2709) is executed.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs a logo color setting process of setting the issued color of the logo combination and the like (B2710). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B2711). When an operation signal due to the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B1009), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B2711 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B2711 is "Y"), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings (B2712). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not determined by the factory settings (result of B2712 is “N”), the process proceeds to B2714. If the settings are determined at the factory settings (result of B2712 is “Y”), a factory setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments at the factory settings is executed (B2713). The factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B2706-B2710 and B2713 are written in a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B2714).

  Next, effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for terminating screen drawing on display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B2715). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is cleared (B2716).

  If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B2703 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2717). During the customer waiting, for example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009), it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition has been satisfied. Note that “waiting for a customer” is, for example, the above-described waiting state for a customer, and includes a waiting-for-customer demonstration state in which an image for waiting for a customer (customer-waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2717 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B2717 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B2718). By this screen drawing, a menu display for various selections and an accessory ratio (continuous accessory ratio and total accessory ratio), a volume adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for volume adjustment, LED brightness adjustment And a brightness adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for the display. Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B2719).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B2720), the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B2721) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs an effect customization process of customizing (individually setting) the effect based on the operation of effect button 25 or the like by the player (B2722). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B2723). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B2723 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process ends. When the setting confirmation operation input is made (result of B2723 is "Y"), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B2724). Then, the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (B2725). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in B2720-B2721 may not be written to the backup memory since it may disappear.

  Note that, in the above description, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (B1009).

[Screen transition]
FIG. 96A and FIG. 96B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the third embodiment, and are examples of screen transition of the entire game.

  (A) of FIG. 96A is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure change display game. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), a stoppage symbol of the previous special figure variable display game is displayed. Further, a reserved digestion area 640 of a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen.

  In the third embodiment, the hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) includes a first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as a first hold display (first start memory display), and a second start memory. A second hold display section 630b is displayed as a second hold display (second start storage display). The first hold display section 630a displays three hold displays 633 as first hold displays. At this time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display section 630b. Note that the hold display 633b (black) is a hold display in which the color has changed from the normal mode due to the hold change notice.

  The special figure 1 hold number display section 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 show a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. The indicated numeral "0" is displayed.

  (A) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure fluctuation display game. An effect is performed in which the reserved display 633 at the right end of the first reserved display section 630a moves to the reserved digestion area 640. Thereafter, a hold-corresponding display 633a (floating hold display) indicating the hold (the start memory which has been the execution right of the special figure change display game) relating to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Will be done. Then, the change of the decorative special symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variable display region 610, and at the same time, the change of the decorative reduced symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variable display region 615. Further, in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number is reduced to “2”. In addition, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the stop result (stop symbol) of the change display area 615 and the change display area 610 has a common mode (a common number). It does not have to be a common mode.

  Thereafter, in (c), the same decorative special symbol (identification information) is stopped in the left area 610a and the right area 610b, and reach has occurred. Then, after the various reach effects are executed, in (d), a big hit stop symbol is displayed, and thereafter, in the special game state (big hit state), a special variable winning device for a predetermined number of rounds (here, 16 times). By repeating the 39 times of opening and closing, a round game for a predetermined number of rounds is executed.

  (E) shows the display screen of 8R in the middle of the big hit state (special game state). Here, the big hit round effect is performed, and the number of obtained payouts (B1404 and B1405 in FIG. 89) obtained during the big hit state is updated and displayed each time a winning in the big winning opening occurs. (F) shows the screen of the final round (16R).

  FIG. 96B (G) shows the display screen of the display device 41 during the ending when the big hit state ends. During the ending, as the big hit history, the number of acquired payouts obtained during the big hit, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received by the effect control device 300 at the big hit end timing are displayed on the big hit history display section 760. I have. The big hit history display section 760 includes an accessory ratio display area 800 for displaying the accessory ratio. Note that the total bonus ratio is a commonly used so-called bonus ratio, and is thus displayed as "local bonus ratio". The character ratio displayed here is obtained from the end of one special game (before the end of the first special game, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game (big hit). Although the ratio of the bonuses is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls, the ratio of the bonuses may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained in the entire period from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to when each special game ends.

  Also, as the big hit history (history information), the latest three (here, big hit history 1, big hit history 2, big hit history 3) are displayed, but how many big hit histories are displayed on the big hit history display unit 760. The player can be set in the player setting mode. The big hit history (the number of obtained payouts, the total bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio) is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if it overlaps, it is preferentially displayed on the front side. It should be noted that it is also possible to display the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in a pie chart or a bar graph instead of numbers.

  In addition, as a point addition effect at the time of adding the effect points according to the number of obtained balls during the big hit and the ratio of the characters, for example, a character 770 appears on the display device 41, and a serif display that displays the serif of the character 770 is displayed. The addition value (here, 100 points) of the acquired number of balls and the effect points is displayed in the section 770a. The character 770 and its form may be set in accordance with the added value of the effect points (and, consequently, the number of obtained balls and the ratio of the character).

  Further, as the ending effect (B2112 in FIG. 93) executed during the ending, an effect (decoration) in which a shooting star flows is displayed. The ending effect (including the background) may be set according to information related to the prize ball, such as the number of obtained balls, and the ratio of the accessory. By the effect according to the role ratio, the ratio of the role and the state of the gaming machine can be determined, and the interest of the game is improved. The ending effect is achieved by changing the LED (board decoration device 46) provided near the center case 40 of the game board 30 to a color (for example, “green”, “yellow”, or “blue”) corresponding to the ratio of the accessory. It may include a decoration effect of emitting light in the order of decreasing the ratio of the role). Also, the lower the role ratio, the greater the number of special figure fluctuation display games that have been consumed up to the jackpot, the more likely the ending effect that gives a good impression to the player is set. Good. In addition, an ending effect that gives a better impression to the player to praise may be set as the number of acquired balls increases. Note that a configuration in which an effect other than the ending effect (for example, a variable effect) is set according to the ratio of the role and the character is also possible.

  (H) shows a display screen when a specific game state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH” occurs after the big hit state ends. In (g), in the specific game state, the special figure 1 special figure change display game or the special figure 2 special figure change display game is executed. One hold display 633 is displayed on the first hold display section 630a as the first hold display. The second hold display section 630b displays two hold displays 633 as second hold displays.

  (U) shows the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH”. At the specific game state end timing (high-probability end timing or time-saving end timing), the entire bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received by the effect control device 300 are displayed in the bonus ratio display area 800. The specific game state end timing is, for example, a timing at which the number of high probability fluctuations becomes zero. The bonus ratio displayed here is the bonus ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of one special game to the end of the specific game state. It may be the ratio of the bonuses calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from power-on to the end of the specific gaming state. At this specific game state end timing, an effect may be executed in accordance with the accessory ratio.

  Note that the total bonus ratio is a commonly used so-called bonus ratio, and is thus displayed as "local bonus ratio". The total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if they overlap, they are preferentially displayed on the front side. It should be noted that it is also possible to display the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in a pie chart or a bar graph instead of numbers. After that, the game shifts to the normal game state.

  FIG. 97 corresponds to (G) in FIG. 96B and shows another example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the ending when the big hit state ends. In FIG. 97, in addition to the number of obtained balls, the total bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio, the number of starts (the number of executions of the special figure change display game since the power-on of the gaming machine 10) (B1908 in FIG. 92). Is displayed on the big hit history display unit 760. This allows the player or the like to determine whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on the number of starts other than the reference value, thereby reducing erroneous determinations. For example, if a big hit occurs when the number of starts is small (for example, 10 in FIG. 97), the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (for example, 60% for the continuous bonus ratio and 70% for the total bonus ratio). However, it can be determined that it is not abnormal.

  In this case, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received at the big hit end timing are set as one set in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322) together with the number of obtained balls and the start number at the big hit end timing. It is stored in the big hit history area (B1503, B1506).

  Also, in FIG. 97, since there is a possibility that the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be unfamiliar to the player, a navi character 670 appears, and the dialogue display section 680 displays the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio. The explanation and the definition of the accessory ratio are displayed. Thereby, the player becomes interested in the accessory ratio.

  In addition, in FIG. 96B also, in the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific game state (high probability state or the time saving state) “RUSH”, the ratio is added to the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. Then, the start number may be displayed in the accessory ratio display area 800.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIG. 98 shows an example of a display screen in the player setting mode (B2718 in FIG. 95) waiting for a customer. The big hit history is displayed on the big hit history display section 760. The continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (displayed as “character ratio”) are displayed in the character ratio display area 800 in the big hit history display part 760. A volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for volume adjustment and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) for LED brightness adjustment are displayed on the display screen.

  The effect control device 300 displays the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only when waiting for a customer (during a waiting state for a customer). In a state where the demonstration is not being performed or a state where the game ball is being fired, the configuration may be such that the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are not displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, a configuration in which B1504 and B1507 in the accessory ratio setting process (FIG. 90) are omitted is also possible.

  Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, as a menu display, a first selection unit 820 for selecting the number of displayed big hit histories and a second selection unit 825 for selecting display content (display mode) of the accessory ratio are displayed. ing. The first selection unit 820 sets how many of the jackpot histories (the set of the number of obtained balls, the total bonus ratio (the bonus ratio), the continuous bonus ratio, and the number of starts) stored in the jackpot history area in the RAM. It is possible to select whether to display the big hit history (three in FIG. 96B, FIG. 97 and FIG. 98). With the second selection unit 825, it is possible to select whether to display one or both of the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

  The player performs a touch operation by a vertical finger movement (movement of a touch location) on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, and selects a target to be set. By this touch operation, an item to be set (set item) displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display (see a black frame of the volume adjustment display 810) is selected. That is, items displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display are changed by a touch operation. Updating of highlight items in the first selection unit 820 and the second selection unit 825 as menu display is executed in the effect button input process (B1009). Note that the volume and brightness values are selected (B2720 and B2721 in FIG. 95) by a touch operation based on the movement of the finger in the left and right direction (movement of the touch location). In addition, the displayed value or the selection of the character may be determined by touching the center of the touch panel 25b (B2723 in FIG. 95). In addition, the LED 690 of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to promote the movement of the finger in the up-down direction or the left-right direction.

  In this way, in the player setting mode in which the customer is waiting, the menu display allows the player to select the display number (display mode) of the number of hit jackpot histories and the ratio of the accessory. In the player setting mode while waiting for a customer, a volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) are displayed, and the volume and brightness can be adjusted to the player's favorite.

[Sub display device]
FIG. 99 shows the game board 30 provided with the sub display device 830. In the above description, an example is shown in which the display of the display device 41 displays the entire bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the like. However, as illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are displayed. The operation of the sub display device 830 (movable character) is controlled by the effect control device 300 as the board effect device 44.

  In the normal position, the sub-display device 830 is housed in the space behind the upper effect unit 40c, and most of the sub-display device 830 cannot be visually recognized in front view. However, in the operation position, the sub-display device 830 moves to the front side of the display device 41 and is entirely in front view. Visible. Then, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing, the effect control device 300 causes the sub-display device 830 to operate at the operating position, and the sub-display device 830 sets the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. indicate. Therefore, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, the player pays attention to the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio displayed on the sub display device 830.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the prize ball to the effect control means (effect control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) determines the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the variable prize winning device, out of the total number of prize balls paid out by the payout control means (payout control device 200 or the like). Can be displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub-display device 830). Note that the information related to the prize ball includes the calculation result of the bonus ratio, information for calculating the bonus ratio (the number of prize balls serving as the basis of the bonus ratio), and the like.

  Therefore, it is possible to judge the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable prize device or whether it is easy to win the general prize port 35 or the like) by the display regarding the accessory ratio. In addition, the interest in the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the player easily wins the variable prize winning device (an impression that the open state frequently occurs), which is an incentive (index) for the player to continuously play the game. Further, when the ratio of the bonuses is low, the winning in the general winning opening 35 and the like is relatively large. Therefore, by displaying the ratio of the bonuses on the display means, the player may be interested in the general winning opening 35. It makes the game more interesting.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub-display device 830) history information (big hit history) relating to a predetermined number of (for example, three) special games. In this case, it is possible to display the bonus ratio classified for each special game including the predetermined number of round games in the history information. Here, the bonus ratio divided for each special game includes the bonus ratio measured by resetting each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, by calculating the bonus ratio (known to be an unstable value in advance) classified for each special game, instead of the bonus ratio for the entire period, and displaying it on the display means, The player or the like is prompted to determine whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on his or her own knowledge or information other than the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) may generate a specific game (high probability state or time saving state) during a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure change display game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. . Further, the game control means (game control device 100) calculates an accessory ratio, and uses the calculated accessory ratio as information relating to the prize ball when the special game or the specific game is completed, and the effect control means (effect) Control device 300). In this case, the accessory ratio can be displayed at a timing immediately after the significant change in the accessory ratio (at the timing when the special game or the specific game is finished). Further, when the calculated accessory ratio is directly transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300) and displayed on the display means, the number of transmissions from the game control means (game control device 100) to the effect control device 300 is minimized. And transmission load is reduced.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that configurations other than those described below can be applied to configurations common to any of the first to third embodiments.

  Although the fourth embodiment is based on the third embodiment, unlike the third embodiment, the effect control device 300 includes a payout command (FIG. 101) (a payout command (A1719) and an out-ball detection command (A2017). ), And calculates the accessory ratio by itself (the continuous accessory ratio and the total accessory ratio). Further, the effect control device 300 may calculate (count) the total number of winning balls and the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35, or calculate the general winning opening ratio. The general winning opening ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 to the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls). In the payout performance monitoring processing of FIG. 85, the processing (steps A9804, A9805, A2317, and A2318) of transmitting the calculation result of the accessory ratio to the effect control device 300 is unnecessary, and is not executed in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the number-of-ejected-balls area, the number-of-acquired-balls area, and the number-of-acquired-balls-based area according to the fourth embodiment. The number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls, and the number of acquired balls for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, or the like) of the game control device 100. The number of ejected balls and the number of acquired balls are the same as those in FIG. 17B of the first embodiment, but the number of acquired balls per accessory is two for the general winning opening 35, that is, the left general winning. An area for storing the total number of prize balls due to winning in the mouth 35 and an area for storing the total number of prize balls due to winning in the right general winning port 35 are provided. Thus, the game control device 100 can calculate (count) the total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 separately for the left and right sides.

  FIG. 101 is a view showing a payout command according to the fourth embodiment. The payout command (FIG. 101) according to the fourth embodiment is different from the payout command in FIG. 83 of the second embodiment in that two types of payout commands for winning in the general winning opening 35 correspond to the left and right general winning openings. is there. For example, in the winning opening information, “000” indicates the left general winning opening 35, “001” indicates the right general winning opening 35, and the payout command is represented by a hexadecimal number. The ten prize balls are “0AH”, and the ten prize balls due to winning in the right general winning opening 35 are “1AH”.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command of FIG. 101 not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. In step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), the game control device 100 prepares not only a payout command to be transmitted to the payout control device 200 but also a payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a production command. In the payout command transmitting process, the effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed. Similarly, the game control device 100 detects not only the out ball detection command transmitted to the payout control device 200 but also the out ball detection transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A2017 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 15A). A command is prepared as an effect command, and thereafter, an effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It should be noted that the payout command and the out-of-ball detection command transmitted to the effect control device 300 are provided with a MODE section indicating that the information is information relating to a prize ball.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 sets the acquired ball number area for each accessory storing the number of the acquired accessory balls obtained from the payout command (FIG. 101) in the RAM as in FIG. 100 (III) ( For example, in the RAM 322).

[Single command processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a single command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The single command processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). Note that the same processes as those of the single command processing (FIG. 88) according to the third embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  The information related to the prize ball in FIG. 102 according to the fourth embodiment is the payout command in FIG. 101 transmitted from the game control device 100, and the information related to the prize ball in FIG. This is different from the command corresponding to the calculation result of the ratio.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1323 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number. Is determined (B1327). When the MODE unit indicates the high-probability-change-number command (result of B1327 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes high-probability (time saving) termination processing (B1328), and terminates the single-shot command processing. If the MODE unit does not represent the high-probability-variation-number command (result of B1327 is “N”), effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing as it is.

[Rotary item ratio setting processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The accessory ratio setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1322 of the single command processing (FIG. 103).

  In the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 stores the accessory in the acquired-object-specific ball count area in the RAM of the effect control device 300 based on the number of prize balls indicated in the payout command. Add and accumulate the number of acquired balls. Then, in addition to the ratio of all bonuses and the ratio of continuous bonuses, the right and left general winning opening ratio is calculated and stored. The accessory ratio setting process is executed when the effect control device 300 receives a payout command (FIG. 101) as information relating to a prize ball.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received payout command (FIG. 101) is a normal command (B3001). If the payout command is not normal (the result of B3001 is “N”), the accessory ratio setting process ends. When the payout command is normal (result of B3001 is “Y”), the number of acquired balls per attribute in the RAM of effect control device 300 corresponding to the payout command (that is, the winning opening information indicated in the payout command). The number of winning balls indicated in the payout command is added to the value of the area (B3002). Next, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the values of the number of obtained ball areas for each bonus, and stored in the total bonus ratio region and the continuous bonus ratio region in the RAM (B3003).

  In addition, when adding and accumulating the number of obtained ball for each item (the number of prize balls for each item) to the number of obtained balls for each item in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, the effect control device 300 It is possible to calculate the ratio of the accessory to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the entire period from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present. When clearing (resetting) all the acquired ball count areas for each role (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) to 0 each time the special game (big hit) is completed, the effect control device 300 It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in the period from the end of the game (before the end of the first special game, from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the present.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 calculates the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio from the values of the left and right general winning opening-specific acquired ball count areas, and calculates the left general winning opening ratio in the RAM. The area and the right general winning opening ratio area are stored (B3004). Here, the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio are the ratios of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the left and right general winning openings 35 among the total number of prize balls, respectively. Note that the total number of prize balls is the sum of the values of the number of obtained spheres for each role.

  The effect control device 300 can calculate the general winning opening ratio in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When clearing all the number-of-acquired-spheres-by-property areas (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) to 0 each time the special game (big hit) ends, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. (Before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on), the general winning opening ratio in the period up to the present can be calculated.

  In step B3004, the general winning opening ratio may be calculated by adding the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio. Further, in addition to the left and right general winning opening ratios, the winning opening ratio of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening is calculated and stored in the corresponding area in the RAM. May be. Here, the winning opening ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the corresponding winning opening out of the total number of winning balls.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the acquired ball count area for each accessory to which the number of prize balls has been added in step B3002 is for a prize ball in left or right general winning opening 35 (B3005). ). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the left or right general winning opening 35. If the added number of acquired ball areas by role is not for the prize ball of the general winning opening 35 (result of B3005 is “N”), that is, if there is no prize in the left or right general winning opening 35, The object ratio setting process ends.

  The effect control device 300 determines that the added number-of-acquired-spheres-by-principal-object area is for the winning ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “Y”), that is, the left or right general winning opening 35 If there is a prize, the value of the acquired number of spheres for each accessory added in step B3002 is displayed and set (B3006). Here, the acquired number-of-acquired-spheres-by-principal-object area is the number-of-acquisition-acquired-balls area for prize balls in the left general winning opening 35 when a winning is made in the left general winning opening 35, and the right general winning. This is the number-of-acquisition-by-principal-items-acquired-balls area for the prize balls in the right general winning port 35 when the mouth 35 has a winning. The added value of the acquired number of spheres for each accessory is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the left or right general prize port 35. Even if only one general winning opening 35 has a winning, the value of the acquired number of balls area for each of the general winning openings 35 may be displayed and set. Also, here, not only the total number of prize balls in the left or right general winning opening 35, but also the number of winnings to the left or right general winning opening 35 or the number of winnings to all the general winning opening 35, is counted. A configuration for display setting is also possible.

  As described above, when the prize ball is added to the value of the general winning prize port 35 and the number of spheres obtained for each general prize port for the special prize port, at least the prize ball number of the general prize port 35 having the prize at this time is obtained. The total (the number of acquired balls) can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub-display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  The effect control device 300 can display the total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 in the entire period from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present. When clearing all the number-of-acquired-spheres-by-property areas (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) to 0 each time the special game (big hit) ends, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. (Before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) The total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 can be displayed in the period up to the present.

  Subsequently, an effect setting for performing an effect in response to winning in the general winning opening 35 is executed (B3007), and the accessory ratio setting process ends. As an effect corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 35, an LED (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 emits light, a sound is output from a speaker, and a movable role (a board effecting device 44). ) Works. With this effect, the interest in the game can be enhanced, and the player's interest in the general winning opening 35 increases.

  Note that the effect control device 300 also determines the number of winning balls for each winning object (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening 35 even when the number of obtained ball count areas is added. The value of the obtained number of spheres by object may be displayed and set. Accordingly, the total number of winning balls (acquired balls) of each winning opening can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub-display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  Further, in the accessory ratio setting process, the effect control device 300 may calculate the number of ejected balls and the payout rate based on the payout command. In this case, the effect control device 300 has, in the RAM, an ejected ball count area for storing the ejected ball count and an acquired ball count area for storing the total number of acquired prize balls (acquired ball count). The number of ejected balls corresponds to the number of times the payout command (FIG. 101) has been received, and the payout rate is a ratio (ratio)% of the total number of awarded balls to the number of ejected balls.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may back up the calculation result (value of the number-of-acquired-balls area for each accessory, accessory ratio, general winning opening ratio, etc.) in the accessory ratio setting process in the FeRAM 323.

[High-probability (time reduction) end processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the high-probability (time-saving) end processing according to the fourth embodiment. The high-probability (time reduction) end processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1328 of the single command processing (FIG. 103).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received high-probability-change-number command is a normal command (B3201). If the high probability change frequency command is not normal (result of B3201 is “N”), the high probability (time saving) termination process is terminated. If the high probability change number command is normal (the result of B3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the high probability change number is 0 (B3202). Note that, in the present embodiment, the number of high-probability fluctuations is also the number of time-saving fluctuations.

  If the number of high-probability changes (the number of time-saving changes) is not 0 (the result of B3202 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the high-probability (time-saving) end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the number of high-probability fluctuations (the number of time reduction fluctuations) is 0 (result of B3202 is “Y”), display setting of the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and left and right general winning opening ratio To end the high-probability (time-saving) termination process. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio.

  In this way, the effect control device 300 always calculates the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratio each time the payout command is received, and sets the high probability end timing, In addition, at the time reduction end timing, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the right and left general winning opening ratio.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-related command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The big hit command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). Steps having the same contents as those in the big hit command processing (FIG. 93) of the third embodiment have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the jackpot-related command indicates ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot-related command is an ending command, the effect control device 300 sets the effect corresponding to the accessory ratio and the number of acquired balls during the big hit. A point addition effect display is set as an effect display when adding points (B2111).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the final acquired number of balls, together with the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratios, as a set of jackpot histories, as a jackpot history in the RAM. It is stored in the history area (B3401). Then, an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect is executed (B3402). In the ending effect setting process, as part of the ending effect, display setting of the accessory ratio (continuous accessory ratio and total accessory ratio) and the right and left general winning opening ratio is also executed. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio. The ending effect may be set in association with the final number of obtained balls, the ratio of the role, and the ratio of the left and right general winning opening.

  In this way, each time the payout command is received, the effect control device 300 always calculates the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the right and left general winning opening ratio, and ends the big hit end timing (ending In), the display device 41 and the sub display device 830 can display the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the left and right general winning opening.

  It is to be noted that the effect control device 300 calculates the role-object ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio only at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing, and the display device 41 and the sub-display device 830 calculate A configuration in which the ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio are displayed is also possible.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 106A and FIG. 106B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment, and are examples of screen transition of the entire game. FIG. 106A (A)-(F) and FIG. 106B (G)-(K) correspond to FIG. 96A (A)-(F) and FIG. 96B (G)-(K), respectively, and will be described below. 106A and FIG. 106B are the same as those in FIG.

  In (c) of FIG. 106A, since the left general winning opening 35 has a prize, the value of the winning ball number area for each prize ball in the left general winning opening 35 (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls acquired by winning the left general winning opening 35 is displayed by the total prize ball display “122 left general winning opening prize balls total”. Here, a configuration in which the number of winnings to the left general winning opening 35 is displayed is also possible. Also, the total prize ball display is displayed so as not to overlap with other effects (here, the reach effect), but when the display range overlaps with other effects and is in the way, the total prize ball display is displayed. It does not have to be done.

  In addition, even when there is a prize in each of the winning ports (starting port 1 and starting port 2) other than the general winning port, the total number of winning balls obtained by winning in each of the winning ports and the number of winnings are displayed. Is also good.

  In (g) of FIG. 106B, a general winning opening ratio display area 842 for displaying left and right general winning opening ratios is provided in the big hit history display unit 760 of (g) of FIG. 96B, and the general hitting end timing (ending) is set. In the winning opening ratio display area 842, left and right general winning opening ratios are displayed. It should be noted that one big hit history includes and stores the acquired payout number, the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio), and the right and left general winning opening ratio (B3401 in FIG. 106). Although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. Furthermore, in the player setting mode (FIG. 98) while waiting for a customer, a menu display (second selection unit 825) may be used to select whether or not to display the general winning opening ratio.

  The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening in the entire period from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game, or one special game. From the end of the game (before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game, calculated for the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening. It may be something.

  In (k) of FIG. 106B, since a winning has been made in the right general winning opening 35, the value of the acquired number of balls for each prize ball in the right general winning opening 35 (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls acquired by winning the right general winning opening 35 is displayed by the total prize ball display “152 right general winning opening prize balls total”. Here, a configuration in which the number of winnings in the right general winning opening 35 is displayed is also possible.

  In (k) of FIG. 106B, at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state), the general winning opening ratio on the left and right is displayed in the general winning opening ratio display area 842 in addition to the accessory ratio. You. Although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening in the entire period from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the end of the specific gaming state, or the end of the special game. It may be calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning a general winning opening from the time (before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the specific game state.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as information related to the prize ball. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can receive the payout command (FIG. 101), calculate the accessory ratio by itself, and display it on the display means (display device 41 or sub-display device 830). Therefore, it is possible to judge the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable prize device or whether it is easy to win the general prize port 35 or the like) by the display regarding the accessory ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the bonuses is low, the winning in the general winning opening 35 and the like is relatively large. By displaying the ratio of the bonuses on the display means, the player may be interested in the general winning opening 35. Become.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can calculate the general winning opening ratio from the received payout command and display the same on the display means. Therefore, the player is further interested in the general winning opening 35. Further, when the general winning opening 35 has a winning, the total number of winning balls and the number of winnings of the general winning opening 35 can be calculated from the received payout command and displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player's interest in the general winning opening 35 increases.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

  FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 107, the number of discharged balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 of the collective display device 50 are deleted from the game board of FIG. A first accessory ratio warning display section 844 (first display) and a second accessory ratio warning display section 846 (second display) are provided.

  The effect control device 300 displays specific numerical values of the number of ejected balls, the payout ratio, and / or the accessory ratio on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 96 to 98. In this case, the effect control device 300 displays the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting state). The configuration may be such that the accessory ratio is not displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 while the game ball is being fired. That is, a configuration in which steps B1504 and B1507 in FIG. 90, high probability (time saving) end processing in FIG. 104, display setting of the accessory ratio in step B3402 in FIG. 105, and the like are also possible.

  The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 as a first alert notification unit is configured by one LED (light emitting unit), and is turned on when the entire accessory ratio exceeds a reference value (predetermined value 70%). Then, a warning display indicating that the ratio of all the bonuses has exceeded the reference value is executed. The second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 as a second alert notification unit is configured with one LED (light emitting unit), and lights up when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds a reference value (predetermined value 60%). Then, a warning display indicating that the continuous accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value is executed.

  The number-of-discharged-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 are composed of seven-segment displays for displaying numerical values and are expensive. Since the ball rate display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are eliminated and the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) are provided, the cost is reduced. Further, the first accessory ratio warning display portion 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display portion 846 of the collective display device 50 are controlled by the game control device 100 (main board) to be inspected by the trial shooting test facility. Therefore, display reliability is ensured.

  It should be noted that the first accessory ratio warning display section 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display section 846 are provided on the back (back) of the game control device 100 provided on the back of the gaming machine 10, and on the back of the gaming machine 10. It may be visible only from. The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 may be installed on a board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this case, since the substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 is sealed so as not to be opened in the case (since it is swaged), the first accessory ratio warning display portion 844 and the second accessory ratio are displayed. The display on the warning display section 846 cannot be tampered with.

  In addition, a warning of the ratio of the physical property is displayed together with an error message (display of a glass frame opening error or a front frame opening error) when, for example, the glass frame or the front frame is opened, without always displaying the warning display of the character ratio. You may make it.

[Outgoing performance monitoring processing]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process according to the fifth embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating process (FIG. 17A). FIG. 108 is obtained by replacing step A9803 of FIG. 85 with steps A9803a and A9803b. Steps having the same contents as the payout performance monitoring processing in FIG. 85 have the same step numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The game control device 100 calculates both the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio based on the number of acquired bonus balls (A9801, A9802), and sets a warning display when the calculation result exceeds a reference value. (A9803a). When the calculation result of the total bonus ratio exceeds a reference value (70%), a warning display for turning on the first bonus ratio warning display section 844 (LED) is set. When the calculation result of the continuous character ratio exceeds the reference value (60%), a warning display for turning on the second character ratio warning display section 846 (LED) is set. When the calculation results of the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio exceed the respective reference values, the first bonus ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second bonus ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) Set a warning display that turns on both.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the warning display in the segment area. Thereby, when performing a warning display, the first accessory ratio warning display section 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display section 846 are turned on.

  It should be noted that, in addition to the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846, the first accessory ratio in which display control is executed by the payout control device 200 as in the second embodiment. The warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display unit may be provided in the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 calculates the accessory ratio based on the payout command, and when the calculation result of the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, displays the first accessory ratio warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display. Light the part. The first accessory ratio warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display unit may be provided in the upper plate unit.

  In addition, a warning notification unit (first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or second accessory ratio warning display unit 846) is provided on the display screen of the display device 41 so that the accessory ratio is equal to a reference value (predetermined value). If it exceeds, a warning display indicating that the accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value may be displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. In this case, the production control device 300 determines whether the bonus ratio calculated by itself based on the payout command (FIG. 101) or the bonus ratio received from the game control device 100 exceeds a reference value. When the object ratio exceeds the reference value, a warning display is displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. Furthermore, the upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b may be used as a warning notification unit, and the effect control device 300 may be configured to notify by sound from the warning notification unit when the ratio of the accessory exceeds the reference value. is there. When the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, an external device (such as a hall computer) may be notified via the external information terminal 71 that the accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can notify that the accessory ratio has exceeded the predetermined value when the accessory ratio has exceeded the predetermined value. As described above, when it is notified (displayed) that the accessory ratio has exceeded the predetermined value, the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable prize device or whether the general It is possible to judge whether the winning is easy in the mouth 35 or the like. In addition, when it is notified that the accessory ratio has exceeded the predetermined value, the player may be interested in the general winning opening 35 because there is a possibility that the winning in the general winning opening 35 or the like may be small. The interest of the game is improved.

  The warning display unit (the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846) is controlled by the game control unit (game control device 100) and the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined value. Can be displayed. The warning display means can be composed of, for example, one LED, but a display for directly displaying the numerical value of the accessory ratio (the accessory ratio display section 68) becomes unnecessary, and the cost can be reduced. Note that the game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the prize ball to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the accessory ratio. Can also be displayed. Therefore, the player or the like can confirm the accessory ratio numerically, but the display means controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided in a normal game machine, and a large increase in cost is not expected. Absent.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) may display the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display means (display device 41 or sub-display device 830) only while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting state). In this case, only the player who is selecting the gaming machine (gaming table) to be used is shown the accessory ratio, and does not display the accessory ratio during the game. Therefore, the display of the accessory ratio does not disturb the effect of the display device 41 during the game. Further, the control of the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a simple configuration.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (big hit history) relating to the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub-display device 830). is there. In this case, it is possible to display the bonus ratio classified for each special game including the predetermined number of round games in the history information. Here, the bonus ratio divided for each special game includes the bonus ratio measured by resetting each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, by calculating the bonus ratio (known to be an unstable value in advance) classified for each special game, instead of the bonus ratio for the entire period, and displaying it on the display means, The player or the like attempts to determine whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on his or her own knowledge and information other than the reference value, and erroneous determination is reduced.

[Sixth embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special winning opening count, which is the number of winnings in one big hit round to the special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 9) and exceeds the first threshold value (for example, 10 to 10). When reaching 11), a first over-prize notification is performed to notify that an over-prize (so-called over-prize) has occurred. Further, when the number of the special winning opening counts exceeds the first threshold and reaches the second threshold (for example, 12 or 11 if the first threshold is 10), a second warning for warning of an abnormal excess winning is provided. Over-prize notification. The second over-prize notification is a notification in a mode different from the first over-prize notification. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the over-prize notification is executed in two stages according to the special winning opening count number.

[Over winning notification processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the over-winning-prize notification processing according to the sixth embodiment.

  The over-prize notification processing is executed by the effect control device 300 each time a game ball is won to the special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39. The over-prize notification processing is performed when the count command (large win port count command) is received as information relating to winning in the special winning opening in step B1319 of the single-shot command processing (FIGS. 88 and 102). It may be executed after the count number (large winning opening count number) during the current round is updated by +1 in the information setting process (B1320: FIG. 89) (after step B1403). Note that the special winning opening count number means the number of winnings to the special winning opening in one open state (open state, round). In addition, the special winning opening count number is equal to the number of times the information relating to winning in the special winning opening is received by the effect control device 300 or the number of times of transmission from the game control device 100 in one big hit round.

  The over-prize notification processing is performed when a payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) is received as information on a prize ball (information on winning of a game ball) in step B1321 of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 102). It may be executed within the ratio setting process (B1322: FIG. 103). That is, instead of the count in the count information setting process (FIG. 89), the number of times a payout command corresponding to winning in the special winning opening during the current round can be used as the special winning opening count.

  In the sixth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command (FIG. 101) not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. That is, the game control device 100 prepares a payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), and executes the effect command setting process (FIG. 59).

  In the over-winning notification processing, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there has been a +1 update of the special winning opening count number (count number), that is, whether or not there has been a winning in the special winning opening (B3801). If there is no +1 update of the special winning opening count, that is, if there is no winning in the special winning opening (the result of B3801 is "N"), the over-winning-prize notification processing is ended. Each time one big hit round is completed, the special winning opening count is cleared to zero.

  If there is a +1 update to the special winning opening count, that is, if there is a winning in the special winning opening (B3801 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines that the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the first threshold. It is determined whether or not (B3802). Note that the first threshold value is a value (for example, 10 to 11) larger than the upper limit value (for example, 9) of the special winning opening count number. In a case where the large winning opening count is not equal to or larger than the first threshold (the result of B3802 is “N”), the over-winning-prize notification processing is ended.

  If the large winning opening count is equal to or greater than the first threshold (the result of B3802 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines that the number of over-winning winnings (excess winnings) indicating the number of winnings due to over-winning. The number of award balls (14 in this case) of the special winning opening is added (B3803). Note that the number of over-winning payouts is the total number of prize balls paid out due to over-winning during one big hit (during a predetermined game state). When the ending of the jackpot ends, the number of over-winning winnings is cleared to zero.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the second threshold (B3804). The second threshold value is a value larger than the first threshold value of the special winning opening count number (for example, 12 or 11 if the first threshold value is 10), and is determined by the hole / player setting mode process as described later. The person in charge of the hall such as a clerk of the (game store) can be changed.

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the second threshold (the result of B3804 is “N”), that is, when the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the first threshold and less than the second threshold, the special winning opening count is set to the upper limit. A first over-prize notification that notifies that the number has exceeded (for example, 9) (ie, occurrence of an over-prize) is executed (B3805). Note that the process of Step B3805 constitutes a first notification unit. In addition, the upper limit value is a special winning opening count number at which the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) starts closing.

  On the other hand, when the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the second threshold (the result of B3804 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines that the special winning opening count exceeds the first threshold and further sets the second threshold ( For example, when the number reaches 12), the second over-prize notification is executed to notify and warn of an abnormal over-prize (excess prize) (B3806). Note that the process of step B3806 constitutes a second notification unit.

  It should be noted that even if the player is playing a normal game, the special winning opening count may accidentally reach the first threshold. In addition, as an effect during the jackpot round, the game balls are retained for a predetermined period in the retaining portion arranged above the special variable winning device 39, and then the retaining portion is opened to drop the gaming balls into the special variable winning device 39 at a stretch. There is a gaming machine having such a configuration as to make it possible, but in the case of having such a configuration, the special winning opening count reaches the first threshold relatively easily. However, the second threshold value is such that the player performs an irregular beating as a special hitting method, or repeatedly enters and exits the special winning opening by injecting a threaded game ball into the special variable winning device 39. It is difficult to reach without cheating.

[Over prize notification mode]
FIG. 110A is a table illustrating an example of a notification mode of the first over-prize notification and the second over-prize notification. For example, the first over-prize notification and the second over-prize notification are executed using sound and / or image display as a notification method.

  In the first over-prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the sound of the character A (for example, “Wow!”) To flow from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character A and its dialogue (for example, “Wow!”) To the display device 41. !)) Is displayed as an image. In the second over-prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the sound of the character B (for example, “Collar!”) To flow from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character B and its serif (for example, “Coller!”) To the display device 41. ) Is displayed as an image. The character A and the character B are different characters. For example, each of the characters A and B may be a hero and a character of the enemy in the motif (subject) of the effect.

  As described above, the second over-prize notification is different from the first over-prize notification, and the first over-prize notification gives a comfortable impression to the player, whereas the second over-prize notification is A warning is given to the player with an unpleasant impression.

  Note that a simple sound or music may be used instead of the voice as the voice. For example, the first over-prize notification may be provided by a blessing sound (a sound that causes a player to have a pleasant feeling), and the second over-prize notification may be provided by a warning sound (a sound that causes a unpleasant emotion to a player). Good.

  FIG. 110B is a table showing a light emitting mode of the LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening as another example of the notification mode of the first over-prize notification and the second over-prize notification. The first over-prize notification and the second over-prize notification may be performed by using a light emission of an LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening, in addition to the sound and the image display, or in addition to the sound and the image display as a notification method. . An LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening is provided in the special variable winning device 39 as one of the board decoration devices 46.

  The effect control device 300 causes the LED illuminating the inside of the special winning opening to emit yellow light in the first over-prize notification to congratulate the over-win, and warns the over-win in the second over-prize notification. The LED that illuminates the mouth emits red light. The LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening normally emits white light. In other light emission modes, the LED may be blinked in different modes as the first over-prize notification or the second over-prize notification.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 111 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in a time-series manner in the sixth embodiment, and is an example of a screen transition from during the big hit round to when the big hit ends (when ending).

  FIG. 111 (sa) is the same as FIG. 96 (a), and shows the screen of the eighth round (8R) of the jackpot.

  In (g), in the eighth round (8R), the large winning opening count reaches the first threshold (for example, 10) exceeding the upper limit value at which the closing of the large winning opening starts, so that the first over winning notification is executed. Have been. In the first over-prize notification, the character A (frog) and its dialogue (for example, “Awesome!”) Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character A (for example, "Awesome!"). In addition, as a display or a sound in the notification of the first over-winning prize, the fact that the large winning opening count number has reached the first threshold may be more directly notified (for example, “Awesome! Achieved 10!”).

  In (S), the second over-prize notification is executed in the eighth round because the special winning opening count number has exceeded the first threshold and has reached the second threshold (for example, 11). In the second over-prize notification, the character B (snake) and its serif (for example, “Collar!”) Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character B (for example, "Coller!"). In addition, as a display or a sound in the second over-winning notification, the fact that the large winning opening count number has reached the second threshold may be more directly notified (for example, “11 are too many. ).

  FIG. 111 (C) is the same as FIG. 96 (A), and shows the screen of the final round (16R) of the jackpot.

  111 (S) of FIG. 111 corresponds to (G) of FIG. 96B, but the display device 41 during the ending at the end of the special game state (big hit) overwins the big winning opening during one big hit. The number of balls (prize balls) acquired as a result is displayed as "224 cars" as the number of outstanding balls. Here, “both” means the number, but “both” does not need to correspond exactly to the number as long as it reflects the number. For example, it is also possible to display “112 cars” with “two cars” as two units.

  By displaying the number of balls (prize balls) acquired by the over prize, the player can have a sense of superiority that many over prizes can be generated, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if a person in charge of the hall, such as a hall clerk, confirms that the number of balls won by over-winning is extremely large, there is a possibility that the player may have made an irregular beating or cheating Therefore, the player can be marked as a person to be watched.

  Further, in the ending screen of (SO), the number of acquired balls is displayed as “2016 cars”, which is equivalent to 14 award balls × 9 counts (count upper limit value) × 16 rounds = 2016. is there. That is, the number of acquired payouts is a value obtained by subtracting the number of payouts acquired by over-winning (the number of outstanding payouts) from the acquired payouts (2240) finally acquired in one big hit. In addition, the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 during the big hit is displayed as “bonus”. Here, 10 prize balls × about 3 prizes per 1 R × 16 R = 480 pieces are exemplified as the number of payouts acquired by winning the general prize port 35.

  In FIG. 111 (S), a right-handed display (“right-handed! →”), which is a notification that instructs the player to make a right-handed shot, which is omitted in (G) of FIG. 96B, is ending. Is also running. Here, the right-handed display is information relating to an operation performed by the player on the operation unit (increase of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24), and is displayed on the front side prior to other displays. I have. Here, the right-handed display as information on the operation of the player may be displayed darkly, other displays may be displayed lightly, or if the display range of the other display and the right-handed display overlaps, another display may be performed. Need not be displayed. Further, when the display ranges of the right display and the other display overlap, those displays may be alternately displayed. That is, by displaying information to be displayed when various displays are mixed based on a preset priority order, it is possible to prevent a player from erroneously recognizing display contents. Further, other displays are effect image displays in which a shooting star is flowing and displays in the dialogue display section 770a, but may also include displays in the character 770 and the big hit history display section 760.

  FIG. 111 (t) corresponds to (h) of FIG. 96B, and shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH” occurs after the end of the big hit state. The right-handed display is executed following (S).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010 in FIG. 78) according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 112, an over-winning setting process (B4001) is added to the hole / player setting mode process (FIG. 95) of the third embodiment, but the other steps are the same, and the same step numbers are assigned. And the description is omitted.

  For example, when a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined switch on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y )) To enter the hall setting mode (B2704-B2716).

  The effect control device 300 executes an over-winning winning setting process (B4001) after the hall LED brightness adjusting process (B2707), and thereafter executes a liquid crystal brightness adjusting process (B2708). In the over prize setting process, a second threshold value for notifying and warning of an abnormal over prize (excess prize) is set.

[Display screen of hall setting mode]
FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. By the screen drawing by the screen drawing start setting (B2704), various adjustment displays (meters, gauges, etc.) for performing various adjustments, menu displays for various selections, and the like are displayed on the display device 41.

  The various adjustment displays include a volume setting display 861 for selecting and setting a volume, a luminance setting display 863 for selecting and setting an LED luminance, an over-winning warning setting display 865 for selecting and setting a second threshold, a liquid crystal luminance ( There is a liquid crystal brightness setting display 867 for selection setting of the brightness of the display device 41). The menu display includes a power saving setting display 869 for selecting and setting power saving, a logo color setting display 871 for selecting and setting the issuance color of the logo character, and a selected and operated operation for confirming the selection setting. A setting confirmation operation display 873 for confirming the setting when there is a user's setting confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 25), and a factory setting display 875 for selecting whether or not to set the factory default. is there.

  In addition, on the display screen in the hall setting mode, an operation method display 877 indicating the operation method of the effect button 25 and a fourth symbol setting display 879 for setting the fourth symbol of the special figure change display game are displayed. The fourth symbol (fourth special symbol) is the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol) on the display device 41 in the decorative special symbol variation display game. The decoration special symbol (identification information) other than the symbol fluctuates due to repetition (blinking) of the light-on display and the light-off display to indicate that the special-figure variable display game is being executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by the display device 41 or another sub-display device, or an LED lamp.

  In the over-prize warning setting display 865, the meter is displayed by one scale (one step) by default, and indicates a default value of the second threshold. Since the first threshold value differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10, the default value of the second threshold value also differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 can set the default value of the second threshold value and the first threshold value in the model setting process (B1302 in FIG. 88 or FIG. 102) according to the received model designation command (model information). As described above, since the default value of the second threshold value is a value corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, selection and setting of the second threshold value can be easily performed.

  For example, if the first threshold for over-winning is 10, the default value of the second threshold is 11. The operator (especially, a game store clerk) displays the over-prize warning setting display 865 in a specific display mode (highlight display (refer to a black frame)) by touching the effect button 25 in the up and down direction. The value of the second threshold value is increased or decreased by a touch operation in the direction. When the effect button 25 is touched in the right direction, the number of meters to be displayed is increased to two divisions (two steps) in the over-prize warning setting display 865, and the second threshold value is displayed beside the meter. The meter can be adjusted on 1 to 5 scales (1 to 5 steps). When the setting confirmation operation display 873 is selected by the vertical touch operation of the effect button 25 and the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (the operation of pressing the effect button 25) is performed, the selected second threshold is determined. In this way, the second threshold value can be flexibly set (changed) according to the intention of the game store (hall) side.

  As a modification of the sixth embodiment, the following configuration is also possible.

  Although the over-prize notification (the first over-prize notification or the second over-prize notification) is executed every time an over-prize occurs, when the large-prize-winning port count reaches the first threshold or the second threshold ( (Immediately after) the over-prize information may be executed, and the over-prize information may not be executed if the special winning opening count is other than the first threshold and the second threshold.

  In a special game state including a predetermined number of round games, the first over-prize notification or the second over-prize notification may be executed only in a specific round (specific round game). In particular, in the last round, since the time until the ending is short, the first over-prize notification or the second over-prize notification need not be executed so as not to overlap with the ending.

  In addition, the payout command (FIGS. 83 and 101) can be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the game hall internal management device (hall computer) as an external device, and the external device can execute the over-prize notification processing of FIG. . In this case, the external device does not necessarily need to execute the first over-prize notification, but executes the second over-prize notification.

  Further, the over-prize information of the sixth embodiment can be applied to not only the over-prize of the large winning opening but also the over-prize of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (the second starting winning opening). For example, in a predetermined game state (a specific game state, a normal power support state, or the like), the effect control device 300 determines that the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening during a single opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a reference value ( When a first threshold value (for example, three) larger than two (for example, two) is reached, a first over-prize notification is executed, and when a second threshold value (for example, four) is reached, a second over-prize notification is executed. May be. The effect control device 300 receives the payout command (FIGS. 83 and 101) from the game control device 100, and counts the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) as a count. The over-prize notification processing shown in FIG. 109 can be applied. Thereby, the normal variable prize winning device 37 can also execute different over prize notification in two stages, and enhance the interest of the game and warn against an abnormal excess prize (over prize).

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, when the result of the game (the special figure variable display game or the general figure variable display game) is a predetermined result, the gaming machine 10 has a predetermined game state (special game state) advantageous to the player. And a specific game state (a normal power support state) can be generated. The variable prize device (special variable prize device 39 or the normal variable prize device 37) is in an open state (open state, operating state) in a predetermined game state, and is in an open state more than a closed state (non-open state, non-operating state). Winning of game balls becomes easy. The detecting means (count switch 39a (large winning opening switch) and starting opening 2 switch 37a) detect winning of a game ball to the variable winning device.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) directs information on winning of the game ball (large winning opening count command or payout command) when the detection means detects the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device. This is transmitted to the control means (effect control device 300). The first informing means (B3805 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the number of times a game ball has been won to the variable winning device (or the number of times of transmission of information relating to the winning of a game ball) is one. When the first threshold value is reached in the open state, the first excess winning notification (first over winning notification) is executed. The second notification means (B3806 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the number of winning of the game ball to the variable winning device reaches the second threshold which is larger than the first threshold in one open state. In this case, the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification) is executed. For example, the notification mode of the second excess winning notification may be a warning unlike the notification mode of the first excess winning notification.

  When the number of game balls won to the variable winning device exceeds the upper limit (specified number of times, reference value) or the first threshold and becomes equal to or more than the second threshold, the number of winnings is abnormally large and the possibility of chance is low. . However, according to the above configuration, when such abnormal extra winning (over winning) occurs, a warning can be given by the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification).

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the second threshold value according to an operation (such as a touch operation) on an operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player. It is. Therefore, the second threshold value at which a warning is issued can be easily changed according to the intention of the game store (hall).

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the number of wins to the variable prize device is equal to or more than the first threshold value in one predetermined game state (special game state or specific game state). The number of prize balls paid out in this case is totaled (B3803 in FIG. 109), and the total number of prize balls is displayed on the display means (display device 41) at the timing when the predetermined game state ends. Therefore, the player can know how much over winning can be generated in the predetermined game state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, a person in charge of the hall, such as a hall clerk, may determine that the player is behaving irregularly or performing wrongdoing if the total number indicating the number of balls won due to over-winning is extremely large. We can recognize sex.

[Seventh embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game as the effect during the change (the variable effect) by the above-described variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) to the temporary stop mode ( (Fluctuation fluctuation). The variable effect setting processing (B1905 in FIG. 92) executed by the effect control device 300 and the like constitute temporary stop executing means.

  FIG. 114 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol (identification information: left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the ornament special symbol varying display game according to the seventh embodiment. At the start of the decorative special symbol change display game, the left symbol 891 (first special symbol), the right symbol 892 (second special symbol), and the middle symbol 893 (third special symbol) all start to change. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped left symbol (first stopped symbol) swings by a vibration operation. This swing fluctuation then becomes an announcement effect that gives an announcement that there is a possibility that the vehicle will enter the reach state when the right symbol 892 stops. For example, compared to the case where the decorative special figure change display game is stopped without occurrence of the reach, the reach is generated by increasing the swing width (movement width) of the swing variation after the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped. The player is notified that there is a possibility that the game may be performed.

  Next, after a lapse of a predetermined time Tb from the start of the fluctuation, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped to be in the reach state, and both the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (second stop symbol) are shaken by the vibration operation. Perform swing fluctuation. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time Tc from the start of the fluctuation, the middle symbol 893 is temporarily stopped to be in a symbol determination waiting state, and the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 (the first symbol) (3 stop symbols) fluctuates due to vibration. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Td from the start of the fluctuation, the swing fluctuation ends, the three stopped symbols are completely stopped and the symbols are determined, and the result (stop symbol) of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit result (special result mode). ) Or outlier results.

  If the symbol is not determined, the re-variation may start before the predetermined time Td elapses, and a pseudo continuous notice may be given. In particular, in the pseudo continuous notice, the re-variable symbol may be temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 893. In the pseudo continuous notice (pseudo continuous production), the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo stopped) in a stop mode other than the special result mode, and then pseudo-changed (re-changed) is repeated, and a plurality of fluctuations are performed. Performs an effect as if the display games were being played continuously.

  After the symbol determination timing Td at which the symbol is determined, the time (period) for displaying the determined decorative special symbol is the symbol stop display time (for example, the time from Td to the start of the next decorative special figure variation display game, etc.). For example, 600 msec). In the present embodiment, the time (Td-Tc) in the symbol waiting state from the middle symbol stop timing Tc at which the middle symbol 893 temporarily stops to the symbol determination timing Td is set to be longer than the symbol stop display time. For this reason, in the symbol determination waiting state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that changes again.

  FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the seventh embodiment, and shows the occurrence of the reach of (d) from the temporary stop (reach notice state) of one symbol of (na). This is an example of a screen transition showing the state of the decoration special figure variation display game up to the temporary stop (state of waiting for symbol confirmation) of the three symbols of (nu) through.

  FIG. 115 (n) corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Ta, and as the first temporary stop state, only the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped due to swing fluctuation to start reach notification. At the time of the reach notice, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 is swinging (oscillating) with a large operation width V1 (first operation width). Since the operation width (amplitude) of the left symbol 891 is large, the player pays attention and can sufficiently know in which symbol the right symbol 892 temporarily stops to reach.

  Note that the left symbol 891 fluctuates only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) around the reference position, but instead has a large operation width (amplitude) W1 only in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). May be varied. The horizontal operation width W1 may be the same as or different from the vertical operation width V1. Further, when the left symbol 891 vibrates in both the up-down direction and the left-right direction, the left-right design 891 may make the phase of the vibration in the up-down direction and the left-right direction the same phase or the opposite phase, and may fluctuate obliquely. Further, the left symbol 891 can move in a circular or elliptical shape by shifting the phases of the vibrations in the vertical and horizontal directions from the same or opposite phases.

  FIG. 115 (d) corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Tb. In the second temporary stop state, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped following the left symbol 891 and reach occurs. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 vibrate at the second operation width (V2 or W2), and swing. Since the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 operate by swing fluctuation, it is possible to notify the player that the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are in a temporary stop state in which the symbols are not completely stopped.

  The mode of the swing fluctuation (the direction of the swing fluctuation and the operation width of each symbol, etc.) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 may be the same or different. If the symbols are the same, the interest of the game is enhanced by the sense of cooperation between the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and when different, the player can be surprised.

  The vertical operation width V2 (or the horizontal operation width W2) of the symbol at the time of the reach occurrence is the vertical operation width V1 (or the horizontal operation width W1) of the symbol at the time of the advance notice of (n). ) (V1> V2, W1> W2). Therefore, the fluctuation in (d) does not hinder the reach of a movie or the like.

  (Nu) in FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of the predetermined time Tc. As the third temporary stop state, the middle symbol 893 also temporarily stops following the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and the three symbols are stopped. Start the swing fluctuation. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 vibrate at the third operation width (V3 or W3) and swing. The mode of the swing fluctuation of all the temporarily stopped symbols (the direction of the swing variation and the operation width of each symbol, etc.) may be the same or different. Further, the third operation width may be set according to whether or not the special figure change display game has a special result (big hit). For example, the third operation width may be set to be larger when the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is unsuccessful than in the case of a big hit. That is, in this case, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed even in the case of a loss, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The vertical operation width V3 (or the horizontal operation width W3) of the symbol in the symbol confirmation waiting state is the vertical operation width V1 (or the horizontal operation width) of the symbol at the time of (n) the advance notice. W1) is smaller than (V1> V3, W1> W3), and is not more than the operation width V2 in the vertical direction (or the operation width W2 in the horizontal direction) of the symbol at the time of the occurrence of (d) (V2 ≧ V3). , W2 ≧ W3).

  As described above, the temporary stop execution means (variable effect setting processing or the like) performs the second temporary stop after the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop), in which the number of pieces of identification information to be temporarily stopped is greater than the first temporary stop. The stop (later temporary stop) is executed, and the oscillation width of the identification information in the first temporary stop can be set to be larger than the oscillation width of the identification information in the second temporary stop. Note that the first temporary stop (first temporary stop) is a temporary stop executed first, and if the second temporary stop (second temporary stop) is the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 115), 1 is set. This corresponds to the first temporary stop ((n) in FIG. 115). The first temporary stop corresponds to the first or second temporary stop ((na) and (d) in FIG. 115) if the second temporary stop is the third temporary stop ((nu) in FIG. 115).

  As described above, the seventh embodiment embodies the following invention.

(1) A display device capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) in a variable manner, and an effect capable of controlling display of the variable display game on the display device. In a gaming machine equipped with control means,
The effect control means includes a temporary stop executing means capable of executing a temporary stop for vibrating and displaying at least one piece of identification information on the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game (FIG. 92). B1905, FIGS. 114 and 115),
After the first temporary stop (for example, (n) in FIG. 115), the temporary stop executing means may perform a second temporary stop (for example, ( D) or (nu)), and sets the oscillation width (amplitude V1) of the identification information at the first temporary stop to be larger than the oscillation width (amplitude V2 or V3) of the identification information at the second temporary stop. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing, on the display device, a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop and a pseudo fluctuation after the temporary stop are repeated.

  (3) The effect control means sets the oscillation width of the identification information in the temporary stop according to whether or not the variable display game has a special result (big hit). (1) or (1) The gaming machine according to 2).

[Operation and Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described seventh embodiment, the width of the vibration of the identification information is smaller than the first temporary stop (for example, (n) in FIG. 115) performed first, the second temporary stop performed after the first temporary stop. (E.g., (d) or (nu) in FIG. 115). Therefore, toward the end of the decoration special figure change display game (determination of identification information), the width of vibration of the identification information in the temporary stop state can be gradually reduced, and a novel effect unprecedented can be performed. The interest of the game is improved. In the conventional gaming machines, the width of vibration of the identification information in the temporary stop state is not considered, and there is room for improvement in the interest of the game.

[Modification Example 1 of Seventh Embodiment]
Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special figure variable display game according to the first modification. FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of the display device 41 in a time series in the first modification. Note that (d) and (nu) in FIG. 117 are the same as (d) and (nu) in FIG.

  In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, an example in which reach reaches SP reach will be described. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), at time Tba from the start of the change, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops and enters the reach state. Thereafter, at time Tbb, the reach evolves into an SP reach. After SP reach development, in order to display the SP reach effect (movie or the like) at the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are respectively upper left and upper right as shown in FIG. Move to the corner. Then, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 which have moved to the corners are changed from the normal mode to the special mode so as to erase the others except for the numeral portion, and swing in a temporary stop state. That is, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 located at the corners are displayed in a special mode of a reduced size smaller than the normal mode of the normal size (FIG. 117 (d)) and are temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (N), at the middle symbol temporary stop timing Tc, the three symbols that have been SP-reached and have been temporarily stopped vibrate and fluctuate. Here, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 have returned to the normal size.

  Here, the variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) executed by the effect control device 300 and the like constitute an identification information changing means capable of changing the identification information (decorative special design) from the normal mode to the special mode. . Then, the identification information changing means (variable effect setting processing or the like) executes the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) before the identification information is changed to the special mode, and after the identification information is changed to the special mode. The second temporary stop (the subsequent temporary stop) is executed. Therefore, in the time between the first temporary stop and the second temporary stop, the interest of the game can be enhanced by changing the identification information (decorative special design), and a special effect (SP reach effect, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Space for display can be provided.

  By the way, in this modified example, the first temporary stop (first temporary stop) corresponds to the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 117), and the second temporary stop (second temporary stop) corresponds to the third temporary stop. This corresponds to the stop ((nu) in FIG. 117). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) is made to correspond to the first temporary stop ((n) in FIG. 115), and the second temporary stop (the later temporary stop) is made the second or third. You may make it respond | correspond to the 2nd temporary stop ((d) (nu) of FIG. 117).

  The time (Td-Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state is set to be longer than the time (Tbb-Tba) from time Tba to time Tbb. For this reason, in the symbol determination waiting state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that changes again.

  In FIG. 116, the operation widths (V1, V2, W1, W2, V3, W3) in the swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and / or the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 are shown. The longer the fluctuation, the shorter the period (period) of the fluctuation may be set. Conversely, the time (period) in which the fluctuation is continued may be set longer as the operation width in the fluctuation is smaller. For example, the continuation time of the fluctuation is increased in inverse proportion to the operation width in the fluctuation. That is, when the fluctuation operation of the fluctuation is large, the player has a high expectation that the fluctuation of the special decoration symbol will continue, and conversely, the time of the fluctuation is set short. When the fluctuation operation of the fluctuation is small, the sense of expectation that the fluctuation will continue is low, and conversely, the time of the fluctuation is set to be long. This makes it possible to adjust the symbol determination timing as appropriate to keep the big hit player's expectation of the big hit while maintaining the expectation of the big hit.

[Modification 2 of Seventh Embodiment]
A second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game according to the second modification. FIG. (B) shows a case in which the result of the special figure change display game is a change in an outlier. FIG. 119 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the symbol determination waiting state in the second modification, where (nu-1) shows a case where the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit, and (nu-2) Shows a case where the result of the decorative special figure change display game is out of order. Note that (nu-1) and (nu-2) in FIG. 119 correspond to (nu) in FIG.

  The operation time of the swing fluctuation from the temporary stop of the middle symbol until the symbol confirmation timing is reached when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is less than the case of the big hit (the period of the symbol confirmation waiting state) May be lengthened and / or the operation width of the fluctuation in this operation time may be increased. Therefore, even in the case of a loss, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation will be performed and to enhance the interest of the game.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 118, when the symbol determination timing when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit and when the symbol is out of time is Tda and Tdb, respectively, the symbol determination waiting state period in the case of the loss ( Tdb−Tc) may be longer than the symbol confirmation waiting state period (Tda−Tc) when a big hit occurs. As shown in (nu-1) and (nu-2) in FIG. 119, in the symbol confirmation waiting state, the operation widths of the swing fluctuations of the temporarily stopped symbols are smaller when the operation widths V4 and W4 are different. The operation widths in the case of a big hit may be larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 (V4> V3, W4> W3). The operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of a deviation may be larger than the operation widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2, W4> W2), or may be smaller than the operation widths V2 and W2 in the reach state ( V4 ≦ V2, W4 ≦ W2).

  In addition, as in (nu-3) and (nu-4) of FIG. 120, the second modification may be applied to the case of the big hit without re-lottery and the case of the big hit with re-lottery. That is, even if the case of (nu-1) and (nu-2) of the big hit in FIG. 119 is different from the big hit without re-lottery and the big hit with re-lottery, respectively, the modification 2 is applied. Good. In addition, the re-lottery means, for example, changing a normal jackpot symbol (or a probable jackpot symbol) that has been temporarily stopped to a probable jackpot symbol (or a normal jackpot symbol) by re-fluctuating when a re-lottery is won. Say.

  In (nu-3) of FIG. 120, the probability variable jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, "7, 7, 7", and in (nu-4) of FIG. 120, the normal jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, "2, 2, 2". Have been. In the symbol determination waiting state, the operation width of the swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is such that the operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of the big hit with the re-lottery are larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 in the case of the big hit without the re-lottery. It may be larger (V4> V3, W4> W3). Thereby, in the case of the big hit with the re-lottery, the possibility of re-change due to the re-lottery can be notified to the player.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments.

  FIG. 121A is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a CPU 111a of a game microcomputer 111 according to the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU 111a is shown as the CPU core 102. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80 system CPU. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU core 102 has a register configuration different from that of the related art (for example, JP-A-2013-233285).

  The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) illustrated in FIG. 121A has a width of 8 bits, each of which has a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, and an L register. 1211A.

  These general-purpose registers can be used as a WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) having a width of 16 bits by combining the W register 1201A and the A register 1202A. Similarly, BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) combining B register 1204A and C register 1205A, DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) combining D register 1207A and E register 1208A, and H register 1210A It is also possible to use an HL register 1212A (pair register, register pair) in which the HL register 1212A and the L register 1211A are combined.

  Further, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) includes an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a each having a width of 16 bits. The IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a are used as indices when an instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 described later accesses data. Further, as described later, the IY register 1232a can be used as a start address designation register for setting the start address of the RAM 111c (work area storage means) in the address space (or memory space).

  Note that these general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. On the other hand, the CPU core 102 includes another general-purpose register group (register group of the register bank 1) 1220B having the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose registers included in the register group 1220A of the register bank 0.

  The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes W registers 1201B to L1211B having the same function as the W registers 1201A to L1112A of the register bank 0. These registers can also be used as 16-bit registers as the WA registers 1203B to HL registers 1212B, similarly to the register bank 0. The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes an IX register 1231b and an IY register 1232b having the same function as the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes a flag register 1200 having a width of 8 bits.

  The flag register 1200, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121B, stores an operation result using the register. A register bank selector (RBS) 1301 (described later with reference to FIG. 121B) of the flag register 1200 selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is used as an operation target.

  Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is used for calculation by an instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 described later. On the other hand, each register belonging to an unselected register group retains its value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is changed and becomes a selection target.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes a DP register 1230. The DP register 1230 can be used to store, for example, a head address of a data area (for a user program) of the ROM 111b in an address space (or a memory space). Various tables, data, and the like are stored in the data area.

  Further, the CPU core 102 includes an SP register 1233 having a width of 16 bits and functioning as a stack pointer, and a PC register 1234 functioning as a program counter.

  The stack pointer 1233 indicates the position of the area when data is stored (or data is taken out) in the stack area. The program counter 1234 indicates an address at which an instruction executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 described below is stored.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 executes the game control program and performs an arithmetic process using each register inside the CPU core 102. Specifically, the data stored in the address indicated by the program counter 1234 is read from the ROM 111b, and the read data is regarded as a code, and an instruction corresponding to the code is executed. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes an instruction included in a predetermined instruction set.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing means. However, inside the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 is mainly used to perform the function of the arithmetic processing means. I have. The RAM 111c serves as update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs due to a backup power supply. Storage means.

  Note that the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 responds to the instruction of the game control program (game control program) via the access circuit 1243, the address bus 721, and the data bus 722, and stores the ROM 111 b (user program) outside the CPU core 102. In some cases, data may be exchanged with a ROM, a RAM 111c (user work RAM), and other circuits. The address bus 721 is configured by a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 outputs an address specified on the address bus 721 and is stored in an address specified by the data bus 722 (an address in the ROM 111b, the RAM 111c, or the like). Input and output data.

  Further, each time the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 executes the instructions of the ROM 111b one by one, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 stores the address where the next instruction is stored in the program counter 1234. By repeatedly executing the instruction and updating the program counter 1234 in this manner, the game control program is sequentially executed. When receiving an interrupt signal from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to a preset address value of the interrupt processing.

  Data is transferred between the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and the registers included in the CPU core 102 via the internal bus 1235.

  The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit for setting an initial value in each register included in the CPU core 102 in a hardware manner.

  When receiving the reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the built-in reset circuit 1240 activates the initial value setting circuit 1241 and sets the initial value in each register provided in the CPU core 102. Then, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 is activated.

  FIG. 121B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the flag register 1200 according to the eighth embodiment. The value of each bit of the flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121B.

  The interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag for setting permission / prohibition of an interrupt process by an interrupt signal. The flag is set when the value is set to "1" and is prohibited when cleared (value is set to "0"). .

  A register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag for selecting which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B to use when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. Is “1”), the register group 1220B of the register bank 1 is selected by clearing (value is “0”).

  The overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (value is “1”) when an overflow occurs in a general-purpose register to be operated by a predetermined operation, and cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. .

  The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (the value is “1”) when the most significant bit of the general purpose register to be operated becomes “1” by a predetermined operation, and cleared (the value is “0”) otherwise. You.

  The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value is “1”) when a carry (carry) or a borrow (borrow) occurs in the fourth bit of the general-purpose register to be operated as a result of performing the 8-bit operation. In other cases, it is cleared (the value is "0").

  Carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value is “1”) when a carry (carry) or borrow (borrow) occurs by a predetermined operation, and cleared (value is “0”) in other cases. .

  The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is “1”) when a predetermined calculation result is “0”, and cleared (value is “0”) otherwise.

  The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (the value is “1”) when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 and the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set. Alternatively, even when the arithmetic processing is not performed, the value is set (the value is “1”) when the value of the general-purpose register becomes “00h”. If none of these conditions is satisfied, the condition is cleared (the value is “0”).

  When the CPU core 102 is reset, all bits of the flag register are set to 0.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of power-on processing executed by each device (game control device 100, payout control device 200, and effect control device 300) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on in the eighth embodiment. .

  Specifically, FIG. 122 (A) is a flowchart of a power-on process of the game control device 100, and FIG. 122 (B) is a flowchart of a power-on process of the payout control device 200. C) is a flowchart of a power-on process of the effect control device 300.

  First, the power-on processing of the game control device 100 (FIG. 122 (A)) will be described. This power-on process is not performed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but by various hardware (hardware around the CPU core 102) provided in the game control device 100. Processing.

  First, the game control device 100 receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10101).

  The reset signal is transmitted from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to the security circuit 725 (see FIG. 121A) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM access control circuit (see FIG. 121) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111. (Not shown) and a reset terminal of a serial communication circuit (not shown) provided in the game microcomputer 111. Note that the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits data to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication using a serial communication circuit. Specifically, when power is applied to these reset terminals, a reset signal is input by applying a voltage equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) for a predetermined time, and after a predetermined time elapses, a predetermined signal is input. Is applied, the reset signal is not input.

  When a reset signal is input from the power supply device 400, the security circuit 725 continues to output a reset signal to a reset terminal of the CPU core 102 until a security check process described later ends, and waits for activation of the CPU core 102. Let it.

  In addition, the reset signal is supplied from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to various input ports (the first input port 122 and the like) and various output ports (the second output port 134, the third output port 135-1, and the like). 135-2, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137).

  Then, when a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware ( A10102). When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of each output port, all are set to 0, and each output port is initialized by hardware (A10102).

  Next, the RAM access control circuit provided in the game microcomputer 111 generates a RAM write-inhibited state in which writing to the RAM 111c is controlled (A10103). By generating the RAM write inhibit state when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the RAM 111c from being updated at an incorrect timing.

  Next, the security circuit 725 (FIG. 121A) to which the reset signal has been input executes the self-diagnosis processing (A10104). The self-diagnosis process is a process of determining whether the security circuit 725 has been initialized.

  If it is determined by the self-diagnosis processing that the security circuit 725 has been initialized, the security circuit 725 executes a security check process (A10105). The security check process is a process of determining the validity of the program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3) using the validity confirmation information stored in the HW parameter ROM (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. is there.

  When the security check process is performed in the process of step A10105, the process proceeds to a game control device program start preparation process. At this time, the security circuit 725 stops the reset signal output to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102, so that the CPU core 102 is activated. Therefore, the game control device program start preparation process is executed by the CPU core 102. The game control device program start preparation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a power-on process (FIG. 122 (B)) of the payout control device 200 will be described. The payout control device 200 includes a microcomputer having the same configuration as the gaming microcomputer 111, as well as various input ports and various output ports.

  First, the payout control device 200 transmits the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 132 (A10111). Note that the processing in step A10111 is the same as the processing in step A10101.

  When a reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit of the payout control device 200, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware. (A10112). Further, when a reset signal is input to the reset terminals of the various output ports of the payout control device 200, all are set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by hardware (A10112).

  Next, the RAM access prohibition circuit 640 of the payout control device 200 generates a RAM write prohibition state in which writing to the RAM 214 is restricted (A10113). The specific description of the process in step A10113 is the same as the process in step A10103.

  Next, the security circuit 725 of the payout control device 200 to which the reset signal has been input executes a self-diagnosis process (A10114). The specific description of the processing in step A10114 is the same as the processing in step A10104.

  Then, when it is determined by the self-diagnosis processing that the security circuit 725 has been initialized, the security circuit 725 executes a security check process (A10115). The specific description of the process of Step A10115 is the same as the process of Step A10105.

  Then, the payout control device 200 executes an initialization process at power-on (A10116). The initialization process at power-on is a process for initializing a RAM or the like, and is executed by the CPU of the microcomputer of the payout control device 200. Further, before the RAM is initialized, the RAM write inhibit state generated in the process of step A10113 is released, and the RAM enters a RAM writable state.

  Next, the payout control device 200 generates a state in which a command from the game control device 100 can be received (A10117). Then, the CPU of the payout control device 200 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10118). If it is determined in step A10118 that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not the initialization command (result of A10118 is “N”), the process waits until the initialization command is received.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (result of A10118 is “Y”), the payout control device 200 performs an initialization process at the start of communication ( A10119), and proceeds to the payout control device main process.

  Next, the power-on processing (FIG. 122 (C)) of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) will be described.

  First, effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) is transmitted with the reset signal output from power supply device 400 (A10121). Note that the processing in step A10121 is the same as the processing in step A10101.

  Then, when a reset signal is input to effect control device 300, the output port of effect control device 300 and the serial communication circuit (interface chip (command I / F) 331) are initialized by hardware (A10122).

  Then, effect control device 300 executes an initialization process at power-on (A10123). The initialization process at power-on is a process for initializing the RAM 322 and the like, and is executed by the CPU 311.

  Next, effect control device 300 generates a state in which a command from game control device 100 can be received (A10124). Then, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10125).

  When it is determined that the command transmitted from game control device 100 is not an initialization command (result of A10125 is “N”), effect control device 300 waits until an initialization command is received.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (result of A10125 is “Y”, the effect control device 300 performs an initialization process at the start of communication. Is executed (A10126), and the routine goes to the production control device main process.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating a game control device program start preparation process according to the eighth embodiment. The first half of the game control device program start preparation process (until the reset address is set in the program counter 1234) is not a process executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but a CPU core. This is a process executed by the initial value setting circuit 1241 (see FIG. 121A) provided in the.

  When the CPU core 102 receives the reset signal from the security circuit 725, the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the initial value setting circuit 1241. At this time, the built-in reset circuit 1240 waits for the operation of the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 until the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets the initial value in each register.

  When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operation, the initial value “29FFh” is set to the stack pointer 1233, the initial value “2800h” (the top address of the RAM 111c) is set to the IY registers 1232a and 1232b, and the initial value is set to the DP register 1230. The value “5000h” (the start address of the data area (for the user program) of the ROM 111b) is set, the reset address “4000h” is set in the HL register 1212A, and the value of “00h” (16 bits) is set in the other registers. The value “0000h” is set in the register (A10201). Note that the reset address may be “0000h”.

  Next, the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets the value of “4000h”, which is the reset address, in the program counter 1234 (A10202). As a result, an initial value is set in each register. Next, when the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 that has been waiting, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 sets the address indicated by the program counter 1234 (corresponding to the reset address of the ROM 111b in which the game control program is stored). Start program execution from. Processing after the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 starts executing the program will be described in the main processing of the game control device in FIG. 124A.

  FIG. 124A and FIG. 124B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing according to the eighth embodiment. The main process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same processes as those of the main process (FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  In FIGS. 124A and 124B, steps A1004, A1013, A1015, A1034, A1038, A1039, and A1045 in FIGS. 5A and 5B are deleted, and steps A10301-A10304 and A10401-A10405 are newly provided.

  In step A10301, the game control device 100 sets the start address (here, “2800h”) of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register 1232a). In step A10302, the game control device 100 sets the start address (here, “5000h”) of the data area (for the user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register 1230).

  By setting the start address of the RAM 111c or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b as a reference address in a predetermined register, the address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) can be made relative to the reference address or offset address. (Difference to the reference address) in some cases. Then, in this case, if the relative address and the offset address are limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte (corresponding to the lower address of the 2-byte address “xxxxxxh”), the number of bytes of the code (machine language instruction) decreases (for example, (Three-byte instructions are reduced to two-byte instructions), and the entire program is compact, and the storage capacity required for storing in the ROM 111b is also reduced.

  Note that the processing from step A1001 to A10302 can be omitted also in the game control device program start preparation processing (FIG. 123) because the processing is executed by hardware (the initial value setting circuit 1241), but the software ( By executing the setting process also in the program, the CPU 111a can operate normally even in a noise environment.

  In step A10303, the game control device 100 sets a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM in a write-enabled state. In the eighth embodiment, the RWM may always be in the read permission state.

  In step A10304, the game control device 100 sets a serial communication circuit (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) of the game microcomputer 111.

  After prohibiting the interruption in step A10401, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process (A1035) and a random number update process 2 (A10402). The random number update process 2 (FIG. 126) of the eighth embodiment is a process of updating a change pattern random number for determining a change pattern in a change display game, but is different from the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1036), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. If (is the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is continued for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036 (A10404). . If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A10404 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A10404 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 outputs all outputs. The off data is output to the port (A1040).

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the game control device 100 allows the interruption (A10403), returns to the process of step A10401, and prohibits the interruption. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, the random number updating process 2, and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed during the interrupt prohibition period from step A10401 to step A10403.

  During the interrupt prohibition period in which the interrupt is prohibited, there is no change or destruction of information in the register (data stored in the register) due to an interrupt process such as a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125). And the random number update processing 2 and the check of the power failure monitoring signal can be performed normally. On the other hand, the transition period from step A10403 to A10401 is the interrupt permission period in which the interrupt is permitted. In this interrupt permission period, since the processes other than the interrupt process are not executed, the information in the register is changed by the interrupt process. Even if there is a problem, no problem occurs.

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 5B), during the interrupt permission period (steps A1034 to A1039), when the initial value random number update process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal are performed, the interrupt process is performed by using the interrupt process. In order to prevent the information from being changed or destroyed, the register bank 0 used in the main processing is switched to the register bank 1 used in the interrupt processing (A1003, A1301). The information of the register used in the processing is saved (PUSH) in the stack area of the RAM 111c. However, in the eighth embodiment, there is no need to switch register banks or save register information during interrupt processing. That is, in the eighth embodiment, there is basically no problem using only the register bank 0.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the timer interrupt process according to the eighth embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same processes as those of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 125, A1301 and A1302 in FIG. 8 are deleted, and steps A10501 and A10502 are newly provided.

  In step A10501, the game control device 100 sets the start address “2800h” of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register), as in step A10301. In step A10502, the game control device 100 sets the start address “5000h” of the data area (for the user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register), as in step A10302. By setting the start address of the RAM 111c in the address space (or the memory space) or the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register as a reference address in this way, the address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) can be performed. In some cases, it can be performed with a relative address from the reference address or an offset address (difference from the reference address), and the number of bytes (memory capacity) of the code (machine language instruction) is reduced.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number update process 2 according to the eighth embodiment. The random number update process 2 is executed by the game control device 100. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3. The random number update process 2 according to the eighth embodiment is executed by a non-conventional instruction (code) (see FIG. 141 described later) included in an instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. This is simplified from the random number update process 2 of the embodiment (FIG. 14).

  First, the game control device 100 increments (increases by 1) and updates the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (A10601). Here, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 has a data size of 2 bytes and circulates in a range of 0 to 65535.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the variation pattern random number 2 by incrementing (increased by 1) (A10602), and subsequently decrements (decreases) the variation pattern random number 3 by 1 (A10603). The variation pattern random number 2 is 1 byte, circulates in the range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching 240. The fluctuation pattern random number 3 is 1 byte, circulates in the range of 238 to 0, and returns to 238 after reaching 0.

  Since the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the seventh embodiment do not have any upper limit, the values are circulating random numbers.

  In this specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in a storage area (random number generation area) of the RAM 111c, which is an information storage unit for storing various kinds of information. The information may be stored in the information storage unit.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process according to the eighth embodiment. The hard random number acquisition process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same steps as those in the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 23) according to the first embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

  In FIG. 127, Step A10701 is newly provided instead of Step A2805 in FIG. In step A10701, the address of the target hard random number latch register is prepared. The hard random number latch register is provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and holds a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by a random number generation circuit. The address of the hard random number latch register is used for extracting a jackpot random number in the later-described special drawing starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure starting port switch common process is executed by the game control device 100. Note that the same processes as those of the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 24) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 128, step A10801 is provided in place of steps A2901-A2904 in FIG. 24, step A10802 is provided in place of A2909 in FIG. 24, and step A10803 is provided in place of A2910 and A2911 in FIG. Step A10804 is provided instead of A2913 and A2914.

  In step A10801, the game control device 100 updates the number of times of starting port signal output by +1 (increases by one) with a predetermined value (here, 255) as an upper limit. As will be described later, the processing of step A10801 is executed using only one instruction (an instruction that has not been conventionally provided) provided in the instruction set interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area by updating +1. Then, when the number of times of starting port signal output is “255”, the updated value is “0”.

  In step A10802, the game control device 100 extracts the big hit random number from the area of the address (A10701) of the hard random number latch register prepared in the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) and saves the big hit random number in the big hit random number storage area of the RAM 111c.

  In step A10803, the game control device 100 extracts a big hit symbol random number and saves it in the big hit symbol random number storage area.

  In step A10804, the game control device 100 extracts a small hit symbol random number and saves it in the small hit symbol random number storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination process according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure reservation information determination process is executed by the game control device 100. The same steps as those in the special figure suspension information determination processing (FIG. 25) according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 129, step A10901 is added to FIG. 25, steps A10902 and A10903 are provided in place of A3007 in FIG. 25, and steps A10904 and A10905 are provided in place of A3012 in FIG.

  In step A10901, the game control device 100 loads a jackpot random number from the target area for use in the jackpot determination process (A3004). Here, the target area is a random number storage area (special figure 1 hold storage area or special figure 2 hold storage area) related to hold (first start memory) of special figure 1 or hold (second start memory) of special figure 2 ) Is the latest pending area.

  In step A10902, the game control device 100 loads a jackpot symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is the latest pending area of the random number storage area related to the suspension of the special drawing 1 (first start storage) or the reservation of the special figure 2 (second startup storage). Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (A10903).

  In step A10904, the game control device 100 loads a small hit symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is the latest hold in the random number storage area (special figure 1 hold storage area) related to hold (first start memory) of the special figure 1 because there is no small hit in the result of the special figure 2 change display game. Area. Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (A10905).

  FIGS. 130 to 133 are program lists showing a partial program structure of a game control program executed by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100 according to the eighth embodiment. Each program list is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to Z80 which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and is stored in ROM 111b (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions for assembler). Machine code (machine code) to be executed. Each instruction is included in an instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 as a machine language instruction.

  Instructions (codes) in each program list are described from the left side as "line number" added for convenience, "mnemonic" indicating operation contents (operation contents) of instruction, "operand" of instruction target, and convenience of explanation For "comments". The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction for calling a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

  FIG. 130 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the main processing (FIG. 124A) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 0510 is an instruction (code) corresponding to A1001 in the main processing (FIG. 124A), and prohibits an interrupt (code “DI”).

  The line number 0520 corresponds to A1002 of the main processing, and loads a value “29FFh” as a stack pointer into the SP register (code “LD SP, 29FFH”).

  Line number 0530 corresponds to A1003 of the main processing, and loads 0 into the register bank selector (RBS) (code “LD RBS, 0”). Thus, register bank 0 is set.

  The line number 0540 corresponds to A10301 of the main processing, and loads “2800h” as the head address of the RAM 111c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800H”).

  The line number 0550 corresponds to A10302 of the main processing, and loads “5000h” as the start address of the data area (for the user program) of the ROM 111b into the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000h”).

  The line number 0560 and the line number 0570 correspond to A1005 of the main processing. In the line number 0560, a numerical value (a numerical value meaning stop of firing) corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, C_SHOT_NG”).

  In the line number 0570, the numerical value of the A register is output to the port C_OUT01 (that is, the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_OUT01) (code “OUT (C_OUT01), A”).

  The line number 0580 corresponds to A1006 of the main processing, and inputs a numerical value from the port C_INPUT1 (that is, a port having a numerical value corresponding to the label C_INPUT1) to the A register (code “IN A, (C_INPUT1)”).

  Line number 0610 and line number 0620 correspond to A1031 of the main process (FIG. 124B). In the row number 0610, the address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_CTCTBL) of the data table (CTCTBL) necessary to activate or use the CTC circuit is set to the relative address (D_CTCTBL-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_CTCTBL-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the start address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  The “LQDD” instruction uses a relative address (substantially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the head of the address space as an operand. Decrease by bytes (3 bytes to 2 bytes). Although the relative address is originally 2 bytes, the mnemonic (machine instruction section) is made different according to the value of the upper byte of the relative address. Therefore, the relative address is substantially the lower byte (1 byte). Can show.

  In the line number 0620, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a CTC circuit) is called (code “CALLR P_DEVSET”). The “CALLR” instruction is an instruction capable of reducing the number of required bytes from the conventional CALL instruction. The "CALLR" instruction is converted into a 2-byte machine language instruction when calling processing before a predetermined address value (for example, 4C00h), and is converted into a 3-byte machine language instruction when calling processing after the predetermined address value. Converted to machine language instructions.

  Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the “LQDD” instruction and the “CALLR” instruction.

  Line number 0630 and line number 0640 correspond to A1032 of the main processing (FIG. 124B). In the row number 0630, the address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_RNDSET) of the data table (RNDSET) necessary for starting or using the random number generation circuit is set to the relative address (D_RNDSET-5000H) and loaded into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the start address “5000h” of the data area for the user program.

  At line number 0640, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a random number generation circuit) is called (code “CALLR P_DEVSET”).

  Line numbers 0650 to 0730 correspond to A1033 of the main processing, and sequentially store various initial value random numbers (here, initial values at power-on) while updating addresses in a predetermined area of the RAM 111c.

  At line 0650, the value corresponding to the label R_RNDZINI is loaded into the HL register. The label R_RNDZINI indicates a numerical value of a start address of a predetermined area for storing various initial value random numbers in the RAM 111c.

  In the row number 0660, the value (here, the lower byte) of a predetermined register “C_SRND0_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND0_L)”). The predetermined register is a soft random number register 0.

  In the line number 0670, after loading (storing) the value of the A register as a jackpot symbol initial value random number at the head address of a predetermined area in the RAM, the address in the HL register is updated from the head address to the next address (code “ LQD (HL +), A "). “HL +” means that the address in the HL register is updated to the next address after loading. Since the jackpot symbol initial value random number is 1 byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In this “LQD” instruction, the value of the HL register is updated after the value is stored in the area (in the RAM) corresponding to the address (numerical value) set in the HL register (or another register) (here, the value is stored). +1 update). As a result, values can be continuously stored in a continuous area (in the RAM), and it is not necessary to calculate a storage destination address as in the related art. Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “LQD” instruction.

  At the line number 0680, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND1_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  In the row number 0690, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the address area currently stored (stored) in the HL register as the small hit symbol initial value random number, and then the address in the HL register is changed to the next address. (“LQD (HL +), A”). Since the small hit symbol initial value random number is one byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  At line number 0700, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  In line 0710, after loading (storing) the value of the A register as a hit initial random number into the address area currently stored (stored) in the HL register, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (Code “LQD (HL +), A”). Since the hit initial random number is one byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  At line number 0720, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  At the line number 0730, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the address area currently stored in the HL register as the winning symbol initial value random number. Here, since there is no initial value random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated (code “LD (HL), A”).

  The line number 0750 is an instruction corresponding to A10401 in the main processing, and prohibits an interrupt (code “DI”).

  The line number 0760 is an instruction corresponding to A1035 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINI) for executing the initial value random number update process (code “CALLR P_RNDINI”).

  The line number 0770 is an instruction corresponding to A10402 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINC2) for executing the random number update process 2 (code “CALLR P_RNDINC2”).

  At line number 0780, the value of the W register is cleared and set to 0 by taking the exclusive OR of the values of the W register (code “XOR W, W”).

  Line numbers 0800 to 0820 correspond to A1037 of the main processing, and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In the line number 0800, a numerical value is input to the A register from the port C_INPUT1 to which the power failure monitoring signal enters (code “IN A, (C_INPUT1)”).

  At the row number 0810, the logical product of the value of the A register and the value C_PDWNSW (for example, 00000001B with negative logic) indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is off is obtained (code “AND A, C_PDWNSW”). The calculation result of the logical product of the row number 0810 becomes zero when the power failure monitoring signal is ON (for example, 00000000B in negative logic).

  In the row number 0820, when the operation result of the row number 0810 is zero (Z) (that is, in the case of a power failure occurrence state), jump to the ROM address (address of the ROM 111b, branch destination) corresponding to the label MAIN90 (conditional branch). Then, the instruction at line number 0860 and thereafter is executed (code “JRZ, MAIN90”). When the operation result of the line number 0810 is not zero (Z) (that is, when no power failure occurs), the processing shifts to the instruction of the line number 0830. If the operation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set.

  The line number 0830 is an instruction corresponding to A10403 of the main processing, and permits an interrupt (code “EI”).

  The line number 0840 corresponds to the transition from A10403 to A10401 in the main processing, jumps to the ROM address (address in the ROM 111b) corresponding to the label MAIN70, and executes the instruction of the line number 0750 and thereafter (code “JR”). MAIN 70 ").

  Line numbers 0860 to 0880 correspond to A10404 of the main process, and determine whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks.

  At line number 0860, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state (power failure occurrence state), the value of the W register indicating the number of times the ON state is detected is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code “INC W”).

  In the line number 0870, the value of the W register is compared with the number of checks “2” (code “CP W, 2”). If the value of the W register is smaller than the number of checks, a carry flag (CF) is set as the result of the comparison (C). In the line number 0880, when the carry flag (CF) is set (when the number of times of detection of the ON state has not reached the number of checks), the CPU jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label MAIN80 and starts from the line number 0800. Is executed (code "JRC, MAIN80"). When the carry flag (CF) is not set (when the number of times the ON state is detected reaches the number of checks), the flow shifts to line number 0890.

  Line number 0890 corresponds to A1040 of the main processing, and calls a subroutine P_OUTCLR that outputs off data to all output ports (code “CALLR P_OUTCLR”).

  FIG. 131 is a program list showing the program structure of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 1000 is a label P_TINT indicating a timer interrupt process. The line number 1010 corresponds to A10501 of the timer interrupt processing, and loads “2800h” into the IY register as the head address of the RAM 111c (code “LD IY, 2800H”).

  The line number 1020 corresponds to A10502 of the timer interrupt processing, and loads “5000h” into the DP register as the head address of the ROM data area (for the user program) (code “LD DP, 5000H”). The instructions at line numbers 1010 and 1020 can be omitted because they have already been executed in the main processing (line numbers 0540 and 0550 in FIG. 130).

  In line numbers 1030 to 1140, subroutines corresponding to steps A1303 to A1314 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125) are called by the "CALLR" instruction. The line number 1150 is a “RETI” instruction for returning from the timer interrupt processing to the main processing.

  FIG. 132 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the startup opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 1500 is a label (P_SIDOSW) corresponding to the start-up switch monitoring process, and indicates the ROM address (head address) of the program module corresponding to the start-up switch monitoring process. The starting port switch monitoring process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" command in the special figure game process (FIG. 21).

  The line number 1510 corresponds to A2701 of the start-up switch monitoring process, and sets the address (the numerical value corresponding to the label D_SIDCHK1) of the start-up 1 winning monitoring table as a relative address (D_SIDCHK1-5000H) and loads the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_SIDCHK1-5000H"). Thereby, the starting port 1 winning monitoring table is prepared.

  The line number 1520 corresponds to A2702 of the start-up switch monitoring processing, and calls a subroutine (label P_HRNDGET) of the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 23) by a “CALLR” instruction (code “CALLR P_HRNDGET”).

  The line number 1530 corresponds to A2703 of the start-up switch monitoring process. When the target start-up winning opening 36 (start-up opening 1) has no start-up winning and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC). Jump (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW20 (code "JR NC, SIDOSW20"). The carry flag (CF) is set if there is a winning opening in step A2806 of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23).

  The row number 1540 and the row number 1550 correspond to A2704 of the start-up switch monitoring process. In the line number 1540, the value stored at the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that the special figure is during the time saving period (during the normal power support state). It is determined whether they do not match (F: false) (code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN”). If they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  Note that the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is an addition address obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAMEFLG to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte (corresponding to the lower address of the two-byte address “xxxxxxh”), and the code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEGLG), C_JTN” of the line number 1540 is a three-byte instruction. be able to. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes and the instruction of the row number 1540 is an instruction of 4 bytes.

  In the line number 1550, when the special figure is in a time saving period, that is, when the comparison result of the line number 1540 is a match (T), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label SIDOSW10, and the line number 1590 is obtained. The following instructions are executed (code “JRST, SIDOSW10”).

  The line number 1560 corresponds to A2705 of the start-up switch monitoring processing, and loads a right-handed instruction notification command (a numerical value corresponding to the label C_RIGHTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM”).

  The line number 1570 corresponds to A2706 of the start-up switch monitoring process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  The row number 1590 corresponds to A2707 of the start-up switch monitoring processing, and the address (label D_T1HOINF) of the table for setting the information of the hold by the start-up winning port 36 (start-up port 1) is set to a relative address (D_T1HOINF-5000H). , HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H”).

  The line number 1600 corresponds to A2708 of the start-up switch monitoring processing, and calls and executes a subroutine (label P_TSIDOSW) of the special figure start-up switch common processing (code “CALLR P_TSIDOSW”).

  FIG. 133A is a program list showing a partial program structure of a hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 2000 is a label (P_HRNDGET) corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process, and indicates the ROM address (head address) of the program module corresponding to the hard random number acquisition process. The hard random number acquisition process is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2702 and A2710 of the start-up switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2010 corresponds to A2801 of the hard random number acquisition process, and clears the carry flag (CF) to zero as the start-up winning information indicating that there is no start-up winning (code “CLR CF”).

  Line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to A2802 of the hard random number acquisition process, and determine whether an input has been made to the target switch. At line number 2020, after loading the value stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) into the A register, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL +)"). The address stored (stored) in the HL register at this time is set by the row number 1510 of the start-up switch monitoring process (FIG. 132). The value stored in the address area is the switch bit data (the determination value other than zero) of the target switch, for example, “00000001B”. Note that the target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number obtaining process in step A2702, and is the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number obtaining process in step A2710.

  In the row number 2030, the rising information is obtained from the address R_SWCTL + 2 where the rising information is stored in the switch control area in which the information on the target switch is stored, and the logical product is obtained with the switch bit data (judgment value) of the A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch is turned on (code “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”). Note that the switch control area is a storage area for storing detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and is provided in the RAM 111c in the present embodiment. The rising information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from off to on.

  Note that R_SWCTL is a start address of the switch control area, and information of a logical level described later is stored in a first address R_SWCTL + 1 from the start address, and rising information is stored in a second address R_SWCTL + 2 from the start address. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit of the 8-bit data of the address R_SWCTL + 2 changes from 0 to 1.

  If the target starting port (starting port 1 or starting port 2) does not have a winning (ball entry) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, and the calculation result ( AND) becomes zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the bit of the target switch is turned on with “00000001B”), the operation result (logical product) is other than zero (for example, “00000001B”). , And the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  This “AQND” instruction can determine whether or not the switch has been turned on without executing an instruction to obtain the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register. Since the on / off determination of the switch is performed without the intervention of the register, the determination can be reliably performed even if a failure occurs in the register. Further, since an instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “AQND” instruction.

  In the line number 2040, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the start-up switch monitoring process (code "RET Z"). That is, when there is no winning in the target starting port (starting port 1 or starting port 2) and the target switch is off, the process returns to the starting port switch monitoring process.

  FIG. 133B is a time chart showing a procedure for detecting “rising information” which is the rising of the switch. Note that f in the figure is an interrupt cycle, and a timer interrupt occurs at the beginning of the interrupt cycle. D indicates a delay time. The rise of the switch, that is, the determination of whether or not the switch is turned on is performed in the input processing of A1303 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125). The first physical level, the second physical level, the logical level, and the rising information described below are updated each time a timer interrupt occurs, are arranged for each switch provided in the gaming machine, and are stored in the switch control area. It is memorized.

  First, the rise (23401) and the fall (23402) of the switch will be described. In the input / output processing at the time of occurrence of the timer interrupt (A1303 in FIG. 125), the CPU 111a determines that the level of the switch detection signal is different from the previously set first physical level (from the low level to the high level or from the high level to the high level). Changes to a low level), and the first physical level is newly set to the level of the detection signal. If the switch detection signal is different from the previously set second physical level after a predetermined delay time d has elapsed, the second physical level is set to the level of the detection signal. The first physical level and the second physical level differ only in the detection timing.

  At this time, if the first physical level matches the second physical level, it is determined that the detection signal has changed, and the level is set as the logical level. When the logic level changes from the low level to the high level, the rising information is set to ON until the delay time elapses from the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. That is, after the rising information is set to ON, it is set to OFF when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the signal level of the first physical level is different from the signal level of the second physical level, that is, as shown in 23403, the level of the detection signal of the switch is different between when the first physical level is detected and when the second physical level is detected. Are different from each other, it is determined that noise has occurred and the logic level is not changed.

  Referring back to FIG. 133A, the row number 2050 corresponds to A2803 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and the random number latch register status is input from the port C_HRDCNT (that is, the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_HRDCNT) to the A register. (Code "IN A, (C_HRDCNT)").

  The row number 2060 and the row number 2070 correspond to A2804 of the hard random number acquisition process, and determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register. At line number 2060, the logical product of the judgment value (judgment data) stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) and the value of the A register is obtained (code “AND”). A, (HL +) "). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). The judgment value is other than zero and is, for example, “00000010B”, and the operation result (logical product) of the row number 2060 becomes zero when the random number latch register status that is the value of the A register does not match the judgment value, and the zero flag (ZF ) Is set, and if the random number latch register status matches the determination value, it becomes a value other than zero (for example, “00000010B”) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register, the bit of the random number latch register status corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the determination value, and the operation result (logical Product) becomes zero.

  In the row number 2070, when the calculation result of the row number 2060 is zero (Z) (that is, when there is no latch data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine is ended and the process returns to the start-up switch monitoring process (code "RET Z").

  The row number 2080 corresponds to A10701 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and is stored in the address area (for example, in the data area of the ROM) of the address currently stored in the HL register in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register. The loaded value (the address of the target hard random number latch register) is loaded into the E register (code “LDE, (HL)”).

  In the line number 2090, the carry flag (CF) is set as the start-up winning information indicating that there is a start-up win (code "SET CF"), corresponding to A2806 of the hard random number acquisition processing.

  In the line number 2100, the subroutine ends, and the process returns to the start-up switch monitoring process (code "RET").

  As described above, the code generally described as “AQND r, (R_SWCB)” takes the logical product of the determination value stored in the register r and the value (rising information) of the switch control area of the address R_SWCB. Thus, the switch detection state (switch bit on / off) can be determined. In this embodiment, R_SWCB is the address of the rising information of the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of the rising information is turned on.

  Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “AQND r, (R_SWCB)”.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
According to the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detection state of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port 2 switch 37a). Game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to a player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (for example, a plurality of general-purpose registers). Register bank 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to a predetermined address and capable of storing a switch detection state. The arithmetic processing means stores the value in any storage area of the update information storage means in the general-purpose register, and stores the value in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and the determination value stored in the predetermined general-purpose register. An instruction (for example, “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”) that can determine the state of the input value is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch according to the instruction. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the switch has been turned on without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area into the general-purpose register. Since the determination of the switch is performed without the intervention of the general-purpose register, the determination can be reliably performed even if a failure occurs in a general-purpose register other than the predetermined general-purpose register. Further, since an instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

[Ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments.

  FIG. 134A is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure startup port switch common processing (FIG. 128) according to the ninth embodiment.

  The line number 2500 is a label (P_TSSIDOSW) corresponding to the common processing of the special figure starting port switch, and indicates the address (head address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the common processing of the special figure starting port switch. The special figure starting port switch common processing is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2708 and A2715 of the starting port switch monitoring processing (FIG. 22).

  The row number 2510 corresponds to A10801 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The code “IQCP (IY + R_SIDOSIG), 255” in the line number 2510 is obtained when the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) stored in the area of the added address “IY + R_SIDOSIG” as an absolute address in the address space is smaller than 255 by the “IQCP” instruction. Is updated to +1. If the value is not smaller than 255, 0 is substituted to initialize the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG). The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times of starting port signal output, is added with 255 as an upper limit. The “IQCP” instruction will be described later in detail in a program list (FIG. 141). The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) which is the number of times of starting port signal output may be set to 255 instead of returning to 255 for 255 or more as in A2901-A2904 in FIG.

  Line numbers 2520 to 2550 correspond to A2905 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line 2520, the value stored in the pending information table (current HL register address area) is loaded into the W register as the offset address of the pending number area (code "LD W, (HL +)"). Thereafter, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address. For example, if the target starting port is the starting port 1, the address in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) at the present time is the value loaded with the row number 1590. The hold information tables (A2707, A2714) are tables (for example, ROM) in which information relating to holding by winning in the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) or the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37, starting port 2) is set. In the data area).

  At line number 2530, the value (reserved number) stored at the addition address IY + W is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (IY + W)”). The addition address IY + W is obtained by adding the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM start address “2800h”). The addition address IY + W is an absolute address of the reserved number area. That is, in the line number 2530, the current number of reserves in the reserved number area is stored in the A register, but the current number of reserves (the number of start-up memories) is updated by +1 in the line number 2560 (A2906) due to the current prize. This is the number of holds before making a reservation.

  In line number 2540, the carry number of the A register is compared with the upper limit (here, 4), and the carry flag (CF) is set if the number is smaller than the upper limit, and the carry flag (CF) is set if the upper limit is exceeded. Not set (code "CP A, 4").

  In the line number 2550, when the carry number reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the start-up switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code "RET NC").

  The line number 2560 corresponds to A2906 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In the line number 2560, the number of reservations, which is the value of the reservation number area corresponding to the address IY + W in the RAM, is updated by +1 as the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) (code "IQNC"). (IY + W) "). The address IY + W in the RAM is an address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

  Note that the instruction “IQNC” does not store the one-byte value stored in the address destination area without storing it in the register (at least the general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area). This is an instruction for directly updating +1 (adding only 1) without first taking it into a register. For this reason, the use of the instruction “IQNC” eliminates the need to write three codes, that is, loading into a register, addition processing in a register, and loading into an address destination area. Become compact. In addition, the direct addition of the value stored in the address destination area by the "IQNC" does not use a general-purpose register, so that no problem occurs even if an interrupt process occurs.

  Line numbers 2570 to 2600 correspond to A2907 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At the line number 2570, the reserved number stored in the A register (the reserved number before updating +1) is loaded into the C register (code “LD C, A”).

  At line number 2580, the value (starting port winning flag) stored in the area of the address of the current HL register is loaded into the B register (code “LD B, (HL +)”). That is, the start opening winning flag (the value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is acquired from the hold information table. Thereafter, the value in the HL register is updated to the next address (HL +).

  At the line number 2590, the value (starting port winning flag) stored in the B register is loaded into the area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (code “LQD (IY + R_SIDOFLG), B”. The addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is the IY register. (RAM start address “2800h”) is added to the value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG.

  At line number 2600, the value of the BC register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH BC”).

  Line numbers 2610 to 2650 correspond to A2908 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 2610, the value (the number of bytes (7 or 8) for one hold) stored at the address stored in the current HL register is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, (HL +)”). That is, the number of bytes (7 or 8) for one hold is acquired from the hold information table. Then, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address.

  As shown in the special figure 1 reservation storage area of the RAM 111c in FIG. 135A, the 2-byte jackpot random number, 1-byte jackpot symbol random number, and 1-byte Small hit symbol random number, 2-byte variation pattern random number 1, 1-byte variation pattern random number 2, 1-byte variation pattern random number 3 are stored, and bytes allocated to each special figure 1 hold (first start memory) The number (the number of reserved bytes) is 8 bytes. On the other hand, as shown in the special figure 2 reservation storage area of the RAM 111c of FIG. 135B, the 2-byte jackpot random number, 1-byte jackpot symbol random number, and 2-byte A fluctuation pattern random number 1, a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, and a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored, and the number of bytes (the number of reserved bytes) assigned to each special figure 2 reservation (second starting memory) is 7 Become bytes. Since there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, a 1-byte small hit symbol random number is not stored in each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved storage area.

  In the row number 2620, the number of reserved bytes (7 or 8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the number of reserved bytes stored in the A register (the number of reserves before updating +0 to 3), and the WA register Is stored (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is from 0 to 24, the operation result is substantially stored in the lower register A register. Note that the reserved number is the number of start memories (the number of start memories), and the reserved byte number is the number of bytes allocated for each reservation (for each start memory).

  At line number 2630, the value (address of the random number storage area) stored at the current address stored in the HL register is loaded into the L register (code “LD L, (HL)”). That is, the address (head address) of the random number storage area is obtained from the suspension information table. The start address of the random number storage area (reserved storage area) is 2830h in the special figure 1 reserved storage area (FIG. 135A) and 2850h in the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B).

  At line number 2640, the value stored in the A register (reserved number × reserved byte number) is added to the start address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code “ADD L, A”). As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the number of reservations (the number of reservations before updating +1), that is, the top address of the random number storage area of the reservation generated by the current prize. For example, if the hold generated by the current prize is hold 3, the address of the area corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 1 hold storage area (FIG. 135A) is 30h + 2 × 8 = 40h as the offset address (lower byte), In the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B), the offset address (lower byte) is 50h + 2 × 7 = 5Eh.

  At line number 2650, a numerical value “28h” is loaded into the H register as an upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (code “LDH, 28H”).

  Line numbers 2660 to 2670 correspond to A10802 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 2660, a value (2-byte jackpot random number) stored in a 2-byte area is input from the address stored in the E register (the address of the target hard random number latch register) (code “INW WA, (E) ").

  In the row number 2670, the jackpot random number of the WA register is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (in the RAM), that is, the storage area of the random number generated by the current prize (the area corresponding to the number of storages). Is loaded (stored) (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the jackpot random number is 2 bytes, for example, if the current address stored in the HL register is 2840h, the next address is 2842h. Note that the lower byte (value of the A register) of the big hit random number is stored in the RAM area of a smaller address before the upper byte (the value of the W register).

  As described above, in the code “LQD (HL +), WA”, the address in the HL register is automatically updated to the next address, which is the next storage destination, so that the next time in the continuous RAM area such as the random number storage area, etc. The instruction for calculating the address of the storage destination of the file is unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Line numbers 2680 to 2690 correspond to A10803 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 2680, the value (here, the lower byte) of a predetermined register “C_SRND0_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND0_L)”). The predetermined register is a soft random number register 0.

  At the line number 2690, the value of the A register as the jackpot symbol random number is loaded into the address area currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), A”). Thereafter, the current address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the jackpot symbol random number is 1 byte, for example, if the current address stored in the HL register is 2842h, the next address is 2843h.

  Line numbers 2700 to 2710 correspond to A2912 of the special figure start-up switch common processing.

  In the line number 2700, the value of the B register as the starting opening prize flag (the value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is compared with the numerical value (the value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 to determine whether they match. (T), it is determined whether they do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”). If they match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In the line number 2710, when the comparison result of the line number 2700 is inconsistent (F), that is, when the target starting port is the starting port 2 (when the starting port winning flag indicates the special figure 2), the label TSIDOSW10 is displayed. The instruction jumps (conditionally branches) to the corresponding address in the ROM and executes the instruction of the line number 2750 and thereafter (code “JRSF, TSIDOSW10”). This is because there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, and it is not necessary to acquire and store a small hit symbol random number.

  Line numbers 2720 to 2730 correspond to A10804 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In the row number 2720, the value of the predetermined register “C_SRND1_L” in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  In the line number 2730, the value of the A register is loaded into the area of the address stored in the current HL register as the small hit symbol random number (code “LQD (HL +), A”. The address is updated to the next address (“HL +”). Since the large and small symbol random numbers are 1 byte, for example, if the current address stored in the HL register is 2843h, the next address is 2844h.

  Line numbers 2750 to 2780 correspond to A2915 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At the row number 2750, the value (that is, the variation pattern random number 1) stored in the area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_RDHEN1 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RDHEN1)”). The addition address is obtained by adding the value (offset address of the generation area where the variation pattern random number 1 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN1 to the value (RAM start address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. The addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is an absolute address of a generation area in which the variation pattern random number 1 is generated.

  Here, the offset address R_RNDHEN1 is limited to a range that can be represented by 1 byte, and the code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)” of the row number 2750 can be a 2-byte instruction. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of line number 2750 is an instruction of 3 bytes.

  At line number 2760, the variation pattern random number 1 of the WA register is loaded into a 2-byte area (in the RAM) from the address currently stored in the HL register (code “LQD (HL +), WA”). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is 2 bytes, for example, if the current address stored in the HL register is 2844h, the next address is 2846h.

  At the line number 2770, the value (that is, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) stored in the 2-byte area (in the RAM) from the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)”). The addition address is obtained by adding a value (offset address of a generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN2 to a value (RAM start address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. Note that the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is an absolute address of a generation area where the variation pattern random number 2 is generated. The generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (1 byte) and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (1 byte) are generated is continuous, and the total is 2 bytes. Therefore, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 can be simultaneously loaded into the WA register with one instruction.

  At the line number 2780, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the WA register are loaded into the area of the address (2 bytes in the RAM) currently stored in the HL register (code “LD (HL), WA”). For example, if the current address stored in the HL register is 2846h, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are loaded into 2846h and 2847h.

  The line number 2790 corresponds to A2916 of the special figure starting port switch common processing, and calls a subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure holding information determination processing (FIG. 129) (code “CALLR P_THOINF”).

  Line numbers 2800 to 2820 correspond to A2917 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At the line number 2800, the value of the BC register is restored from the stack area of the RAM (code “POP BC”). The value of the B register is a start opening winning flag (a value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2), and the value of the C register is the number of reservations (the number of reservations before updating +1).

  At the line number 2810, a numerical value (a numerical value indicating the special figure hold mode) corresponding to the label C_THOMD is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THOMD”).

  At the line number 2820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code “ADD C, 2”).

  The line number 2830 corresponds to A2918 of the special figure start port switch common processing. The subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process is called and executed (code “CALLR P_COMSET”). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

  At the line number 2840, the process returns to the start-up switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code "RET").

  As described above, a code generally described as “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)” is used as a storage instruction in a RAM area (particularly, a random number storage area) indicated by an address value set in the pair register qq. ), The value of the register r (or the pair register dd) is stored, and the address value of the pair register qq is updated by adding a predetermined addition value to the next address value. Note that r is an arbitrary register, and qq and dd (different from qq) are arbitrary pair registers. The predetermined addition value corresponds to the number of bytes of the register, and is 1 for the register r and 2 for the pair register dd. Note that a pair register including two registers is also referred to as a register pair.

  Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)”.

[Operation and Effect of Ninth Embodiment]
According to the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing of a game ball to a start winning prize area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (register) comprising a plurality of registers. Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each including two registers. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) extracts a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to a start winning area or a gate), and executes a variable display game. Can be stored in a random number storage area of the update information storage means (for example, the RAM 111c). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) stores the value stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means corresponding to the address set in another register pair. Thereafter, the storage instruction for updating the address set in the other register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means stores the random number stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means according to the storage instruction. The storage instruction is, for example, “LQD (HL +), WA” or “LQD (HL +), A”. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a storage instruction.

  Since the address of the storage destination is automatically updated by the storage instruction, when values are successively stored in a continuous storage area (for example, an area in the RAM), the address calculation of each storage destination which was conventionally required is performed. The instruction for is unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, in the case where random numbers are successively stored in a random number storage area (for example, an area in a RAM), an instruction for calculating an address of each storage destination, which is conventionally required, becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
FIG. 134B is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure startup port switch common processing (FIG. 128) according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. Note that codes having the same contents as those in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same line numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  The row numbers 2500 to 2670 are the same as those in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, but in the row number 12010 executed after the row number 2670, the values of the WA register and the WA ′ register are exchanged (code “ XQCH WA, WA '"). In this embodiment, the WA register is a WA register 1203A (front register) of the register bank 0, and the WA 'register is a WA register 1203B (back register) of the register bank 1. As a result, the jackpot random number (2 bytes) currently stored in the WA register of the register bank 0 is stored in the WA 'register of the register bank 1 before the value of the WA register 1203A of the register bank 0 is changed (destroyed). You can temporarily evacuate.

  When calling the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure pending information determination processing at the line number 2790, the values of the WA register and the WA 'register, which are pair registers, are exchanged again (code "XQCH WA, WA'"). As a result, the jackpot random number saved (stored) in the WA 'register of the register bank 1 is returned to the WA register of the register bank 0 when the special figure pending information determination processing is executed (immediately before execution). ), It can be used in the big hit determination process of the special figure suspension information determination process. Since it is not necessary to take out (read) the jackpot random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special figure reservation information determination processing, the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced. Further, since the data is not saved in the stack area of the RAM, an increase in the RAM capacity can be prevented.

  The row number 12020 and the row number 12030 are the same as the row number 2690, but the jackpot symbol random number is set to A in order to be able to use the jackpot symbol random number acquired at the row number 2680 in the subsequent special figure reservation information determination processing. It is stored in the E register in addition to the register (code "LD E, A").

  The row number 12040 and the row number 12050 are the same as the row number 2730, but the small hit symbol random number acquired in the row number 2720 is used in order to be able to be used in the later special figure reservation information determination processing. Is stored in the D register in addition to the A register.

  As described above, the code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′” corresponds to the value of the pair register dd of the first register bank (eg, register bank 0) and the pair register dd as the exchange instruction. The value of the pair register dd ′ of the second register bank (for example, the register bank 1) is exchanged. Therefore, the jackpot random number (2 bytes) stored in the pair register dd of the first register bank can be temporarily saved in the pair register dd 'of the second register bank. Then, the saved jackpot random number can be returned (returned) to the pair register dd of the first register bank at a desired timing and used. Further, the evacuation can be performed without using the stack area of the RAM. Therefore, in the special figure reservation information determination processing and the like, an instruction for extracting (reading) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM is not required, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. Note that a pair register including two registers is also referred to as a register pair.

  Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “XQCH dd, dd ′”.

[Operation and Effect of Modification of Ninth Embodiment]
According to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game is executed. Is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The game control means includes a first register group (for example, register bank 0) and a second register group (for example, register bank 1) composed of a register group having the same configuration as the first register group. The arithmetic processing unit exchanges a value stored in the first register group with a value stored in the second register group, and issues an exchange instruction (for example, an “XQCH” instruction) for storing in each register group. It is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means extracts a random number (big hit random number) used for a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special game state in the variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and stores the extracted random number in a first register. With the group stored, the random number stored in the first register group is saved to the second register group by the exchange instruction. The arithmetic processing means restores the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction to the first register group before performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to generate a special game state based on the random number. Pre-determination is performed using the random numbers returned to the register group.

  Therefore, the value (for example, the jackpot random number) stored in the first register group (for example, the register bank 0) can be temporarily saved to the second register group (for example, the register bank 1) by the exchange instruction. . Then, by the exchange instruction, the saved value (for example, the big hit random number) can be returned (returned) to the first register group at a desired timing and used. Therefore, the value stored in the first register group can be saved without using the stack area of the RAM. Further, since the value can be saved in the second register group, an instruction to take out (read) this value from the RAM is not required, so that the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. In particular, an exchange instruction is applied to a random number that is an important value in game control, and the random number can be saved from the first register group to the second register group and protected. The random number saved at a desired timing such as immediately before performing the preliminary determination is restored to the first register group, and the preliminary determination is performed using the random number restored to the first register group. Therefore, the first register group can be freely used until a desired timing after being saved.

[Tenth embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136A. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments.

  FIG. 136A is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure suspension information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the tenth embodiment.

  The line number 3000 is a label (P_THOINF) corresponding to the special figure suspension information determination processing, and indicates an address (leading address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the special figure suspension information determination processing. The special figure hold information determination processing is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2916 (line number 2790 in FIG. 134) of the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128).

  Line numbers 3010 to 3050 correspond to A3001 of the special figure suspension information determination process.

  In the line number 3010, the address (the value corresponding to the label R_T2HORYU) corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 2 reserved number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T2HORYU”). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value “2800h” of the IY register, and only the lower address of the reserved number storage area need be specified as R_T2HORYU. Therefore, while the conventional code (machine language instruction) for loading a value into the DE register is 3 bytes, the code (machine language instruction) by the “LDY” instruction is 2 bytes.

  In the line number 3020, a value “R_T2RNDMEM” obtained by subtracting 7 (the number of reserved bytes of the special figure 2 reservation) from the start address (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM) of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 reservation (special figure 2 reservation storage area) -7 "is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for special figure 2 (code" LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-7 ").

  At line number 3030, the reserved byte number “7” for the special figure 2 reservation is loaded into the W register (code “LD W, 7”).

  In the line number 3040, the starting port winning flag stored in the area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is compared with the numerical value (the value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (code “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1”). )). The addition address is obtained by adding the value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG to the value (RAM start address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. When the starting opening winning flag indicates the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z), and when the starting opening winning flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set. (NZ).

  In the line number 3050, when the start opening winning flag indicates the special figure 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), the CPU jumps (conditionally branches) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF10 and executes the instruction after the line number 3140. (Code "JR NZ, THOINF10"). That is, if the winning opening 1 is not won, the process branches.

  Line numbers 3060 to 3100 correspond to A3002 of the special figure suspension information determination process.

  At line 3060, the address corresponding to the label R_T1HORYU corresponding to the reserved number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved number is loaded into the DE register (code “LDY DE, R_T1HORYU”).

  In the row number 3070, a value “R_T1RNDMEM” obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes of the special figure 1 reservation) from the start address (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 reservation storage area) -8 "is loaded into the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for special figure 1 (code" LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-8 ").

  At line number 3080, the value of the W register, which is currently 7, is updated by +1 (increased by 1), and the number of reserved bytes for the special figure 1 reserved is set to "8" (code "INC W").

  In the row number 3090, as in the row number 1540, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that it is during special figure time saving (in the normal power support state) (code “CHK ( IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN ”). If the comparison result matches during special figure time reduction, the operation result does not become zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match during special figure time reduction, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  In the line number 3100, when the special figure is being shortened, that is, when the comparison result matches (NZ), the process returns to the special figure starting port switch common processing (FIG. 128) (code "RET NZ").

  Line numbers 3110 to 3120 correspond to A3003 of the special figure suspension information determination process.

  At the line number 3110, the value stored at the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that a big hit or a small hit is being made (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in the RAM that stores the special figure game processing number (A2606) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number “3” of the fanfare / interval processing. If a big hit or a small hit is present and the value stored in the address "IY + R_TGAME" is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC). , The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  At line number 3120, if the big hit or the small hit is in progress and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the special drawing start port switch common process (FIG. 128) (code "RET NC").

  Line numbers 3140 to 3170 correspond to A10901 of the special figure suspension information determination processing.

  At line number 3140, the number of reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the number of reservations storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (DE ) ").

  In the row number 3150, the number of reserved bytes stored in the W register (7 or 8), the number of reserved bytes stored in the A register (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) (here, 1 to 4) And store the operation result (the number of reserved items × the number of reserved bytes) in the WA register (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is from 7 to 31, the operation result is substantially stored in the lower register A register.

  At line number 3160, the value of the WA register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code “PUSH WA”).

  At line number 3170, the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (reserved number × reserved byte number). The value of the HL register is a value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. The value of the A register is the number of reservations × the number of reserved bytes, and is a value based on the product of the number of reservations (the number of startup memories) and the number of bytes allocated for each reservation (for each startup storage).

  Note that a configuration is also possible in which the value of the HL register is set as the start address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is (number of reserved-1) × number of reserved bytes.

  Here, the total address value HL + A is the top address of the latest-generated latest pending random number storage area (leftmost in FIGS. 135A and 135B). The latest hit jackpot random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value. The lower byte of the latest hit jackpot random number is acquired by the A register and the upper byte is acquired (read) by the W register. .

  The line number 3180 corresponds to A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination processing, and calls a subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of the big hit determination processing (code “CALLR P_BHITJUD”). In the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is based on the latest hit jackpot random number.

  Line numbers 3190 to 3200 correspond to A3005 of the special figure suspension information determination process. At the line number 3190, the value of the WA register saved in the stack area at the line number 3160 is returned from the stack area to the WA register (code “POP WA”).

  In the line number 3200, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a big hit (if the carry flag is not set (in the case of NC)), the label is set to perform the process after the line number 3300 (the process after A3008 in FIG. 129). Jump (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to THOINF 30 (code “JR NC, THOINF 30”).

  Line numbers 3210 to 3240 correspond to A3006 of the special figure suspension information determination process. At the line number 3210, the address (head address) of the big hit symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for the special figure 1 is loaded into the DE register (code “LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL1”).

  The line number 3220 is the same code as the line number 3040, and compares the starting port winning flag stored in the area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG with the numerical value (the value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1. (Code "CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1").

  In the line number 3230, when the start opening winning flag indicates the special figure 1 and the zero flag is set (Z), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF20, and the instruction after the line number 3260 is executed. Execute (code "JR Z, THOINF20"). That is, if the winning opening 1 is won, the process branches.

  At the line number 3240, the address (head address) of the big hit symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for the special figure 2 is loaded into the DE register and overwritten (code “LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL2”).

  Line numbers 3260 to 3270 correspond to A10902 of the special figure suspension information determination process. At the line number 3260, 2 is added to the value of the A register (code “ADD A, 2”). In the A register, a value obtained by adding “2” to (number of reserved × number of reserved bytes) is stored.

  At the line number 3270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQDA, (HL + A)”). At present, the total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the head address of the random number storage area) and the value of the A register (the number of reserved bytes × the number of reserved bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value related to the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on a product of the number of reservations and the number of bytes allocated for each reservation. Here, the total address value is obtained by adding “2” to the start address of the most recently generated random number storage area of the latest hold. Then, in the area corresponding to the total address value, the most recently generated jackpot symbol random number of the latest hold is stored, but the latest jackpot symbol random number of the latest hold is acquired (read out) by the A register.

  Line numbers 3280 to 3290 correspond to A10903 of the special figure suspension information determination process.

  At the line number 3280, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value DE + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQDA, (DE + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the DE register (the top address of the big hit symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the big hit symbol random number). Since the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest pending stop symbol information is obtained (read) by the A register. In this way, the stop symbol information is obtained corresponding to the big hit symbol random numbers.

  At the line number 3290, a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

  As described above, a code generally described as “LQD qq (or r ′), (dd + r)” is used as a read instruction at an address specified based on the value of the dd register and the value of the r register (here, Then, the value (random number) of the area in the RAM (random number storage area) indicated by the total address dd + r) is stored in the pair register qq (or register r ′). Note that r and r 'are arbitrary registers, and r' may be different or the same as r. qq and dd are arbitrary pair registers, and qq may be different or the same as dd. The total address value dd + r is the sum of the value of the pair register dd (a reference address derived based on the start address of the random number storage area) and the value of the r register (a value derived based on the number of reserved bytes × the number of reserved bytes). Yes, you can specify the address (area) of a specific random number for each hold. Note that a pair register including two registers is also referred to as a register pair.

  Therefore, unlike the related art, it is not necessary to execute the code for directly calculating the address where the random number is stored every time when the specific random number of each hold is to be obtained, and the address can be efficiently specified and the specific address can be specified. Random numbers can be obtained efficiently, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) has a code “LQD qq (or r ′), (L ′) for acquiring the value stored in the RAM address specified from the value of the pair register dd and the register r. dd + r) "may be provided.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing of a game ball to a start winning prize area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (register) comprising a plurality of registers. Banks 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each including two registers. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) may extract a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition and store the extracted random number in the random number storage area of the update information storage unit (for example, the RAM 111c) as the right to execute the variable display game. it can. The arithmetic processing unit (for example, the CPU 111a) stores the value of one of the storage areas of the update information storage unit in one register or the address corresponding to the address specified based on the value stored in the predetermined register and the predetermined register pair. A read command to be stored in one register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means reads out the random number stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means according to the read command. The read command is, for example, “LQD WA, (HL + A)” or “LQD A, (HL + A)”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction.

  With such a read instruction, it is not necessary to execute an instruction for directly calculating an address at which this value is stored every time an attempt is made to obtain a value of any of the storage areas. And the value stored in the area can be efficiently acquired, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  For example, a value associated with the address of the random number storage area is stored in a predetermined register pair (for example, an HL register), and a predetermined register (for example, an A register) is assigned the number of start memories and assigned to each start memory. The value based on the product of the number of bytes is stored.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is not necessary to execute an instruction for directly calculating an address where a random number is stored every time an attempt is made to obtain a random number in any of the random number storage areas. And the random number stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

[Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
FIG. 136B is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure suspension information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the modification of the tenth embodiment. Note that codes having the same contents as those in FIG. 136A of the tenth embodiment are assigned the same line numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

  The modification of the tenth embodiment is a special figure suspension information determination processing executed in response to the execution of the special figure start port switch common processing (FIG. 134B) of the modification of the ninth embodiment. In the special processing of the special figure starting port switch of FIG. 134B, the big hit random number is temporarily saved in the WA 'register, and is restored to the original WA register when executing the special figure holding information determination processing (immediately before execution). . For this reason, in the special figure reservation information determination processing of FIG. 136B, processing of extracting a jackpot random number from the random number storage area of the RAM (processing of line numbers 3000 to 3030, processing of line numbers 3060 to 3080 of FIG. 136A) , And the processes from the line number 3130 to the line number 3170) become unnecessary.

  The row number 13010 and the row number 13020 are the same as the row number 3040 and the row number 3050 in FIG. 136A.

  In the line number 13010, the value of the B register as the starting opening winning flag (the value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is compared with the numerical value corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (the value indicating the special figure 1), and matches. (T), it is determined whether they do not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 13020, when the comparison result of the line number 13010 is inconsistent (F), that is, when the target starting port is the starting port 2 (when the starting port winning flag indicates the special drawing 2), the label THOINF10 is displayed. The instruction jumps to the corresponding address in the ROM (conditional branch) and executes the instruction of the line number 3180 and thereafter (code “JRSF, THOINF10”).

  At the line number 3180, the subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of the jackpot determination process is called, and the jackpot determination process is performed using the jackpot random number in the WA register. As described above, it is not necessary to take out (read) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM at the time of the big hit determination processing.

  Line numbers 13030 to 13060 correspond to line numbers 3210 to 3240, respectively.

  At line number 13030, the relative address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H”).

  In the line number 13040, the value of the B register is compared with the numerical value (the value indicating the special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 as the start opening winning flag (the value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2), similarly to the line number 13010. Then, it is determined whether they match (T) or not (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the line number 13050, when the comparison result of the line number 13040 is a match (T), that is, when the target starting port is the starting port 1 (when the starting port winning flag indicates the special drawing 1), the label THOINF20 is displayed. The instruction jumps to the corresponding address in the ROM (conditional branch) and executes the instruction of the line number 13070 and thereafter (code “JRST, THOINF20”).

  At line number 13060, the relative address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for special figure 2 is loaded into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H”).

  In the row number 13070, the jackpot symbol random number stored in the E register at the row number 12020 in FIG. 134B is stored in the A register (LD A, E). Therefore, it is not necessary to take out (read) the jackpot symbol random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special figure reservation information determination process.

  In the line number 13080, as in the case of the line number 3280 in FIG. 136A, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number. At line number 13080, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQDA, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the HL register (the top address of the jackpot symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Since the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest pending stop symbol information is acquired in the A register.

[Operation and Effect of Modification of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the jackpot determination process of the special figure reservation information determination process is executed using the jackpot random number saved by the code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′”. As described above, it is not necessary to take out the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM at the time of the big hit determination processing, and the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments.

  FIG. 137 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the change start information setting process (FIG. 40) according to the eleventh embodiment.

  The line number 3500 is a label (P_TSTASET) corresponding to the change start information setting process, and indicates an address (leading address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the change start information setting process.

  Line numbers 3510 to 3580 correspond to A4601 of the change start information setting process. At the line number 3510, the value of the variable symbol discrimination flag area (variable symbol discrimination flag) at the address “IY + R_TZINF” is compared with the value corresponding to the label C_TZ1HEN (the value indicating the special figure 1) (code “CP (IY + R_TZINF), C_TZ1HEN "). The label R_TZINF indicates the offset address of the variable symbol determination flag area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. If the variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z). If the variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set. (NZ).

  In the line number 3520, if the variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match (NZ), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET10, and the instruction after the line number 3570 is executed. Execute (code "JR NZ, TSTASET10").

  In the row number 3530, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 4 to the head address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 reservation storage area), The area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (for example, the area of addresses 2834h and 2835h in FIG. 135A) that is digested out of the random number storage area is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 4)”).

  In the row number 3540, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 6 to the start address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1RNDMEM, for example, 2830h) of the random number storage area of special figure 1 reservation (special figure 1 reservation storage area), The area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the hold 1 which is digested out of the random number storage area (for example, the area of addresses 2836h and 2837h in FIG. 135A) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1RNDMEM + 6)”).

  In the special figure 1 hold storage area, the big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number of the hold 1 to be digested have already been cleared (A3604, A4022, A4023). By clearing the random number storage area of No. 3, the random number storage area can be shifted (pending shift) (A4613).

  At the line number 3550, a jump is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET20 (code "JR TSTASET20").

  In the line number 3570, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 3 to the head address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 reservation storage area), The area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (for example, 2853h and 2854h in FIG. 135B) to be digested in the random number storage area is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 3)”).

  In the line number 3580, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 5 to the head address (a numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2RNDMEM, for example, 2850h) of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 reservation storage area), The area of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (for example, 2855h and 2856h in FIG. 135B) that is digested out of the random number storage area is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2RNDMEM + 5)”).

  Since the jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers of the reserved 1 to be digested in the special figure 2 reserved storage area have already been cleared (A3703, A4116), the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the reserved 1 are further cleared. By doing so, the random number storage area can be shifted (pending shift) (A4613).

  The line number 3600 corresponds to A4602 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and loads the head address “D_TZENTIM-5000H” of the first half fluctuation time value table represented by a relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TZENTIM-5000H”). )).

  Line numbers 3610 to 3650 correspond to A4603 of the change start information setting process. In the row number 3610, the first half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the B register from the first half variation number area (A4316) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TZENNUM (code “LQDB, (IY + R_TZENNUM)”). The label R_TZENNUM is an offset address of the first-half variation number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  At the line number 3620, the value of the B register is updated by -1 (subtracted by 1) (code "DEC B"). The value of the B register becomes, for example, a value from 0 to 9, and can be used for preparing a change command (MODE).

  At the line number 3630, the value of the B register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the top address of the first half fluctuation time value table) (code “ADD HL, B”).

  At line number 3640, the value of the B register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is further added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, B”).

  According to the instructions of the row numbers 3630 and 3640, a value twice as large as the value of the B register (for example, an even number from 0 to 18) is added to the first address of the first half variation time value table in which the first half variation time values are arranged. Is done. This is because the first half fluctuation time value is 2 bytes, so that it is necessary to add an even value. After the execution of the instruction at the line number 3640, the value stored in the address area (2 bytes in the ROM) stored in the HL register is the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number.

  At line number 3650, the first half change time value corresponding to the first half change number is loaded (acquired) into the WA register from the address area currently stored in the HL register (code “LD WA, (HL)”).

  The line number 3660 corresponds to A4604 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and loads the head address “D_TKOUTIM-5000H” of the latter half fluctuation time value table represented by a relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H”). )).

  Line numbers 3670 to 3720 correspond to A4605 and A4606 of the change start information setting process. At line number 3670, the second half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the C register from the second half variation number area (A4310) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TKONUM (code “LQDC, (IY + R_TKONUM))”. The label R_TKONUM is an offset address of the second half variation number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  At the line number 3680, the value of the C register is updated by −1 (subtract by 1) (code “DEC C”). The value of the C register is, for example, a value from 0 to 9.

  At the line number 3690, the value of the C register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the top address of the second half fluctuation time value table) (code “ADD HL, C”).

  At the line number 3700, the value of the C register (for example, a value from 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (code “ADD HL, C”).

  According to the instructions of the row numbers 3690 and 3700, a value twice as large as the value of the C register (for example, an even number from 0 to 18) is added to the first address of the second half fluctuation time value table in which the second half fluctuation time values are arranged. Is done. This is because it is necessary to add an even value because the second half fluctuation time value is 2 bytes. After the execution of the instruction of the line number 3640, the value stored in the address area (2 bytes in the ROM) stored in the HL register is the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number.

  At line number 3710, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (addition of 1), and can be used to prepare a variation command (ACTION) (code “INC C”).

  At the row number 3720, the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number acquired from the address area currently stored in the HL register is added to the WA register (code “ADD WA, (HL)”). The WA register stores the entire fluctuation time value (first half fluctuation time value + second half fluctuation time value).

  The line number 3730 corresponds to A4607 of the fluctuation start information setting process, and the value of the WA register (addition value (total fluctuation time value) by the instruction of the line number 3720) is changed from the special figure game processing timer area (addition address = IY + R_TGAME + 1) (A code “LQD (IY + R_TGAME + 1), WA”). Here, R_TGAME + 1 is an offset address of the special figure game processing timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The special figure game processing timer area is a 2-byte area of an address IY + R_TGAME + 1 and an address IY + R_TGAME + 2.

  At the line number 3740, the value corresponding to the label C_THMD_C0 is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THMD_C0”).

  The line number 3750 corresponds to A4610 of the change start information setting process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  As described above, a code generally described as “CQLRW (R_THIT_MEM)” is used as a clear instruction to store an area of an address value R_THIT_MEM as a part of a random number storage area in a register of FIG. ) Is cleared without storing (at least without using general-purpose registers). The registers in FIG. 121A include general-purpose registers (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, and IY register) outside the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. Special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register). Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be reliably cleared. Conventionally, the random number storage area is cleared by executing an instruction to store clear data (for example, a zero value) in a register or an instruction to store the stored clear data in a random number storage area. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

[Operation and Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing of a game ball to a start winning area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (for example, a plurality of general-purpose registers). Register bank 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) can extract a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and store the random number in the random number storage area of the update information storage unit as the right to execute the variable display game. The arithmetic processing unit (for example, the CPU 111a) is configured to be able to execute a clear instruction (for example, a “CQLRW” instruction) for clearing a part of the storage area of the update information storage unit without using a general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means clears the random number storage area of the update information storage means by a clear command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include a clear instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no need to execute an instruction to store clear data (for example, a zero value) in a general-purpose register or an instruction to store stored clear data in a random number storage area. Even if it occurs, the random numbers stored in a part of the random number storage area can be reliably cleared. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a game control program, and has storage means (for example, ROM 111b) having a data area for storing data for the game control program, An arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing according to the game control program, and a register (DP register) for storing a head address of a data area in an address space of the arithmetic processing unit are provided. The data area includes at least a fluctuating time value table including fluctuating time values relating to the fluctuating display game. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be capable of executing an instruction (for example, “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H”) for specifying an area in the data area by a relative address based on the start address stored in the register (DP register). Is done. The arithmetic processing means specifies the address of the fluctuating time value table by this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the data is not represented by the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space, but by the relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the data area stored in the register. The address of the fluctuation time value table in the area can be specified. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, the fluctuation time value table includes two tables, a first half fluctuation time value table and a second half fluctuation time value table, which are often referred to, so that there is much benefit in reducing the code amount.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments.

  FIG. 138 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 62) according to the twelfth embodiment.

  The line number 4010 is a label (P_GATESW) corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process, and indicates an address (leading address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process.

  The row numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to A7701 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the row number 4020, the rising information of the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2, the logical product is obtained with the switch bit data (judgment value) corresponding to the label C_GATE, and the switch is turned on. Is determined (code “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”). Here, the switch control area is a storage area in which the detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine are stored for each timer interrupt. The rising information (see FIG. 133B) is information indicating that the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) has changed from off to on. In the area of the address R_SWCTL + 2, rising information in a switch control area in which information on a target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is stored.

  When the game ball does not pass through the normal starting gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the gate switch 34a is zero, the operation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag is set. (ZF) is set. When the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, when the switch bit is turned on at “0000100100B”), the operation result (logical product) becomes a value other than zero (eg, “0000100100B”). , Zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  In the line number 4030, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the ordinary game process (FIG. 61) (code "RET Z"). ). That is, when the game ball does not pass through the general-purpose starting gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the process returns to the general-purpose game process (FIG. 61).

  Line numbers 4040 to 4070 correspond to A7702 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the line number 4040, as in the line number 1540 and the line number 3090, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that it is during special figure time reduction (during the regular telephone support state) ( Code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEGLG), C_JTN”). If the comparison result matches during special figure time reduction, the operation result does not become zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the comparison result does not match during special figure time reduction, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  In the row number 4050, when the special figure time is being reduced, that is, when the comparison result matches (NZ), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10, and the instruction after the row number 4110 is executed. (Code "JR NZ, GATESW10").

  In the row number 4060, as in the row number 3110, the value stored at the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that a big hit or a small hit is being made (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). ). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in the RAM (special figure game processing number area) that stores the special figure game processing number (A2606) based on the value of the IY register “2800h”. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number “3” of the fanfare / interval processing. If a big hit or a small hit is present and the value stored in the address "IY + R_TGAME" is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC). , The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  In line number 4070, when the big hit or the small hit is in progress and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the CPU jumps (conditionally branches) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10, and Execute the instruction (code "JR NC, GATESW10").

  The row number 4080 corresponds to A7703 of the gate switch monitoring process, and loads a left-handed instruction notification command (a numerical value corresponding to the label C_LEFTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_LEFTCOM”).

  The line number 4090 corresponds to A7704 of the gate switch monitoring process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  Line numbers 4110 to 4130 correspond to A7705 of the gate switch monitoring process. At line number 4110, the value (normal figure pending number) stored in the ordinary figure pending number storage area (in RAM) at the addition address IY + R_FHORYU is loaded into the A register (code “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the ordinary figure reserved number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  At line number 4120, the number of ordinary drawings reserved in the A register is compared with the upper limit value (here, 4), and a carry flag (CF) is set when the number is smaller than the upper limit value. ) Is not set (code “CP A, 4”).

  At line number 4130, if the carry-on number reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the usual-game process (FIG. 61) (code "RET NC").

  The row number 4140 corresponds to A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process, and updates the ordinary figure reserved number which is the value of the ordinary figure reserved number area of the RAM address IY + R_FHORYU by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The RAM address IY + R_FHORYU is an addition address obtained by adding the value “2800h” stored in the IY register and the value corresponding to the label R_FHORYU. In this case, the 1-byte value (the number of reserved ordinary figures) stored in the reserved number of ordinary figures area at the address IY + R_FHORY can be directly updated by +1 without being stored in the register (at least the general-purpose register) of FIG. 121A.

  Line numbers 4150 to 4170 correspond to A7707 of the gate switch monitoring process. At line number 4150, the head address (numerical value corresponding to the label R_FRNDMEM) of the random number storage area (general-purpose reserved storage area) reserved for ordinary figure is loaded into the HL register (code “LDYHL, R_FRNDMEM”).

  In line number 4160, the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register in order to double the value of the A register (the number of ordinary drawings reserved before +1 is updated and is 0 to 3) (code “ADD A, A "). As a result, the value of the A register changes from 0 to 6.

  At the line number 4170, the value of the A register (the value from 0 to 6) is added to the value of the HL register (the head address of the general-purpose reserved storage area) (code “ADD HL, A”). At this point, the value of the HL register is the address of the random number storage area for the latest occurrence of the latest ordinary figure reservation.

  Line numbers 4180 to 4190 correspond to A7708 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the row number 4180, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a winning random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  At line number 4190, after loading (storing) the value of the A register as a hit random number into the address area currently stored in the HL register (the latest ordinary figure pending hit random number storage area), the address in the HL register is read. Is updated to the next address (code "LQD (HL +), A"). Since the hit random number is one byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also one byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  At the row number 4200, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a winning symbol random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND3_L)”).

  In the line number 4210, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) as a winning symbol random number into the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (the latest winning symbol pending winning symbol random number storing area) (code “LD ( HL), A "). Here, since there is no random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated.

  At the line number 4220, the process returns to the general-purpose game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as “CHK (R_SWCB), n” takes the logical product of the determination value n and the value (rise information) of the switch control area to detect the switch state (the switch bit value). ON / OFF). Note that R_SWCB is an address of rising information of the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of the rising information is turned on. This “CHK” instruction can determine whether or not a switch has been turned on without executing an instruction to acquire a value stored and stored in a switch control area into a register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is performed without the intervention of the register, the determination can be reliably performed even if a failure occurs in the register. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the code “CHK (R_SWCB), n”.

[Operation and Effect of Twelfth Embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detection state of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port 2 switch 37a). Game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to a player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (for example, a plurality of general-purpose registers). Register bank 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to a predetermined address and capable of storing a switch detection state. The arithmetic processing unit is configured to store the state of the value stored in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and a predetermined determination value without storing the value of any storage area of the update information storage unit in the general-purpose register. A command that can be determined (for example, “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”) is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch according to the instruction. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the detection state of the switch can be determined without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area into the general-purpose register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is performed without going through the general-purpose register, even if a failure occurs in the general-purpose register, the determination can be reliably performed, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
A thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. The thirteenth embodiment is an embodiment relating to the program structure of various editing processes.

  FIG. 139A is a program list showing a partial program structure of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72) according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 139B is a program list showing a conventional program structure of the LED editing process.

  A line number 4500 in FIG. 139A is a label (P_SEGEDIT) corresponding to the segment LED editing process, and indicates a ROM address of a program module corresponding to the segment LED editing process.

  The row number 4510 corresponds to step A9201 of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72), and updates the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)”). The label R_DSPTIM is an offset address of the blink control timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the value of 1 byte (the number of reserved ordinary drawings) stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM can be directly updated by +1 without being stored in the register (at least the general-purpose register) of FIG. 121A.

  Line number 4520 and line number 4530 correspond to A9202 of the segment LED editing process. In the row number 4520, a comparison is made as to whether or not the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM matches the output ON timing 20h as the flashing control timer area (code “CHK (IY + R_DSPTIM), 20H”). That is, a logical AND with 20h indicating the output ON timing is taken to determine whether a predetermined bit (bit 5 with bit 0 as the least significant bit in this case) of the blinking control timer area is 0 or 1. The output on timing 20h (00100000B) is 32 in decimal and corresponds to 128 ms (= interruption cycle (4 ms) × 32). Since the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM is updated by +1 every 4 ms, the bit 5 repeats an alternating change of 0 and 1 every 128 ms, and it is possible to know a desired timing by performing the comparison judgment. it can. If the comparisons match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In the row number 4530, when the blink control timer matches the output ON timing, that is, when the comparison result of the row number 4520 is a match (T), a jump (conditional branch) is made to the ROM address corresponding to the label EDIT10. , Execute the instruction at line number 4570 and thereafter (code “JRST, EDIT10”).

  Line number 4540 and line number 4550 correspond to A9204 of the segment LED editing process. At line number 4540, the leading address (numerical value corresponding to the label D_FHOLED2) of the ordinary figure pending number display table 2 is set to a relative address (D_FHOLED2-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H”). ). As a result, the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set. The relative address is an address based on the start address “5000h” of the data area (in the ROM) for the user program.

  This “LQDD” instruction uses a relative address (substantially 1 byte) instead of an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as an operand, so the number of bytes of the machine language instruction is smaller than that of a normal LD instruction. Decrease by one byte (eg, decrease from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). Note that the relative address (for example, 000h to BFFh) is originally 2 bytes, but if the mnemonic (the machine language instruction section) is changed in accordance with the value of the upper byte (for example, 0 to B) of the relative address, it is substantially The relative address can be indicated by the lower byte (1 byte).

  At the line number 4550, a jump (branch) is made to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label EDIT20 (code "JR EDIT20").

  The line number 4570 corresponds to A9203 of the segment LED editing process, and loads the leading address (numerical value corresponding to the label D_FHOLED1) of the ordinary figure reserved number display table 1 into the HL register with the relative address (D_FHOLED1-5000H). (Code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED1-5000H"). As a result, the ordinary figure reservation number display table 1 is set.

  Line numbers 4590 to 4630 correspond to A9205 of the segment LED editing process. At line number 4590, as in line number 4110, the value (number of ordinary figure reservations) stored in the ordinary figure reservation number storage area (in RAM) of addition address IY + R_FHORYU is loaded into the A register (code “LQD A, ( IY + R_FHORYU) "). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the ordinary figure reserved number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The addition address IY + R_FHORYU is obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_FHORYU to the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  The offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte (corresponding to the lower address of the two-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)” of the row number 4590 can be a two-byte instruction. . Thereby, the program capacity can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes and the instruction of the row number 4590 is an instruction of 3 bytes.

  In the line number 4610, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register as the display data corresponding to the number of ordinary drawing reservations (code “LQDA, (HL + A)”). ). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the leading address of the table for displaying the number of reserved ordinary figures) and the value of the A register (the number of reserved figures for the ordinary figure). At the line number 4610, display data is acquired from the general-use reserved number display table corresponding to the general-use reserved number.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139C, display data corresponding to the number of ordinary drawing reservations will be described. FIG. 139C (I) shows a lighting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking) of the lamps D15 and D16 of the general-purpose display indicator 56. FIG. 139C (II) shows the ordinary figure reserved number display tables 1 and 2. Display data (1 byte) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 4 of the ordinary figure are arranged and stored in the ordinary figure reserved number display tables 1 and 2 for each byte sequentially from the head address. Therefore, display data corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reservations is stored in the total address which is the sum of the head address of the ordinary figure reservation number display table and the number of ordinary figure reservations.

  If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both the tables 1 and 2 for displaying the number of ordinary drawings, so that the ordinary display indicator 56 does not blink. Since the display data of the figure reservation number display table 1 and the display data of the general figure reservation number display table 2 are different, the general figure reservation display 56 blinks. Assuming that bit 0 is the least significant bit, in this embodiment, when lighting lamp D15, bit 5 of the display data is set to ON “1”, and when lighting lamp D16, bit 4 of the display data is ON. Set to “1”. For example, when the number of ordinary drawing reservations is 2, the display data is “00110000B”, bits 4 and 5 are on “1”, and the lamps D15 and D16 of the ordinary drawing reservation display 56 are turned on. In the case where the ordinary figure hold display 56 flashes with the number of holds being 3 to 4, the lamp D15 (or the lamp D16) lights up while the bit 5 (or the bit 4) of the flashing control timer area becomes 1 at the output ON timing. , 0, the lamp D15 (or the lamp D16) is turned off.

  At the row number 4620, the logical value of “11001111B” and the value of the addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 as the segment area (1 byte) of the ordinary figure reservation display 56 is obtained, and the bits 4 and 5 of the data in the segment area are cleared to zero. (Code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3), 11001111B”).

  At line number 4630, the value of the A register is saved (set) in the segment area (the area of the addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) of the general-purpose reservation indicator 56 as display data corresponding to the general-purpose reservation number (code “OR (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3)”). , A ").

  In the program module having the conventional structure of FIG. 139B, two codes “LDHL, R_DSPTIM” and “IQNC (HL)” of the line number 5010 and the line number 5020 are replaced with the code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)” of the line number 4510 in FIG. 139A. Corresponding. Note that “IQNC (HL)” is not a conventional instruction. While the code at line number 4510 in FIG. 139A is 2 bytes “AA77” in machine language, these 2 instructions require a total of 4 bytes, increasing the program capacity. Particularly, in the row number 5010, the R_DSPTIM is used not as an offset address (1 byte “77h”) but as an absolute address (2 bytes “2877h”), which causes an increase in program capacity. As shown in FIG. 139B, in the machine language stored in the ROM, the head of the 2-byte address is the lower byte, and the next is the upper byte.

  In the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD A, (R_FHORYU)” of the row number 6000 corresponds to the code “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)” of the row number 4590 in FIG. 139A. In line number 6000, R_FHORYU is used not as an offset address (1 byte “61h”) but as an absolute address (2 bytes “2861h”), so the number of bytes of the code is increased by 1 byte from line number 4590. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  In the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LDHL, D_FHOLED2” of the line number 5050 and the code “LDHL, D_FHOLED1” of the line number 5080 are respectively replaced with the code “LQDD” of the line number 4540 in FIG. HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H "and the code" LQDD HL, D_FHOLED1-5000H "in line number 4570. In the codes of the line numbers 5050 and 5080, the address is specified not by the relative address (difference from the reference address "5000h", for example, "3F" and "37") but by the absolute address (for example, "503F" and "5037"). , The number of bytes in the code has increased by one byte (from two bytes to three bytes). Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  Further, in the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), since the code “LQDA, (HL + A)” of the line number 4610 in FIG. 139A is not present, the number of programs increases from the line number 6000 to 6070.

  Further, in the program module having the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the two codes “LD A, (R_SEGDAT + 3)” and “AND 11001111B” of the line number 6040 and the line number 6050 are replaced with the code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3)” of the line number 4620 in FIG. ), 11001111B ". Since two codes are used in the line number 6040 and the line number 6050, the number of bytes of the code is increased by one byte from the line number 4620.

  FIG. 140 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the external information editing process (FIG. 75) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  The line number 5500 is a label (P_INFEDIT) corresponding to the external information editing process, and indicates an address (head address) in the ROM of the program module corresponding to the external information editing process.

  Line numbers 5510 to 5530 correspond to A9501 to A9502 of the external information editing process. At line number 5510, the value stored in the glass frame opening error area (in the RAM) at the addition address IY + R_GLASS is loaded into the A register (code “LQDA, (IY + R_GLASS)”). The label R_GLASS is an offset address of the glass frame opening error area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. As for the value of the glass frame opening error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to “1” while a glass frame opening error is occurring.

  At line number 5520, the logical sum of the value stored in the body frame opening error area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_WAKU and the value of the A register is calculated (code “OR A, (IY + R_WAKU)”). The label R_WAKU is an offset address of the body frame opening error area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. As for the value of the body frame opening error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to “1” while the body frame opening error is occurring.

  In the row number 5530, when the glass frame release error or the body frame release error occurs and the logical sum is not zero (F), the CPU jumps (conditionally branches) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT10 and executes the row number 5570 and thereafter. (Code "JRS F, INFEDIT10").

  The line number 5540 corresponds to A9503 and A9504 of the external information editing process. In the row number 5540, the logical value of the value of the area of the address R_INFDAT2 as the external information output data area (1 byte) and the value for clearing (clear data) "11001111B" is obtained, and the door / frame open signal and the security signal are obtained. The off data is saved in the external information output data area (code “AQND (R_INFDAT2), 1100111B”). The external information output data area is an abnormality control area that indicates a detection state of various abnormalities (on / off of an abnormal signal) for each bit. Bit 4 of the external information output data area (abnormal control area) is a bit for setting an abnormal state (ON) of the door / frame opening signal, and bit 5 is a bit for setting an abnormal state (ON) of the security signal. , Where it is cleared to zero.

  At the line number 5550, the CPU jumps (conditionally branches) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT20, and executes the instruction of the line number 5600 and thereafter (code "JR INFEDIT20").

  The line number 5570 corresponds to A9505 of the external information editing process. In the row number 5570, the logical sum of the value of the external information output data area (area of the address R_INFDAT2) and the ON data “00010000B” of the door / frame opening signal is calculated, and the result is stored in the external information output data area (abnormal control area). Save (set ON) the door / frame open signal ON data (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00010000B”).

  The line number 5580 corresponds to A9506 of the external information editing process. In the row number 5580, the logical sum of the value of the test signal output data area (area of the address R_SKNDAT) and the ON data “01000000B” of the gaming machine error state signal is calculated and stored in the test signal output data area (abnormal control area). The ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved (set to ON) (code "OQR (R_SKNDAT), 01000000B").

  The line number 5600 corresponds to A9507 of the external information editing process. In the row number 5600, if the value (security signal control timer) of the security signal control timer area of the addition address IY + R_SECTIM is 0, the value is updated by −1, and if 0, the value is maintained at 0 (code “DQCP (IY + R_SECUTIM), 0”). ). Label R_SECUTIM is an offset address of the security signal control timer area. This “DQCP” instruction decreases the value stored in the security signal control timer area without obtaining it by the gilesta.

  The line number 5610 corresponds to A9508 of the external information editing process. In the row number 5610, when the operation result of the row number 5600 is zero (Z), that is, when the security signal control timer is 0, the CPU jumps (conditionally branches) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT30 and executes the row number 5640. The following instructions are executed (code "JRZ, INFEDIT30").

  The line number 5620 corresponds to A9509 of the external information editing process. The security data ON data “00100000B” is saved (set to ON) in the external information output data area (abnormal control area) of the address R_INFDAT2 (code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00100000B”).

  As described above, a code generally described as “AQND (R_ERR),... 0... B” is a value stored in the abnormality control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. AND of the clearing value (clear data) “... 0... B” to clear a predetermined bit in the abnormal control area. Each bit in the abnormality control area indicates that a predetermined abnormality (error signal) has occurred. Therefore, the bit indicating that the abnormality has occurred can be cleared without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area into the register. Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control area can be reliably cleared. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  As described above, the code generally described as “OQR (R_ERR),... 1... B” is stored in the abnormality control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. ... And a set value (setting data) “... 1... B”, and a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area is turned on. Therefore, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred can be set ON without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area into the register. Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, a bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the abnormality control area can be reliably turned on. Further, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Note that the code “AQND (R_ERR),... 0... B” or the code “OQR (R_ERR),. May be provided.

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing of a game ball to the start winning prize area or the gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (for example, a plurality of general-purpose registers). Register bank 0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The update information storage means includes an abnormality control area provided corresponding to a predetermined address and indicating a detection state of abnormality of the gaming machine in units of bits. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, an “OQR” instruction) for setting a predetermined bit in any storage area of the update information storage means without using a general-purpose register. When an abnormality of the gaming machine is detected, the arithmetic processing means sets a predetermined bit of an abnormality control area of the update information storage means according to the instruction. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even if a failure occurs in the general-purpose register, it is possible to reliably set the bit in the abnormality control area indicating that the abnormality has occurred. Since the instruction for storing the value of the abnormality control area in the register is unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) which stores a game control program and has a data area for storing data for the game control program. . The game control device 100 includes a register (DP register) for storing a head address of a data area in an address space of the arithmetic processing unit. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) includes an instruction (for example, an instruction that specifies an area in the data area by a relative address based on the start address stored in the register (DP register)). "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H").

  Therefore, an instruction for designating an area in a data area is not an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space but a relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the data area stored in the register. Can be used. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a head address designation register (IY register) for storing the head address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) is an instruction that specifies an area in the update information storage means by an offset address based on the start address stored in the start address specification register ( For example, “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)”).

  Therefore, instead of the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space, the area in the update information storage means is not determined by the offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage means stored in the register. Can be used. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, the storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100) increases the number of start memories, which are the execution right of the variable display game, up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, by the reserved number area of the update information storage means. Can be stored. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) designates one of the storage areas of the update information storage means by using an offset address based on the head address stored in the head address specification register, and stores the value of the storage area in a predetermined general-purpose. An instruction (for example, “LQDA, (IY + R_FHORYU)”) to be read into the register is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) reads out the number of start memories stored in the reserved number area by this command.

  Therefore, instead of the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space, the offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage means stored in the register is used to hold in the update information storage means. You can use instructions to specify several areas. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the reserved number area is often referred to in various processes of the game control program, there is much benefit in reducing the code amount.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
In the conventional gaming machines, a plurality of instructions are combined to cause the CPU to execute the contents of the conditional branch and the execution at the branch destination. In the present embodiment, however, one instruction is used to execute the conditional branch and the execution of the execution at the branch destination. And causes the CPU to execute it. As a result, even if the control content is the same as that of the related art, the code amount of the program can be made smaller than that of the related art, and the capacity for storing the program code in the ROM that stores the program can be made compact. . Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to thirteenth embodiments. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a program code (program list).

  FIG. 141 is a program list for explaining a part of the program structure according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code of the random number update process 2 using an instruction unique to the present embodiment will be described, and three instructions (mnemonics) of “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” which are the gist of the present embodiment will be described. Is mainly described. The random number update processing 2 is labeled “P_RNDINC2” and is called in step A10402 of the main processing (FIG. 124A) and step A1307 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125).

  The code “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)” in the line number 6010 corresponds to A10601 of the random number update process 2 (FIG. 126). This code is a content (instruction) of adding a value of +1 to the value of the variation pattern random number 1 (R_RNDHEN1), which is a 2-byte random number, with 2 bytes by an instruction (mnemonic) called “IQNCW”. Here, R_RNDHEN1 is a label indicating the head address of the random number area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is stored (stored), and R_RNDHEN2 that appears below stores (stores) the fluctuation pattern random number 2 R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is stored (stored). The random number area is also called a random number counter area because random numbers are added or subtracted in the random number area. In this specification, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in a storage area of a RAM 111c, which is an update information storage unit that stores information updated by arithmetic processing units (CPU 111a and CPU core 102). The information may be stored in another information storage means (excluding the register).

  That is, the instruction “IQNCW” converts the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area to the value stored in the address destination area without using the register (at least the general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A. This is an instruction to directly add +1 without temporarily taking in the register of FIG. 121A). The storage area corresponding to the address (address) is referred to as an address destination area or an address destination. For this reason, the use of the instruction “IQNCW” eliminates the need to write three codes, ie, loading into a register, addition processing in a register, and loading into an address destination, making the program more compact than a conventional program. Become. Also, directly adding the value stored in the address destination by “IQNCW” does not use a register, and therefore, it is necessary to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing between the loading of the register and the loading of the address destination, There is no need to save to the stack or switch banks when enabling interrupts. Note that the registers in FIG. 121A are general-purpose registers (W registers, A registers, B registers, C registers, D registers, E registers, H registers, L registers IX registers, and IY registers) external to the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. And special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register).

  As described later, as an instruction similar to “IQNCW”, there is an instruction “DQECW” for decrementing a predetermined 2-byte area, and “DQECW” does not use the register (at least a general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A. Is a command for directly subtracting -1 from the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area. As an instruction similar to "IQNCW" which is an addition instruction for a 2-byte area at an address destination, there is the above-mentioned instruction "IQNC" which is an addition instruction for a 1-byte area at an address destination, and as an instruction similar to "DQECW". There is an instruction "DQEC" which is a subtraction instruction for the one-byte area at the address.

  The code “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240” in the line number 6030 corresponds to A10602 in FIG. When the value of R_RDHEN2 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 stored at the address) is smaller than 240, the code “IQCP” updates the value of R_RDHEN2 by +1 (increment processing). Is not smaller than 240, 0 is substituted into R_RNDHEN2 to initialize the variation pattern random number 2. That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 circulates in the range of 0 to 240 with 240 as the upper limit, and returns to 0 after reaching 240.

  To explain the instruction “IQCP” again, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as the target value (the value stored at the address), and the value after the comma is defined as the judgment value (240 here). It is determined whether the value stored at the address is smaller than the determination value. If the value is smaller, the value stored at the target address is incremented. If not, 0 is set as the initial value. Is an instruction for initializing by substituting into a value stored at an address.

  Conventionally, in order to execute the instruction, a code (“JP”, “JR”, etc.) for performing conditional branching by dividing the condition into a case where R_RDHEN2 is smaller than 240 and a case where R_RDHEN2 is not smaller than 240 is described. It had been. Further, a code for incrementing R_RDHEN2 when R_RDHEN2 is smaller than 240 is described as a branch destination instruction of the condition, and a code for substituting 0 into R_RDHEN2 when R_RDHEN2 is not smaller than 240 is described. Was. That is, conventionally, at least three codes (instructions) are described, but in the present embodiment, since one code is used, the program capacity is reduced. For example, although the machine language instruction of the code “IQCP (vw), n” (vw is the direct value of the address) when directly specifying the address is 5 bytes, the address is set to an arbitrary register qq (= WA, BC , DE, HL, IX, IY), the machine instruction of the code “IQCP (qq), n” when the address is indirectly specified is 3 bytes (however, the instruction to load the address into the pair register qq) Is required).

  The code “DQCP (R_RDHEN3), 238” in the line number 6050 corresponds to A10603 in FIG. When the value of R_RDHEN3 (the value of the variation pattern random number 3 stored at the address) is 0, the code “DQCP” substitutes 238 into R_RDHEN3 to initialize R_RDHEN3, In this case (that is, a case other than 0), the content of R_RDHEN3 is subtracted by one and updated (decrement processing). That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 circulates in the range of 238 to 0 with 238 as an upper limit, and returns to 238 after reaching 0 as a result of the decrement (the initial value 238 is set). As described above, in the instruction “DQCP”, the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined to be 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value specified by the operand is stored in the predetermined area.

  To explain the instruction “DQCP” again, the value before the comma is the target value (the value stored at the address), and the value after the comma becomes the initial value (here, 238), and is stored in the target address. It is determined whether the set value is 0 or not. If the value is not 0, the value stored in the target address is decremented. If the value is 0, the initial value is stored in the target address. This is an instruction to initialize by substituting the value into

  Similarly to the “IQCP” instruction, the “DQCP” instruction can be described by one code, instead of the content conventionally described by at least three codes. Since “DQCP” and “IQCP” are similar to “IQNCW”, they cause the CPU core 102 to execute the instruction contents (to the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) without using the registers 1220A and 1220B. Either it is not necessary to set interrupt prohibition, or the PUSH and POP instructions for register values become unnecessary, or bank switching becomes unnecessary. Note that the CPU core 102 (in the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the “DQCP”, “IQCP”, and “IQNCW” instructions.

  Here, the code for the update of the random number has been described for the three instructions “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” which are the gist of the present embodiment, but “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” May be used to update the timer or the counter, respectively.

  Further, “IQNCW” may add the address value itself, and “IQCP” and “DQCP” respectively determine the address value itself and initialize the address value according to the result of the determination / It can be added (increased) or subtracted (decreased).

  The program code of the random number update process 2 described above is an example for realizing the control content in the random number update process 2, and the variable pattern random number 1 updates the random value by incrementing, and the variable pattern random number 2 is incremented. The random number value is updated by updating the random number value, and the variation pattern random number 3 is updated by decrementing. In updating each random number value, it is possible to arbitrarily combine whether to use an instruction for incrementing or an instruction for decrementing. .

  FIG. 142 is a program list for explaining a part of the special figure game process according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, the program code of the special figure game process using an instruction unique to the present embodiment will be described, and one instruction (mnemonic) called “DQECW”, which is the gist of the present embodiment, will be mainly described. . The special figure game process corresponds to the label “P_TGAMEPRC” and is called in step A1309 of the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 8 and 125).

  The code of the line number 6510 corresponds to A2601 in the special figure game process (FIG. 21). This code is a content for calling a subroutine (start-up switch monitoring processing) corresponding to the label “P_SIDOSW”.

  The code in line number 6520 corresponds to A2602 in FIG. This code is a content for calling a subroutine (large winning opening switch monitoring processing) corresponding to the label “P_CNTSW”.

  The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” in the line number 6540 corresponds to A2603 in FIG. As described above, the label R_TGAME indicates the address (here, absolute address) of the special figure game processing number area that stores the special figure game processing number (A2606), and the address “R_TGAME + 1” obtained by adding 1 to the address is: Indicates the start address (here, absolute address) of the special figure game processing timer area which is a 2-byte area. This code is an instruction for the area of the address “R_TGAME + 1”. Specifically, if the value of the area of the address destination of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0, the value of the special figure game processing timer, which is a 2-byte numerical value, is updated by −1, and if the value of the area of the same address is 0, This is a command for substituting a numerical value (= 0) designated by the operand as the value of the special figure game processing timer and maintaining 0. As described above, in the instruction “DQCPW”, the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined to be 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the value specified by the operand is stored in the predetermined area. Note that a code using an addition address “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” can also be used. The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” using an absolute address as “R_TGAME + 1” is 6 bytes in a machine language instruction, whereas the code “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” using an offset address as “R_TGAME + 1” Is a machine language instruction, which has 5 bytes, and the number of bytes (capacity) is small.

  The code at line number 6550 corresponds to A2604 in FIG. 21. If the value of the address (special figure game processing timer area) at the address of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0 (unless the time is up), the label “TGAMEPRC10” at line number 6610 Jumps to the address in the ROM corresponding to "." And executes the instruction of the line number 6620 and thereafter. Otherwise (if the time is up), the content of the next line is read.

  The code of the line number 6570 corresponds to A2605 in FIG. 21 and is the content for loading the HL register with the start address D_TGAMEPRC of the special figure game sequence branch table.

  The codes of line numbers 6580 to 6600 correspond to A2606 and A2607 in FIG.

  At the line number 6580, the value (special figure game processing number) stored in the special figure game processing number area (in the RAM) at the addition address IY + R_TGAME is loaded into the A register (code “LQDA, (IY + R_TGAME))”). . The label R_TGAME is an offset address of the special figure game processing number area based on the value “2800H” of the IY register.

  In the line number 6590, the special figure game processing number which is the value of the A register is doubled.

  At line number 6600, first, the total address HL + A is obtained by adding the value of the A register after doubling to the top address of the special figure game sequence branch table stored in the HL register. The reason for the doubling is that an even value needs to be added because the branch destination address value in the special figure game sequence branch table is 2 bytes (the special figure game processing number includes an odd value).

  The code “CALL (HL + A)” of the line number 6600 indicates that the subroutine call based on the processing number is performed based on the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A (the area in the special figure game sequence branch table). is there. Note that this code does not change the value of the HL register to (the value of the HL register + the value of the A register), and the value of the head address of the special figure game sequence branch table is maintained. The subroutine call corresponds to A2608 to A2618 in FIG. The branch destination address value is the head address of the subroutine. In this embodiment, in the special figure game sequence table branch processing in the special figure game processing, the instruction of “CALL (HL + A)” is executed by referring to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A. Although it has been described that a call is made, “CALL (HL + A)” may be used in the branching process of the general-purpose game sequence table in the general-purpose game process. That is, "CALL (HL + A)" is used as the code of A7607 in the general-purpose game process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the code of line number 6620 corresponds to A2619 in FIG. 21, and the code of line number 6630 corresponds to A2620 in FIG. Further, the code of line number 6650 corresponds to A2621 in FIG. 21, and the code of line number 6660 corresponds to A2622 in FIG.

  Here, the instruction “DQCPW” will be described again. The value before the comma is the target value (the value of 2 bytes stored at the address), the value after the comma is the initial value (here, 0), This is a command for determining whether the target value is 0, decrementing the target value if it is not 0, and substituting the initial value for the target value if it is 0. “DQCPW” is a 2-byte version of the above “DQCP” instruction. In other words, this is an instruction for directly determining two bytes for the target value and directly updating -1 from the two-byte value for the target value according to the result of the determination.

  In addition, “IQCPW”, which is a 2-byte instruction of “IQCP”, is specially devised in the present invention in order to operate an area for storing a 2-byte value. This is an instruction for making a direct determination and directly updating +1 from a 2-byte value for a target value according to the result of the determination. That is, in the “IQCPW” instruction, the upper limit value is defined, and if the 2-byte value stored in the predetermined area is smaller than the upper limit value, the value is directly updated by +1; if the 2-byte value has reached the upper limit value, the 2-byte value is updated. Return to 0.

  FIG. 143 is a program list for explaining a part of the special figure game sequence branch table according to the fourteenth embodiment. As described above, the special figure game sequence branch table is labeled “D_TGAMEPRC” and is referred to for a subroutine call of the special figure game processing.

  There is a mnemonic “DW” in the code, and this mnemonic is a pseudo-instruction that specifies to the assembler that one row of the table is 2-byte data.

  In FIG. 143, the special figure game sequence branch table is shown as a group of pseudo instructions for setting a subroutine name (label) in association with a branch destination address value. The branch table is a list of branch destination address values (head addresses of subroutines) that are sequentially set (stored) in the ROM 111b by these instruction groups. That is, the special figure game sequence branch table in the ROM 111b is obtained by replacing the label (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, etc.) in FIG. 143 with the branch destination address value.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7010 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2608 in FIG. 21, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7020 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2609. The pseudo instruction at line number 7030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2610, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7040 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine at A2611. The pseudo instruction at line number 7050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2612, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7060 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine at A2613.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7070 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2614, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7080 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2615. The pseudo instruction of line number 7090 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2616. The pseudo instruction of line number 7100 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2617. The pseudo instruction corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2618.

[Operation and Effect of Fourteenth Embodiment]
According to the fourteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing a game ball to a start winning prize area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and is capable of storing a 2-byte random value (for example, a variation pattern random number 1) for determining a mode of the variation display game, or a game control. A 2-byte timer area capable of storing a 2-byte timer value (for example, a value of a special figure game processing timer) that measures the progress of the game is provided. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an addition instruction (for example, “IQNCW (R_RDHEN1)”) for adding the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing the value in the general-purpose register. Further, the arithmetic processing means is configured to be capable of executing a subtraction instruction (for example, “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0”) for subtracting the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing the value in the general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing unit is configured to execute a 2-byte random number value in a random number area (for example, a random number generation area of the variation pattern random number 1) or a 2-byte timer area (for example, a special figure game processing timer area) by an addition instruction or a subtraction instruction Is added or subtracted.

  The addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is, for example, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, “DQCPW”. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. An addition instruction or a subtraction instruction directly adds (increases) or adds (increases) a value to be subjected to an instruction (a value stored in a storage area at an address destination) without storing it in a general-purpose register, that is, without using a general-purpose register. This is an instruction to subtract (decrease). Note that “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, and “DQEC” are addition or subtraction instructions for adding or subtracting a 1-byte value stored at a target address without storing the value in a general-purpose register. And "DQECW", "IQCPW", and "DQCPW".

  When any of addition or subtraction instructions such as “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, “DQEC”, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW” and “DQCPW” is used for updating a random number value, Since the value of the random number counter is increased or decreased without obtaining the value stored in the (random number area) by the general-purpose register, the random number counter is not updated due to a failure of the general-purpose register, and the random number is biased. This can be avoided. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. The codes by these instructions include not only codes (for example, “IQCP (vw), n”) when an address is directly specified by an immediate value vw, but also an address in an arbitrary register qq (= WA, BC, DE, HL). , IX, IY), and may be a code (for example, “IQCP (qq), n”) for indirectly specifying an address after entering the address once.

  In addition, when either the addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is used for updating the timer, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the progress of the game does not progress due to the failure of the register and the timer is not updated. When used, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the occurrence of a prize is not reflected and the time saving is continued without terminating at a predetermined number of starts.

  In addition, as a feature of these addition instructions or subtraction instructions, conventionally, a plurality of codes had to be described. However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to represent a single code, and the program capacity can be reduced. . For example, the “IQCP” instruction requires only 5 bytes for one code, and the “IQCPW” instruction requires only 6 bytes for one code. However, since multiple codes are not required, the program as a whole is compact. And the program capacity decreases.

  In addition, since a value to be subjected to an instruction (a value stored at an address destination) is directly added (increased) or subtracted (decreased) without using a general-purpose register, during a period in which the process represented by the one code is executed, Therefore, it is not necessary to set the interrupt prohibition to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity (corresponding to the code amount required for setting the interrupt prohibition and the setting of the interrupt enable).

  Furthermore, in order to add or subtract the target value of the instruction without using the general-purpose register, the value of the general-purpose register is saved on the stack and the register bank is switched during the execution of the process represented by the one code. Therefore, it is not necessary to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and the program capacity (for the code amount for saving and restoring the value of the general-purpose register or the code amount for switching the bank and returning the bank) can be reduced.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and is capable of storing a random number value for determining a mode of the variable display game (for example, a random pattern The arithmetic processing unit compares the value stored at the target address with a predetermined determination value without storing the value in the general-purpose register, and calculates a result of the comparison. When the predetermined judgment value is smaller, the increment processing is performed on the value stored at the target address, and as a result of comparison, when the predetermined judgment value is not smaller, the target address is An increment instruction for initializing the stored value (for example, “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240”) is configured to be executable. Then, the value of the random number counter area is compared with a predetermined determination value, and if the predetermined determination value is smaller, an increment process is performed on the value of the random number counter area, and if the predetermined determination value is not smaller, Initializes the value of the random number counter area.

  Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value stored in the target address is zero without storing the value in the general-purpose register, and if the determination result is affirmative, the value in the target address is determined. The stored value is initialized, and if the result of the determination is negative, a decrement instruction (for example, “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238”) for executing the decrement processing on the value stored at the target address can be executed. It is composed of The arithmetic processing means determines, by a decrement instruction, whether or not the value of the random number counter area is zero. If the value is zero, the value of the random number counter area is initialized. Execute the decrement processing.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, by using the increment instruction or the decrement instruction, loading to the general-purpose register, addition processing and comparison processing (determination processing) in the general-purpose register, and random number counter area (address destination area) are performed. This eliminates the need to write three codes, that is, loading a program, making the program more compact and reducing the program capacity compared to a conventional program. Also, direct addition or subtraction of the value stored in the random number counter area (address destination area) by an increment instruction or a decrement instruction does not use a general-purpose register, so that a problem occurs even if interrupt processing occurs. There are no benefits.

  According to the fourteenth embodiment, the game control program storage means includes a table area including a plurality of storage areas specified by one address. For example, the table area is an area for storing a special figure game sequence branch table in the data area. The table area stores, for each storage area, the address of a subroutine selected with the progress of the game. The game control means includes a first register for storing a head address of the table area, and a second register for storing a value obtained in accordance with the progress of the game. The arithmetic processing means derives an address value obtained by adding the value stored in the second register (corresponding to the special figure game processing number) to the value stored in the first register (the top address value of the table area), and derives the derived address. An instruction (for example, “CALL (HL + A)”) for calling the processing of the address stored in the value is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means controls the progress of the game by calling a subroutine of an address stored in a specific storage area in the table area according to the instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, since the subroutine call can be executed without providing only the instruction for calculating the address of the subroutine alone, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced.

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
In the fifteenth embodiment, “CQPW” and “CQHKW”, which are instructions for comparing a value stored at an address destination with a predetermined value without storing the value in a register (at least a general-purpose register) in FIG. 121A, will be described. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a program code (program list).

  FIG. 144 is a program list for explaining a part of the program structure according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, a program code corresponding to a first modification of the special figure game process using an instruction unique to the present embodiment will be described, and an instruction “CQPW” which is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the code of the first modification of the special figure game process in the fifteenth embodiment, particularly, the line numbers 7540 to 7570 corresponding to A2603 to A2604 in FIG. 21 correspond to the special figure game process in the fourteenth embodiment shown in FIG. Since this is different from the above code, it is described below.

  Specifically, the code “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” of the line number 7540 is stored in a 2-byte special figure game processing timer area corresponding to the address “R_TGAME + 1” (absolute address here) by the instruction “CQPW”. This is a content (instruction) for comparing the stored value of the special figure game processing timer (value to be determined) with a comparison value (here, 0).

  In the instruction “CQPW”, the value before the comma in the operand is defined as a value to be determined (determination target value), and the value after the comma is defined as a comparison value (here, 0). Then, as a result of comparing the determination target value with the comparison value, the instruction is a command for determining whether the determination target value and the comparison value are the same or not.

  The code “JR Z, TGAMEPRC10” in the line number 7550 jumps to the label TGAMEPRC10 (address corresponding to the label TGAMEPR) when the determination result is the same (when the special figure game processing timer is up). Content.

  The code “DQECW (R_TGAME + 1)” of the line number 7560 is a special figure game processing timer stored in the 2-byte area when the result of the above determination is not the same (when the special figure game processing timer is not timed up). -1 is updated (subtracted by 1) from the value of

  The code “JR NZ, TGAMEPRC20” in the line number 7570 is the content that jumps to the code labeled TGAMEPRC20 when the above determination results are not the same.

  As described above, “CQPW” is an instruction that compares a defined determination target value with a predetermined comparison value and returns a determination result (comparison result) as to whether they are the same or not.

  FIG. 145 is a program list of a second modification of the special figure game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the “CQHKW” instruction coded at line number 8040 will be described. Note that the code of the second modification of the special figure game process is different from the code of the first modification of the special figure game process shown in FIG. 144 only in the line number 8040.

  The code “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)” in the line number 8040 is an instruction to determine (by confirming) whether the value of the special figure game processing timer stored in the 2-byte area is a predetermined value by the instruction “CQHKW”. is there. As the predetermined value (predetermined set value), for example, 0 is defined. Therefore, the code has the content of determining whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0.

  Then, as a result of the determination by CQHKW, if the timer value is the same as 0, the process jumps to TGAMEPRC10 (according to the code of line number 8050), otherwise, the timer value is updated by -1 (code of line number 8060) Jump to TGAMEPRC20 (according to the code at line number 8070).

  Both “CQPW” and “CQHKW” are instructions that can execute the determination process without taking the value of the address destination area into the register, load the value of the address destination area into the register, determine, and Since the code for storing the data in the area is unnecessary, the code amount can be reduced. In addition, since the two instructions do not require a code for register protection or switch between banks, the program capacity can be reduced. In the above description, as a “CQPW” instruction or a “CQHKW” instruction, a code whose address is directly specified by an absolute address “R_TGAME + 1” (6 bytes of “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” in a machine language instruction) or “4” in a machine language instruction Although the byte “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)” is used, the number of bytes in the machine language instruction can be reduced by 1 byte by using the addition address IY + R_TGAME + 1 with “R_TGAME + 1” as the offset address (“CQPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1)”. ), 0 "," CQHKW (IY + R_TGAME + 1) ", etc.).

[Operation and Effect of Fifteenth Embodiment]
According to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entering or passing a game ball to a start winning area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game performs a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means. Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. A plurality of bytes of addresses are assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the addresses. The update information storage means includes a timer area (for example, a special figure game processing timer area) provided corresponding to a predetermined address and capable of storing a timer value for measuring the progress of the game control. The arithmetic processing unit is configured to be able to execute a comparison instruction (for example, a “CQPW” instruction) for comparing a value stored at a target address with a predetermined comparison value without storing the value in a general-purpose register. The timer value in the timer area is compared with a predetermined comparison value. Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means can execute a determination instruction (for example, a “CQHKW” instruction) for determining whether a value stored at a target address is the same as a predetermined set value without storing the value in a general-purpose register. It is configured to determine whether the timer value in the timer area is the same as a predetermined set value by a determination command. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a comparison instruction and a determination instruction.

  Thus, in the fifteenth embodiment, when either the comparison instruction (“CQPW” instruction) or the determination instruction (“CQHKW” instruction) is used for updating the timer, the timer is not updated due to a failure of the general-purpose register. The situation in which the progress of the game does not progress quickly can be avoided. When the comparison command (“CQPW” command) and the determination command (“CQHKW” command) are used to update the counter (rotational speed region or high-probability fluctuation frequency region), a predetermined start which does not reflect the occurrence of a prize is taken. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the time saving state or the probable change state continues without ending by the number of times. Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the comparison instruction and the determination instruction.

  In addition, since the target value of the instruction (the value stored in the address destination area) is directly compared or determined without being stored in the general-purpose register, that is, without using the general-purpose register, the one code represents In the period during which the process is executed, it is not necessary to protect the value of the general-purpose register by setting the prohibition of the interrupt, and the program capacity can be reduced accordingly (the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced).

  Furthermore, since the general-purpose registers are not used, there is no need to save the values of the general-purpose registers to the stack or to switch the register bank to protect the values of the general-purpose registers, thereby reducing the program capacity by that amount. The amount of code in the entire program is reduced).

[Sixteenth embodiment]
In the sixteenth embodiment, a novel compression method and a method of reading the data will be described as a data compression method in which a Z80 CPU for a gaming machine can execute arithmetic processing. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 146 is a view for explaining a conventional data table when explaining the compression method of the sixteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, an assembly language code corresponding to the conventional latter-half variable group table is also shown.

  The latter half fluctuation group table is a table for distributing the fluctuation pattern random number 1 circulating from 0 to 65535. The random number value is 0 to 61999 without fluctuation, 62000 to 64499 is normal reach, and 64500 to 65099 is SP1. This is a table referred to by a 2-byte distribution process in order to distribute system reach, 65100 to 65399 to SP2 system reach, and 65400 to 65535 to SP3 system reach.

  As shown in the row number 8500, the table 1 for the special figure 1 out of the latter half fluctuation group table is labeled “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, and is a table in which the data content, which is 1 row in 4 bytes, is arranged in 5 rows ( Table format). In each line of code, a pseudo-instruction (DW), a distribution value, and a table name are described from the left, and a machine language code (in ROM) that is paired with an assembly language code is described on the right of the comment column of the data table. Data) is described.

  Specifically, the code “DW 62000, D_KOU_HZ01” in the assembly language of the line number 8530 is a pseudo-instruction that the distribution value is 2-byte data corresponding to the random number value being 2 bytes. DW "is specified to the assembler. Further, the content to be subtracted from the random number is 62000, and the table corresponding to the distribution is a table name “D_KOU_HZ01”. Although the detailed description is omitted here, the details of the change are further determined with reference to D_KOU_HZ01.

  The machine language code (machine language data) corresponding to the assembly language code of line number 8530 is “5A00 30F2005B”, and “5A00” means an address in the ROM from which data is read. In the ROM, one byte (two digits in hexadecimal notation) of data is stored for each address, and the subsequent eight-digit machine language code "30F2005Bh" is actually stored at addresses 5A00h to 5A03h. The data is “30h”, “F2h”, “00h”, and “5Bh”. Then, the eight-digit machine language code is divided into “30F2h” and “005Bh”.

  Here, since the high order and the low order are interchanged, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 reads “30F2” as “F230h” by exchanging the lower 2 digits “F2h” and the upper 2 digits “30h”, and reads “F230h”. Corresponds to the distribution value “62000”. “005B” means an address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ01 in which “5B00h” in which the upper and lower parts are exchanged.

  Continuing to explain the machine language code for four more stages, the machine language code of line number 8540 has an address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ02 of “5B02h” and a distribution value of “09C4h”.

  In the machine language code of the line number 8550, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ03 is “5B06h” and the distribution value is “0258h”. In the machine language code of the line number 8560, the address of D_KOU_HZ04 is “5B10h” and the distribution value is “012Ch”. In the machine language code of the line number 8570, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ05 is “5B16h” and the distribution value is “0088h”.

  Here, the addresses of the data table are “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h” in order from the first row of the table (from row number 8530) to the fifth row (up to row number 8570). It is. Since the first digit “5h” of these five addresses is common, the 4-bit data corresponding to “5h” is deleted and stored in the ROM, and when reading, the 4-bit data corresponding to “5h” is read. The compression method according to the present embodiment is intended to supplement and execute arithmetic processing. Specifically, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 147 to 148.

  FIG. 147 is a second half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, and also shows corresponding assembly language codes. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, which is the same as the conventional second-half change group table shown in FIG. 146.

  The pseudo-instruction BTA {16, 12} described in line number 9030 is a table in which the binary data of the table is a set of 16 bits (8 bits × 2) and 12 bits (8 bits × 12 bits, supplementing 4 bits). 2) indicates that the assembler creates data as a set of 2).

  The numerical part of BTA {16, 12} is an example, and the pseudo instruction is described in the format of BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}, and the assembler instructs the assembler to read the bit number of numerical value 1 and the bit number of numerical value 2 in order. specify. Such a reading format is continued up to the code “ENDDATA” of the line number 9140. Numerical values 1 and 2 are arbitrary numbers from 1 to 16.

  Next, the data configuration of one stage in the table will be described. The code “62000, D_KOU_HZ01-5000H” of the row number 9040 describes 62000 of the distribution value which is a 2-byte numerical value and D_KOU_HZ01-5000H which is a relative address of a reference table (second half variation selection table), and D_KOU_HZ01. -5000H is a reference for the first stage data. That is, since the DP register (table pointer) stores the address 5000H at the head of the data, the address specified by the row number 9040 may be a difference from the address stored in the DP register. Therefore, the assembly language is described as D_KOU_HZ01-5000H for convenience.

  When this is confirmed by the machine language code, the machine language code corresponding to the assembly language code in the first stage is “30F200h” from address 5A00h to 5A02h and “4Bh” at address 5A03h. Of these, "F230h", in which the upper and lower parts of "30F200h" are interchanged, has a distribution value of 62000, and "00h" excludes "B" from the difference "B00h" with the address "5000H" specified by the DP register. Value. “4Bh” stored in the address 5A03h is a numerical value obtained by combining the data of the first row and the data of the second row as described later. Therefore, only the data stored at the address 5A03h is described here with a line feed.

  Similarly, from the address of the table in the second row where the distribution value is 2500 to the address of the table in the fifth row where the distribution value is 136, all the relative addresses are represented by minus 5000h. The relative address is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. That is, as described above, the first digit “5h” is common among the addresses “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h” in order from the top of the table, and thus is deleted. Since the second digit "Bh" of the address is also common, by deleting the first digit and the second digit "5Bh", it is possible to further compress data of 4 bits per stage. It is.

  The following FIG. 148 visualizes this more easily. FIG. 148 is a diagram for describing a compression method according to the sixteenth embodiment. The left side of the figure shows the interpretation of the pseudo instruction BTA {16, 12} by the assembler, and the right side of the figure shows the compressed data stored in the ROM.

  First, the data contents of the first row of the table and the storage in the ROM will be described. Explaining the manner of moving the viewpoint from the left side to the right side of the drawing, the data content of the first row of the table is “0B00h” of the relative address of the table corresponding to “F230h” of the distribution value. Expressing this as a binary number, “F230h” is “1111001000110000B”, and “0B00h” is “000010110000000B”.

  The reference destination address of the second half change selection table as the absolute address of the first row of the table described in FIG. 146 is “5B00h”, but in the present embodiment, it is assumed that 5000h is stored in the DP register (table pointer). Therefore, the relative address in each stage of the table is obtained by subtracting 5000h from the absolute address.

  Next, actual data stored in the ROM will be described. “1111001000110000B” corresponding to “F230h” is divided for each byte, the lower 8 bits “00110000B” are located at address 5A00h in the ROM (arrow 1 in FIG. 148), and the upper 8 bits are “11110010B”. Is stored in the address 5A01h (arrow 2 in FIG. 148). This is a part corresponding to “16” in BTA {16, 12}.

  The data stored in the addresses 5A00h and 5A01h in hexadecimal notation are "30h" and "F2h".

  Also, “000010110000000B” corresponding to “0B00h” is divided for each byte, and “00000000B”, which is the lower 8 bits, is stored at address 5A02h. In FIG. 148, the arrow 3 corresponds.

  Next, the upper 8 bits can be divided into the upper 4 bits “0000B” and the subsequent 4 bits “1011B”. Then, the upper 4 bits “0000B” are deleted (compressed), and the 4 bits “1011B” following the upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A03h (arrow 4).

  In other words, the relative address obtained by subtracting 5000h from the absolute address "5B00h" in the first row of the table is "0B00h", but the first digit "0" B00h of the numerical value "0" B00h " ”Corresponds to the upper four bits“ 0000B ”, the upper four bits“ 0000B ”are deleted. Up to this point, the storage of the data in the first row of the table in the ROM has been described.

  Next, storage of data in the second row of the table will be described. The binary data of “09C4h” corresponding to the distribution value 2500 in the second-stage table data is “0000100111000100B”. This binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits and lower 4 bits. Then, the lower 4 bits are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A03h.

  That is, in the address 5A03h, the first-stage data “1011B” is stored as lower 4 bits (arrow 4), and the second-stage data “0100B” is stored as upper 4 bits (arrow 5). ). Therefore, a part of the first-stage table data and a part of the second-stage table data are stored together in the address 5A03h (arrows 4 and 5).

  Subsequently, in the second stage of the table data, the middle 8 bits “10011100B” are stored in the address 5A04h (arrow 6), and the upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A05h. .

  Subsequently, the binary data of “0B02h” corresponding to the relative address of the table data in the second row is “000010110000000010B”. Also in this case, the binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits and lower 4 bits.

  The upper four bits “0000B” are the first digit of the relative address “” 0 ”B02h” which is a numerical value obtained by subtracting 5000h from the absolute address “5B02h” in the second row of the table. Since it corresponds to "0", it has been deleted.

  The lower 4 bits “0010B” are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A05h (arrow 8), and the middle 8 bits “1011100000B” are stored in the address 5A06h (arrow 9). Up to this point, the description of the storage of the data in the second row of the table in the ROM has been described.

  Similarly to the first and second tiers, the third tier of the table data is deleted as a relative address and stored in the ROM with the portion common to the other tiers being deleted. Are stored in the area of the ROM at addresses 5A00h to 5A11h.

  Here, replenishment of insufficient binary data will be described.

  In the data of the reference destination address at the bottom of the table (the address of the second half variation selection table), the lower 8 bits “00010110B” are stored in the address 5A10h (arrow 10), and the middle 4 bits “1011B”. Is stored in the address 5A11h as the lower 4 bits (arrow 11), and the upper 4 bits “0000” are deleted.

  In this state, the data stored in the address 5A11h is only the lower 4 bits, and the storage state of the data in the ROM falls into an irregular state. It is automatically supplemented by the interpretation of the command (arrow 12).

  In the present embodiment, data corresponding to “5h” is assigned because the first digit “5h” of the addresses “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h” is common. Although the data is compressed, "Bh" which is the second digit of the address is also common. Therefore, by compressing the first and second digits "5Bh", it is possible to further compress 4 bits per stage. .

[Operation and Effect of Sixteenth Embodiment]
As described above, since a common portion as each reference destination address (relative address in the present embodiment) of the table is compressed and stored in the ROM, the capacity of 4 bytes which is the capacity of one stage of table data is originally required. Although a storage area of 20 bytes is required as the capacity for the five stages, the storage capacity can be reduced to a total of 18 bytes from 5A00h to 5A11h, so that the ROM capacity can be reduced.

  When data is stored in the ROM, unless the data is based on a certain rule (for example, a certain number of bits and a certain bit length) for each type of data, how many bits are read by the CPU 111a are determined. Unrecognizable, unable to read (cannot be interpreted). Therefore, the read range is defined in consideration of the bit length range common to all related tables of the same type. The definition is the code of the above BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}. In the present embodiment, as an example, all binary codes in the latter half fluctuation group table (including not only for special figure 1 but also for special figure 2) are used. For the data (binary number data), 16 bits (corresponding to numerical value 1) are defined as the distribution value, and 12 bits (corresponding to numerical value 2) are defined as the address of the second half variation selection table.

[Seventeenth embodiment]
In the seventeenth embodiment, reading of compressed data stored in the ROM will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) reads the compressed data by using an instruction “LQDB”, starting from bit 0 of the address pointed to by the DP register (table pointer) from an arbitrary bit position designated by the instruction “LQDB”. Bit-length data can be read. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 149 is a view for explaining a data read format according to the seventeenth embodiment. Here, the data from the address 5A00h to the address 5A10h is read by the code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”, and the data at the address 5A11h is read by the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”.

  The LQDB instruction is described in the format of “LQDB register name, (register name). Read bit length”, and is added to the address value stored in the DP register and the register pair (register name) after the comma (register name). Starting from bit 0 of the address value calculated by adding the stored value (the number of bits), the instruction is to read data of the read bit length and store it in the register pair of the register name before the comma. The register pair of the register name may be a different register pair or the same register pair. If the number of bits is small, the register name may indicate a single register instead of a register pair. In a single register, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 8, and in a register pair, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 16. Note that the CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the LQDB instruction.

  First, assuming that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and that the HL register stores a value obtained by multiplying A00h by 8 and converting it to the number of bits, it is stored in the address 5A00h and the address 5A01h. The reading of the data will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A00h, a process of reading 16-bit data from 5A00h obtained by adding A00h to 5000h is executed. The (A00h * 8) -th bit counted from bit 0 of 5000h indicated by arrow 13 is a read base point. In FIG. 149, A00h * 8 is described as A00h * 8, which means that A00h is multiplied by 8 for bit conversion (bit conversion), but the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

  The one-byte data stored at the address 5A00h is “00110000B”, and the one-byte data stored at the address 5A01h is “11110010B”. Therefore, “1111001000110000B” is 16-bit data. (Arrow 14). The data is represented by F230h in hexadecimal, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register. F230h corresponds to the distribution value of 62000.

  Next, a case will be described in which the sorting is advanced and the address of the second half variation selection table of the last row is read by the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h, and the value of (HL register) is A10h * 8.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A10h * 8, a process of reading 12 bits from bit 0 of 5A10h obtained by adding A10h to 5000h is performed. Be executed. The data read out here is "101100010110B" (arrow 15). However, since the storage destination HL register has an area for 2 bytes, "0000B for 4 bits short of the 2-byte area". Are supplemented as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 16).

  The data “0000101100010110B” read from the address 5A10h and the address 5A11h by the supplement of “0000B” is 0B16h in hexadecimal, and is stored in the HL register.

  Next, the contents of a program for reading compressed data by the LQBD instruction will be described with reference to actual codes.

  FIG. 150 is a program list of a variation pattern setting process according to the seventeenth embodiment. The program list of the variation pattern setting process described here will be described as a program module that is a calling source of the 2-byte distribution process described below.

  The code “LD HL, (HL)” in the line number 10020 corresponds to A4302 in FIG. 37, and is the content for acquiring the address of the second half variation pattern group table.

  The code “LD WA, (DE)” in the line number 10030 corresponds to A4303 in FIG. 37, and is a content for loading a variation pattern random number from a target area.

  The code “CALLR P_SELW” in the line number 10050 corresponds to A4305 in FIG. 37 and is a content for performing a subroutine call for the 2-byte distribution processing.

  FIG. 151 is a program list of a conventional 2-byte distribution process. This module is called in the above-described variation pattern setting process, but is a process executed in a method in which data stored in the ROM is not compressed. The two-byte distribution process is labeled “P_SELW”.

  The code of line number 10510 corresponds to A4401 in FIG. 38, and the value stored in the address of the second half variation pattern table taken into the HL register in the variation pattern setting process of the caller is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING). This is the content to be determined by comparing with. If they are the same, a zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code of the line number 10520 corresponds to A4402 in FIG. 38. If the code has no distribution, the code jumps to a part labeled SELW20. If the code has no distribution, the code of the next line is read. .

  The codes of the row number 10590 and the row number 10600, which are one section labeled SELW20, correspond to A4407 in FIG. 38, and are updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (the absolute address of the second half variation selection table). What you do.

  Line numbers 10530 to 10570, which constitute one section labeled SELW10, correspond to the loop processing (A4403 to A4406) in FIG. The code “SUB WA, (HL)” in the row number 10540 corresponds to A4403 and A4404 in FIG. 38, and the distribution value obtained from the second half fluctuation group table is the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 stored in the WA register. This is the content to be subtracted from.

  The code “JR C, SELW20” in the line number 10550 corresponds to A4405 in FIG. 38. If the result of the subtraction is smaller than 0, the code jumps to the SELW20; otherwise, the code in the next line Is the content to read.

  The code “ADD HL, 4” in the row number 10560 corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is a content in which the address value of the second half fluctuation group table is added by 4 bytes and updated to the address of the next row of the table.

  The code “JR SELW10” in the line number 10570 also corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is the content for jumping to SELW10.

  Next, the contents of a program according to the seventeenth embodiment for reading data compressed by the LQDB instruction will be described. FIG. 152 is a program list of the two-byte distribution processing of the seventeenth embodiment. The two-byte distribution process of the seventeenth embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and is called by the above-described variation pattern setting process. The label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” (conversion instruction) of the line number 11010 has the content of shifting the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. By shifting left by 3 bits, binary data of lower 13 bits is substantially raised to the second power of 3 (8 times). That is, the address value stored in the HL register is multiplied by 8 and converted into the number of bits (the address value is converted into bits).

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16” (read instruction) of the line number 11020 is an instruction to read data stored in the ROM by compressing it as an instruction unique to the present embodiment. Starting from bit 0 of the indicated address, 16 bits of data having the designated bit length are fetched into the BC register.

  The code “CQP BC, C_NOTHING” in the line number 11030 is a content that is determined by comparing whether the value stored in the BC register is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING). If they are the same, a zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code “JR Z, SELW20” of the line number 11040 jumps to the SELW20 (jumps to the code of the line number 11110) when the code is a non-distributed code, and otherwise reads the next line.

  First, the SELW 20 will be described. The code “ADD HL, 12” of the row number 11120 is the content of adding 12 to the bit-converted value stored in the HL register.

  The code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12” (read instruction) of the line number 11130 is a content for loading 12-bit binary data of the value stored in the HL register into the HL register. Thus, the relative address of the second half variation selection table is obtained in the HL register.

  The code “ADD HL, 5000H” of the line number 11140 is obtained by adding the value of the DP register 5000h to the address value of the HL register and updating the data address (absolute address of the second half variation selection table) corresponding to the sorted result. What you do.

  Next, it returns to the part of SELW10. The code “LQDB BC, (HL) .16” of the line number 11060 is the content for reading the data of the distribution value for the next 16 bits.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” in the line number 11070 is the content of subtracting the distribution value from the random number value.

  The code "JRC C, SELW20" of line number 11080 jumps to SELW20 when the result of the subtraction is negative (jumps to the code of line number 11110), otherwise reads the next line. is there.

  The code “ADD HL, 16 + 12” of the line number 11090 is the content of adding 16 + 12 bits to the number of bits stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register stores a bit-converted address (corresponding to the position of bit 0 of the distribution value) in which the next distribution value is stored.

  The code “JR SELW10” of the line number 11100 is the content returning to the top of the loop processing.

[Operation and Effect of Seventeenth Embodiment]
According to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, entry or passage of a game ball to a start winning area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game has a special result. Game control means (game control device 100) for performing a game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the condition becomes. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means includes a conversion command (for example, “SQLA HL, 3”) for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating the address value of the storage area read from the game control program storage means by a predetermined number, and the bit conversion value as a starting point. A read command (for example, “LQDB BC, (HL) .16”) for reading a predetermined bit length is configured to be executable. The data of the predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game and a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads a distribution value and a value associated with the distribution value by a read command, and selects a mode of the variable display game based on the value associated with the distribution value. Derive the address. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a conversion instruction and a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, the conversion instruction shifts the address value fetched into the register to the left by three bits, that is, by the operation of multiplying by eight, which is 2 to the third power, by this conversion instruction. Can be calculated. Further, by this read command, data can be read using a specific bit as a read base point.

  In addition, by combining the address value stored in the DP register and the bit-converted address value, a more specific bit in the one-byte area at the address specified by the DP register can be used as a base point for reading.

  Also, the bit length to be read can be set according to the compression format of the number of bits deleted from the original data. Can be restored.

  According to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined starting condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate) is established, and the variable display game is executed. A game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores binary data of a specific bit length for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means divides the binary data into bit lengths smaller than a specific bit length and reads the binary data from a plurality of storage areas having consecutive addresses. In addition, a read command (for example, “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”) to be read as a specific bit length is configured to be executable. The data of the specific bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads a distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value by a read command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the read instruction. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (relative address in FIGS. 147 and 148) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, when reading the compressed data, the length of the read data is less than 8 bits based on the 1-byte length (8-bit length (specific bit length)). In the case where there is no data, the arithmetic processing means can supplement all the missing bits (digits) with 0 data, so that the compressed data (data deleted by compression) is automatically restored.

[Eighteenth Embodiment]
In the eighteenth embodiment, compression of a bit number (bit length) that is not a divisor or multiple of 8 bits will be described as reading of compressed data using the LQDB instruction. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which 11 bits of data of 32 bits are compressed as an example. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventeenth embodiments.

  FIG. 153 is a second half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, and also shows corresponding assembly language codes. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, which is the same as the second-half fluctuation group table shown in FIGS.

  In the second half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the absolute address of each stage (the address of the second half variation selection table) is “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h”. The data corresponding to “5h” is compressed due to the fact that “5h” is common. On the other hand, in the eighteenth embodiment, based on the absolute address value (D_KOU_HZ01) of the table of the first row, the relative address values of the tables of the second and lower rows are obtained by subtracting the absolute address value of the previous row. The difference address value is stored. This difference address value is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. Since the absolute address of the first-stage table is 5B00h (D_KOU_HZ01) and the absolute address of the fifth-stage table is 5B16h (D_KOU_HZ05), the difference is 16 bits (10110B in binary notation) of 5 bits. The remaining 11 bits are compressed.

  Also, in the second half fluctuation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, the table data of the first row is not compressed, and the table data of the second to fifth rows is compressed. Therefore, the pseudo instruction “BTA” is coded in the row number 9540 next to the row number 9530 in which the table in the first row is coded in order to generate data of the data in the second to fifth rows by the assembler. ing.

  The assembly language code “DWD_KOU_HZ01-5000H, 62000” at the line number 9530 is equivalent to the first-stage table (no reach) in an uncompressed state, and the distribution value 62000, which is a 2-byte numerical value, is referred to. D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is the address of the table (second half variation selection table), is described. Note that 5000h is stored in the DP register. When the machine language code (machine language data) created by the code of the line number 9530 is confirmed, “00h”, “5Bh”, “30h”, and “F2h” are stored as data of 4 bytes from the address 5A00h. Of these, “00h” stored at the address 5A00h and “5Bh” stored at the address 5A01h, and “30h” stored at the address 5A02h and “F2h” stored at the address 5A03h have higher and lower orders, respectively. It is as having mentioned above that it replaced.

  The pseudo-instruction “BTA {5, 16}” of the line number 9540 has contents specifying that the data read length is 5 bits long and 16 bits long. In the second-half variation group table of the present embodiment, unlike the second-half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, the reference destination address of the table is described first for each row, and then the distribution value is described. As will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 154 below, the reference address of the table is stored for 5 bits, and 16 bits are read as the distribution value.

  The code “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01, 2500” of the line number 9550 is a compression in which the difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the first-stage table from the address value of the second-stage table (normal reach system) D_KOU_HZ02 and the distribution value are compressed. Coded as previous source data.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02,600” in the row number 9560 is a difference between the address value of the second-stage table D_KOU_HZ03, which is the third-stage table (SP1 system), and the distribution value Are coded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ04−D_KOU_HZ03, 300” of the row number 9570 is a difference between the address value of the D_KOU_HZ04, which is the fourth table (SP2 system), and the distribution value of the third table, and the distribution value. Are coded as original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04, 136” of the row number 9580 is a difference between the address value of the D_KOU_HZ05, which is the fifth table (SP3 system), and the distribution value, and the distribution value. Are coded as original data before compression. The specified range of the read format of the compressed data in the assembly language ends with the code “ENDDATA” in the line number 9590.

  Next, data compression according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a view for explaining a compression method according to the eighteenth embodiment.

  Here, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ01" is 5B00h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ02" is 5B02h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ03" is 5B06h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ04" is 5B10h, and the address value of "D_KOU_HZ5Bh5" is "D_KOU_HZ5Bh5". In this case, “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01” is the difference “02h”, “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02” is the difference “04h”, “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03” is the difference “0Ah”, and “D_KOU_H0H05” is the difference between “D_KOU_H0H” and “D_KOU_HZO”.

  Therefore, it is possible to compress 12 bits while leaving 4 bits of “0Ah” (1010 in binary notation), but in other tables not illustrated, the 4 bits may not be enough to represent the difference. Also in FIG. 154, 11 bits are compressed while leaving 5 bits.

  Subsequently, data in the second row of the table read by the assembler according to the pseudo instruction BTA {5, 16} will be described.

  Of the data in the second row of the table, “02h”, which is “D_KOU_HZ02−D_KOU_HZ01”, is originally “0002h”, and is expressed as “000000000000000010B” in binary. Of these, the upper 11 bits are compressed, and the lower 5 bits “00010B” are stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A04h (arrow 17 in FIG. 154).

  Next, among the data in the second row of the table, the distribution value 2500 is represented by a binary number, which is "1001110001000100B". Since the storage capacity of the upper three bits is still left in the address 5A04h, the 16-bit data is divided into lower three bits, middle eight bits, and upper five bits. Then, the lower three bits “100B” are stored in the address 5A04h as the upper three bits (arrow 18). In other words, the address 5A04h stores the data “10000010B” by combining “0000B”, which is a part of the binary data of the distribution value, with “00010B” of the differential address value as the lower bits.

  In the distribution value “1001110001000100B”, the middle 8 bits “10001000B” are stored in the address 5A05h (arrow 19), and the upper 5 bits “10011B” are stored as the lower 5 bits in the address 5A06h. (Arrow 20).

  Next, at the address 5A06h of the ROM, the storage capacity of the upper three bits is left, so the lower three bits of “04h” of “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02” in the data of the third row of the table are “100B”. Is stored as the upper 3 bits of the address 5A06h (arrow 21). Therefore, the address 5A06h is stored by combining a part of the table data of the second row and a part of the table data of the third row.

  The data in the third row and the fourth row in the following table also have 11 bits of the differential address value deleted to be 5 bits long, and the distribution value is 16 bits long, and is a 1-byte storage area ROM. Is stored in each address destination. At this time, the 5-bit and 16-bit table data are appropriately divided and stored in the ROM so that all of the 8-bit data are filled in at each address.

  Next, the storage state of the data in the fifth row of the table in the ROM will be described. Of the data in the fifth row of the table, "D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04" is "06h" (0110 in binary notation), and its 5-bit length is "00110B", but the least significant 1 bit is separated. The upper 4 bits “0011B” are stored in the address 5A0Ch as the lower 4 bits (arrow 22).

  Next, among the data in the fifth row of the table, the binary data “00000000010001000B” of the distribution value 136 is divided into lower 4 bits, middle 8 bits, and upper 4 bits, and the lower 4 bits “1000B” are addressed. The upper 4 bits are stored in 5A0Ch (arrow 23), and the middle 8 bits are stored in address 5A0Dh (arrow 24).

  The upper 4 bits “0000B” are stored in the address 5A0Eh as the lower 4 bits (arrow 25). However, since the address 5A0Eh has a space for the upper 4 bits, 4 bits are stored in the corresponding portion. Is supplemented (arrow 26).

  FIG. 155 is a view for explaining the format of reading data of the eighteenth embodiment by the CPU 111a. Here, the data from the address 5A00h to the address 5A0Dh is read by the code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”, and the data at the address 5A0Eh is read by the code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5”.

  First, on the assumption that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and the value obtained by multiplying A02h by 8 and converted into bits is stored in the HL register, the data stored in the address 5A02h and the address 5A03h are stored. Will be described. The read command here is “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”. This code is different from the code in FIG. 149 in that (HL +) and “plus” are added, which means that after reading into the BC register, the number of bits read out into the HL register is added. It is.

  In executing the instruction, since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of the HL register is A02h, a process of reading 16 bits from 5A02h obtained by adding A02h to 5000h is executed. The (A02h * 8) -th bit counted from bit 0 of 5000h, indicated by arrow 27, is the base point for reading. A02h * 8 is based on a 3-bit left shift operation by the above SQLA instruction.

  The one-byte data stored at the address 5A02h is "00110000B", and the one-byte data stored at the address 5A03h is "11110010B". Therefore, a 16-bit data is "1111001000110000B". (Arrow 28). The data is represented by F230h in hexadecimal, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register.

  Then, since “F230h” is read into the BC register, the HL register becomes “5020h” which is 5010h + 16, which is obtained by adding 16 which is the read bit length. Note that 5010h is the number of bits (A02h * 8). Then, since 5020h = A04h * 8 remainder 0, the next read position is from bit 0 of address 5A04h (arrow 29). Here, 5020h (20512 in decimal notation) is a value obtained by multiplying A04h (2564 in decimal notation) by 8, and the calculations here are all bit-converted.

  Next, a case will be described in which the distribution is advanced and the data stored in the address 5A0Bh and the address 5A0Ch of the second half variation selection table is read out using the code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains 5000h, and the value of the HL register is A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  In executing the instruction, the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h, and the value of HL is A0Bh * 8 + 7, so that bit 7 (arrow 30) of "5A0Bh" which is A08h * 8 + 7 at 5000h is read. It will be the starting point. Then, a process of reading 5 bits from bit 7 of “5A0Bh” is executed by the instruction. Since the data length stored in the bit 7 of the address 5A0Bh is only 1 bit, lower 4 bits are read from the next address 5A0Ch as an additional 4 bits (arrow 31).

  The data read out here is “00110B” (arrows 30 and 31) corresponding to the difference “06h”. However, since the storage destination C register has a 1-byte area, “000B” is supplemented for the missing three bits as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 32).

  Then, since the difference “06h” is read out to the C register, the HL register becomes “50564h”, which is 505Fh + 5 obtained by adding 5 which is the read bit length (arrow 33). Since 5064h = A0Ch * 8 remainder 4, the next read position is from bit 4 of address 5A0Ch. “505Fh” is the value of A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  In FIG. 155, the distribution values in the first row of the table are arranged in the ROM without using the pseudo instruction "BTA" of the assembler. However, the LQDB instruction can be used in any data area regardless of the arrangement of the table data. Data of an arbitrary number of bits (with an arbitrary bit length of 1 bit to 16 bits) can be read from the position.

  FIG. 156 is a program list of the two-byte distribution processing according to the eighteenth embodiment. The two-byte distribution process of the present embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and called by the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 150). The label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “LD DE, (HL +)” in the line number 11510 is a content for loading the address of the second half variation group table as a reference from the area corresponding to the address stored in the current HL register into the DE register. The address of the second half variation group table serving as a reference is the reference destination address of D_KOU_HZ01 (the address of the second half variation selection table), which is 5B00h when using an absolute address and 0B00h when using a relative address. After that, the value of the HL register is updated.

  The code “CQPW (HL), C_NOTHING” in the line number 11520 is a content for determining whether the data at the updated address is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING).

  The code “JRZ, SELW20” of the line number 11530 jumps to the SELW20 portion when the code is a non-distributed code, and otherwise reads the next line.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” of the row number 11540 is a content that shifts the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register by three bits to the left. By shifting left by 3 bits, the lower 13 bits of binary data are substantially raised to the second power of 3 (8 times), and the address value is converted into bits.

  First, the part of the SELW 20 will be described. The code “LD HL, DE” in the line number 11620 loads the address value stored in the DE register into the HL register, and assigns the address value of the data corresponding to the result of sorting ( This is the content to be updated to the second half variation selection table address value.

  Next, the process returns to the SELW10 part. The code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5” (addition read instruction) of the line number 11560 is obtained from the bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in the ROM is indicated by the number of bits) as follows. The content is to read 5-bit data and store it in the C register. As shown in FIG. 155, one of the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the read bit number.

  The code “ADD DE, C” of the line number 11570 is the content of adding the difference stored in the C register to the value of the DE register. In this way, the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” are sequentially added to the address 5B00h (or the relative address 0B00h) of the reference second-half variation group table, and are added to the value of the DE register. Will go.

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16” of line number 11580 (addition read instruction) is obtained from the bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in the ROM is indicated by the number of bits). The content is to read 16-bit data into the BC register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the read bit number. As shown in FIG. 155, distribution values are stored in the BC register.

  The code “SUB WA, BC” in the line number 11590 is the content of subtracting the distribution value from the random number value. By repeatedly executing the code of the row number 11590, the distribution values 62000, 2500, 600, 300, and 136 are sequentially subtracted from the random number value.

  The code “JR NC, SELW10” of the line number 11600 returns to the beginning of the loop processing when the result of the subtraction is not negative, and reads the next line when the result is negative. When the result of the subtraction becomes negative, the updating of the value of the DE register at the row number 11570 is stopped, and the value of the address value of the data (address value of the second-half variation selection table) corresponding to the result of the distribution is finally set. Is obtained by the value of the DE register.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the reference address value of the table of each row is not the difference (FIG. 153) from the reference address value of the table of the previous row, but the table of the first row. The present invention can be applied to a case where the difference is a difference from the reference destination address value. That is, "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the second row of the second half fluctuation group table labeled "D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1", and "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the third row. Further, the present embodiment may be applied assuming that “D_KOU_HZ04−D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fourth row and “D_KOU_HZ05−D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fifth row.

  In the case of FIG. 157, the difference values “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” described in the table on the left of FIG. 154 are replaced with “02h”, “06h”, “10h”, and “16h”. Is compressed, and the present embodiment is applied.

[Operation and Effect of Eighteenth Embodiment]
As described above, according to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game when a predetermined start condition (for example, a game ball enters or passes through a start winning area or a gate) is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed. A game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player when a game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and an arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means includes a conversion command (for example, “SQLA HL, 3”) for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating a predetermined number of address values of the storage area read from the game control program storage means, and a starting point of the bit conversion value ( A predetermined bit length to be read is specified as a start position, and each time data of a predetermined bit length is read, an addition read instruction (for example, “LQDB”) that calculates a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to the predetermined bit length to a bit conversion value. BC, (HL +). 16 "). The data of the predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads out the distribution value or a value associated with the distribution value in accordance with the addition reading instruction. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation executing means (the instruction interpretation executing circuit 1242) may include such a conversion instruction and an addition reading instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (the difference address value in FIGS. 153 and 154) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, data can be read from an arbitrary position in the data area with an arbitrary bit length from 1 bit length to 16 bit length by the addition read instruction (LQDB instruction).

  Therefore, by setting the read position in accordance with the state of the data arranged in the ROM and setting the read bit length, the compressed data can be read and the data can be restored, and the degree of compression (deletion) Bit length) can be arbitrarily determined. After reading out the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value with the addition reading instruction, the next reading position is set without executing another instruction by the executed addition reading instruction. , Continuous reading can be easily executed.

  If the data read continuously with an arbitrary bit length has a bit length of less than 8 bits or 16 bits, the missing digit (the number of missing bits) is automatically set to 0 data. Therefore, the data can be read as 8-bit data or 16-bit data regardless of the compression state of the data stored in the ROM.

  As described above, in the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the embodiment has been described using the code of the program list. However, the register in the code of each embodiment can be replaced with another register. For example, the addition address “IY +. .. ”as well as“ IX +... ”And“ HL +. When a plurality of registers are used in the code of each embodiment, the combination of the plurality of registers may be arbitrarily or may be replaced. For example, the code “LQDB, (DE +)” (stored in the DE register) The code for updating the address value of the DE register after storing the value of the address value area stored in the B register) and the code “AQND C, (WA +)” (the value of the address value area stored in the WA register and C) A code for updating the address value of the WA register after calculating the logical product of the register values can also be used.

[Nineteenth Embodiment]
The nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 165. Configurations not particularly described below may be the same configurations as the embodiments from the first embodiment to the eighteenth embodiment.

  The nineteenth embodiment is an embodiment regarding an operation effect related to the operation of the operation unit. The operation effect is performed by operating one operation unit in one mode, by operating each of a plurality of operation units (composite operation), or by operating any one operation unit. Includes operations performed in multiple modes (composite operations). For example, the plurality of operation units are a production button switch 25a that is a main body of the production button of the production button 25, and a touch panel 25b installed on the upper surface of the production button switch 25a. One of the switch 25a and the touch panel 25b.

  Hereinafter, one of the effect button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b constitutes a first operation unit (first operation means), and the other constitutes a second operation unit (second operation means). In the present embodiment, the effect button switch 25a particularly constitutes a first operation unit (first operation means) and the touch panel 25b constitutes a second operation unit (second operation means). Conversely, the touch panel 25b may constitute a first operation section (first operation means), and the effect button switch 25a may constitute a second operation section (second operation means).

  In addition, the operation effect by the operation of the first operation unit (first operation) is the first operation effect, the operation effect by the operation of the second operation unit (second operation) is the second operation effect, and the first operation and the second operation are performed. An operation effect by a composite operation that executes both may be referred to as a composite operation effect. Note that the two types of operations on the single operation unit may be the first operation and the second operation, respectively.

  Note that the operation effect is an effect related to the operation, and is a display effect on the display device 41, an operation effect of a movable character included in the board effect device 44, a light emitting effect of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, a speaker effect. And a combination of these effects. In addition, the operation effect is an operation promotion display (prompt effect, pre-operation process) for prompting the player to perform an operation, and an operation-response effect (post-operation effect, Post-operation processing), or both. The operation promotion display is, for example, display of an operation promotion image on the display device 41 or light emission of the LED 690 of the effect button 25.

(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable effect setting process according to the nineteenth embodiment. The variable effect setting processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1905 of the variable command processing (FIG. 92).

  First, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (a variation that does not reach the reach state) (B4401). If the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (result of B4401 is “Y”), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode is set (B4402), and the variation is performed. The MODE part of the system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure type are acquired (B4403). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations increases, and therefore, the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired. The number of points is the number of owned points or the number of points acquired during the game (FIG. 94). The model code can be known from the model designation command. The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. The effect mode is known from the effect mode information included in the probability information command.

  If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B4401 is “N”), that is, if the variation pattern type is the variation with reach, the effect control device 300 sets the number of points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type. The corresponding first-half announcement distribution group address table is set (B4404), and the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the address of the first-half announcement distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B4405).

  After steps B4403 and B4405, effect control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice that appears during the first half change (before reach) (B4406). The notice that appears during the first half change (pre-reach notice) includes, for example, a dialogue notice that displays a dialogue on the display device 41. Subsequently, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, a model code, a special figure type, an effect mode, and a symbol type is set (B4407), and the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variation command is set. Is acquired (B4408), and a lottery of a notice appearing during the latter half change (during reach) is performed (B4409). The notices appearing during the latter half of the fluctuation (post-reach notice, during-reach notice) include, for example, a fueling effect (a fueling warning effect) that raises the player's expectations and informs the degree of expectation of the jackpot. The fanning effect is a moving image display effect or a still image display effect on the display device 41, an operation effect of a movable character included in the board effect device 44, a light emitting effect of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, or a combination thereof. including. Further, as a flirting effect, the middle symbol 893 may be caused to fluctuate (special fluctuation) as shown in FIGS. 115 and 117. The flirting effect may be performed immediately before the end of the special figure change display game (stop of change, display of stop symbols).

  After that, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variable command (variable command) (B4410). In addition, the fluctuation time and the main reach content can be known from the fluctuation command. In the present embodiment, the fluctuating effect is an effect related to the fluctuating display of the special decoration pattern (identification information) on the display device 41, and the fluctuating mode of the special decoration pattern (including the reach effect and the pseudo continuous fluctuation) and the reach. Including movie display in production.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B4411). Then, an operation effect for each notice (pre-reach notice, post-reach notice), that is, an operation effect executed in connection with each notice is selected by lottery (B4412). That is, in each announcement effect, a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the first operation effect, the second operation effect, or the composite operation effect.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the first operation effect is an operation effect for the operation of the effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25 (that is, the main body of the effect button, the first operation unit), and the second operation effect is the effect button 25 is an operation effect for the operation of the touch panel 25b (touch sensor, second operation unit), and the composite operation effect is for both the operation of the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit) and the operation of the touch panel 25b (second operation unit). This is an operation effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets an operation effective period and an operation type corresponding to the operation effect selected by the lottery (B4413). The operation valid period is an operation detectable period in which the operation of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 can be detected, and the effect control device 300 sets the start timing, the end timing, and the length of the operation valid period. . Regarding the operation of the touch panel 25b, the operation types include a hand-holding operation (operation for covering for a long time with a hand), a swipe operation (operation for touching with a finger and sliding), and a flick operation (operation for touching and playing with a finger). ). Regarding the effect button switch 25a (that is, the main body of the effect button), the operation type is a press operation such as a single-press operation (single operation), a long-press operation, and a continuous hit operation.

  After that, the effect control device 300 determines a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game according to the content of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the preview effect (B4414). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, a stray eye is determined in the case of a missing symbol. Next, effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variable effect (B4415), and performs display setting of the notice effect (B4416).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of an operation prompting display such as an operation prompting image for prompting the player to perform an operation as an operation prompting display of the operation effect for each notice (pre-operation effect) (B4417). The display setting of the operation corresponding effect (effect after operation) executed in response to the operation performed in the operation effect of (444) is performed.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decrease of the hold corresponding to the special figure type, and for example, a display is set such that the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is reduced (B4419). That is, the display of the hold shift (ie, when the hold display 633 is moved) is set, and the setting information relating to the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift is read. The setting information relating to the pending change notice is information set and saved in steps B4720 to B4723 of the prefetch variable command processing (FIG. 160) described later.

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 sets a voice number that determines the effect mode of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device (B4420). Next, the display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B4421), and the fourth special design (fourth design) other than the above-described first to third special designs that fluctuate on the display device 41 is set. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation is performed (B4422). The fourth symbol change may be displayed on the display device 41, or may be displayed on a lamp display device provided other than the display device 41.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetching symbol command processing according to the nineteenth embodiment. The pre-reading symbol command processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1214 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, if the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number It is determined whether the command is a command (B4601). When the latest suspension information is the information of the special figure 1 reservation (result of B4601 is “Y”), the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations. Save (B4602).

  If the latest suspension information is not the special figure 1 reservation information (result of B4601 is “N”), effect controller 300 is the decoration special figure reservation number command received most recently is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number (B4603).

  After steps B4602 and B4603, effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variable command (B4604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the game control device 100 transmits the pre-reading symbol system command followed by the pre-reading variable system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol command processing ends.

[Prefetch variable command processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch variable command processing according to the nineteenth embodiment. The prefetch variation command processing is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1216 of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80).

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch variation command (B4701). When the aforementioned prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (B4604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of the prefetch variable command is waiting. When the reception of the prefetch variable command is not waiting (the result of B4701 is “N”), the prefetch variable command processing ends. If the reception of the prefetch variable command is waiting (result of B4701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B4702).

  Next, effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B4703), The sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B4704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B4705), and a sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B4706).

  Next, effect control apparatus 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B4707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion are other than 0 (result of B4707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and the number of pending. In the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) (B4708). Then, a pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B4709), and it is determined whether the combination of the converted MODE and ACT units is normal (B4710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the change starts the change display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, a longer first half change occurs, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, a shorter first half change occurs. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half change is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

  Further, since the type of the reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal prefetching change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 uses the ACT part (the value of the latter half variation) of the prefetch variation command as it is without converting it, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop and miss, normal reach +1 stop and miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT units indicating the reach of the same system into the same sub-internal prefetch variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE section and the ACT section (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE section and the ACT section) is 0 (the result of B4707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is not normal (result of B4710 is "N"), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is terminated.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is normal (result of B4710 is “Y”), effect controller 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variable command area. (B4711), a prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B4712). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending prefetch notice effect is generated (B4713). When the latest pending prefetch announcement effect occurs (result of B4713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B4714).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetch notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (B4715). An effect that starts immediately includes, for example, a notice of a change in hold when a hold occurs. In the case where the generated prefetching effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B4715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B4716). Here, the display of the advance notice of the change when the hold occurs is set. A display setting for changing the form of suspension is performed as the suspension change notice. For example, the color of the hold display is changed from a normal color (for example, white) to black, blue, green, and red, or the shape of the hold display is changed to a shape different from the normal shape, according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. .

  Then, effect control device 300 performs a lottery of the operation effect for the suspension change notice when the suspension occurs (B4717). That is, in connection with the suspension change notice at the time of occurrence of the suspension, the lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the first operation effect, the second operation effect, or the composite operation effect. Then, an operation validity period and an operation type corresponding to the operation effect selected by the lottery are set (B4718), and an operation prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed as an operation prompting display of the operation effect for the suspension change notice (pre-operation effect). The display setting of the operation promotion display such as the promotion image is performed (B4719). Thereafter, the prefetch variation command processing ends.

  If the prefetch notice effect that is to be performed is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B4715 is “N”), that is, if the effect starts at the time of a hold shift, a prefetch effect at the time of a hold shift (when the hold display 633 moves) is used. The corresponding display is set and saved (B4720). Here, the display of the suspension change notice at the time of the suspension shift is set and saved. As the suspension change notice, display setting for changing the form of suspension (color, pattern, shape, etc.) is performed.

  Then, the effect control device 300 executes a lottery of the operation effect for the suspension change notice at the time of the suspension shift (B4721). That is, in connection with the suspension change notice at the time of the suspension shift, the lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the first operation effect, the second operation effect, or the composite operation effect. Then, the operation validity period and the operation type corresponding to the operation effect selected by the lottery are set and saved (B4722), and the operation is prompted to the player as the operation prompting display of the operation effect for the suspension change notice (pre-operation effect). The display of the operation promotion display such as the operation promotion image is set and saved (B4723). Thereafter, the prefetch variation command processing ends.

[Direction button input processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect button input processing according to the nineteenth embodiment. The effect button input process is executed by effect controller 300 in step B1009 of the main process (FIG. 78).

  First, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a touch panel operation effective period (operation detectable period) in which operation of touch panel 25b (touch sensor) of effect button 25 can be detected (B5001). If it is not the touch panel operation valid period (the result of B5001 is “N”), detection of touch panel operation (operation of the touch panel 25b) is set to invalid (B5002), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5011. If it is the touch panel operation validity period (result of B5001 is “Y”), detection of touch panel operation is set to be valid (B5003).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a touch panel operation has been detected (B5004). If a touch panel operation has not been detected (the result of B5004 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5011. When a touch panel operation is detected (result of B5004 is “Y”), the touch panel operation type is determined and stored for the operation of the touch panel 25b (B5005).

  The touch panel operation types include a hand-hold operation, a swipe operation, and a flick operation. Although a method of determining these operations is known, for example, the hand-holding operation can be determined when there is detection at a wide detection site on the touch panel 25b and the detection site does not change continuously for a predetermined long time or longer. For example, the swipe operation can be determined when there is a detection at a narrow detection part on the touch panel 25b and the detection part moves a relatively long distance. For example, a flick operation can be determined when there is detection at a narrow detection site on the touch panel 25b and the detection site moves a relatively short distance in a predetermined short time.

  In the present embodiment, the touch panel 25b is a capacitive touch sensor that receives an input operation from a player. On the lower surface (back surface) of the touch panel 25b, an electronic component for processing information on a touch panel operation by a player as an electric signal is installed, and the information on the touch panel operation is detected by the effect control device 300 as an electric signal (operation signal). Is done. Since the touch panel 25b is of the capacitance type, the hand-holding operation can be detected only by bringing the hand close to the surface of the touch panel 25b, even if the hand does not completely touch (touch) the touch panel 25b. The touch panel 25b may be a touch sensor other than the capacitance type. In that case, however, the hand operation may be difficult to detect unless the hand touches (contacts) the touch panel 25b.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined touch panel operation type is the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period in step B5001 (B5006). In steps B4413, B4718, and B4722 described above, the touch panel operation validity period and the touch panel operation type are set in association with each other. If the determined touch panel operation type is not the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period (result of B5006 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B5011.

  If the determined touch panel operation type is the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period (result of B5006 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets the composite corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period of step B5001. It is determined whether or not an operation effect has been set (B5007). That is, in steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, it is determined whether or not the touch panel operation validity period is set corresponding to the composite operation effect.

  When the composite operation effect corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period is not set (result of B5007 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of the operation corresponding effect accompanying the touch panel operation (operation of touch panel 25b). Then, the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5010). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  If the composite operation effect corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period is set (result of B5007 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets a touch panel operation flag indicating that a touch panel operation has been performed (B5009). Then, the touch panel operation detection is set invalid (B5010).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation valid period (operation detectable period) in which operation of effect button switch 25a (main body of the effect button) can be detected (B5011). If it is not the button operation valid period (the result of B5011 is “N”), the detection of the button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a) is set to invalid (B5012), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5021. If it is the button operation valid period (the result of B5011 is “Y”), the detection of the button operation is set to be valid (B5013).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation has been detected (B5014). If there is no button operation (result of B5014 is "N"), the effect button input processing ends. If a button operation is detected (result of B5014 is “Y”), the button operation type for the operation of effect button switch 25a is determined and stored (B5015).

  The button operation types include a single-press operation, a long-press operation, a continuous hit operation, and the like. Although a method of determining these operations is known, for example, a single-press operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is pressed and turned on only once in a predetermined short time. For example, a long press operation can be determined when the pressed state (on state) of the effect button switch 25a is maintained for a predetermined long time. For example, the continuous hitting operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is turned on and off a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. The effect button switch 25a is turned on by being detected by an optical sensor or a magnetic sensor when it is pressed and moved, and is kept off when it is not pressed.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period in step B5011 (B5016). In the above-described steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the button operation valid period and the button operation type are set in association with each other. If the determined button operation type is not the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period (result of B5016 is “N”), the effect button input process ends.

  If the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period (result of B5016 is "Y"), effect controller 300 indicates that a touch panel operation has been performed. It is determined whether or not is set (B5017). That is, it is determined whether the composite operation has been completed.

  When the touch panel operation flag is not set (result of B5017 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of an operation-related effect associated with a button operation (operation of effect button switch 25a) (B5018). Then, the detection of the button operation is invalidated (B5021). For example, the operation corresponding effect here is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 (including a change in the suspension display relating to the suspension change notice) and an operation of the movable role.

  When the touch panel operation flag is set (result of B5017 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines that there has been a touch panel operation in addition to the button operation (that is, that there has been a composite operation). The execution information of the operation corresponding effect accompanying the composite operation is set (B5019). For example, the operation corresponding effect here is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory. After that, the touch panel operation flag is cleared (B5020), the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5021), and the effect button input processing ends.

  As described above, the first operation (here, the button operation), the second operation (here, the touch panel operation), or the composite operation (both the button operation and the touch panel operation) selected by lottery are performed by the control of FIGS. ), The operation promotion display (pre-operation effect) and / or the operation-response effect (post-operation effect) can be executed as the operation effect in association with the predetermined effect. Thereby, the operation effect by the operation selected by the lottery is executed in association with the predetermined effect, and the fun of the predetermined effect increases, and the interest of the game can be improved because the player can intervene in the effect by various operations. .

  Note that the predetermined effects include a pre-reach announcement effect (for example, a dialogue announcement), a post-reach announcement effect (fanning effect), a suspension change announcement when a suspension occurs, a suspension change announcement during a suspension shift, and the like. In addition, in order to execute the operation effect in relation to the predetermined effect, the operation effect is executed as the predetermined effect itself, as a part of the predetermined effect, or as a predetermined effect. And executing the program at a slightly different timing from a predetermined effect.

  FIGS. 162 (A) and (B) are examples of tables showing the operation selectivity for a predetermined effect (that is, the operation effect selectivity). The effect control device 300 stores this table in a ROM or the like, and can refer to the operation effect lottery in steps B4412, B4717, and B4721.

  For example, with respect to the dialogue effect, the probability that the first operation unit operation (operation of the first operation unit) that is easy to operate is selected, that is, the selectivity of the first operation effect is high, and the second operation unit operation (second operation) that is difficult to operate is selected. (The operation of the operation unit) is selected, that is, the selectivity of the second operation effect is set low (here, 0%). In addition, since the line effect needs to be performed in a short time, the selectivity of the composite operation (composite operation effect) for operating the first operation unit and the second operation unit depends on the first operation unit operation and the second operation unit operation. And is preferably set to several percent or less (0% in (A), 3% in (B)). The speech effect is an example of an effect before the occurrence of a reach, or an example of a notice effect (first effect) relating to the result of the currently displayed fluctuation display game (the fluctuation). In the line effect, when an operation is performed, a line is displayed as an operation corresponding effect.

  Regarding the fanning effect, for example, the selectivity of the first operation unit operation (first operation effect) is 80%, the selectivity of the second operation unit operation (second operation effect) is 15%, for example, and the composite operation (composite operation effect) ) Is, for example, 5%. Note that the provoking effect is an example of an effect after the occurrence of a reach, or an example of a notice effect (first effect) relating to the result of the currently displayed fluctuation display game (the fluctuation). When an operation is performed in the stir-up effect, for example, an image is displayed or a movable character operates as an operation-corresponding effect. A plurality of stir effects may occur after the reach occurs, and the selectivity of the first operation, the second operation, the composite operation, and the no operation may be different for each type of stir effect. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect from being monotonous due to the first operation, the second operation, and the composite operation always occurring at the same ratio in each of the stir effects. Further, the flirting effect may be performed immediately before the end of the special figure change display game (stop of change, display of stop symbols).

  With respect to the notice of a change in hold when a hold occurs or a hold shift is performed, the selectivity of the first operation unit operation that is easy to operate may be set high, and the selectivity of the second operation unit operation that is difficult to operate may be set low, but is not limited thereto. . In the pending change notice, since the operation effect needs to be performed more quickly than the fanning effect, the selectivity of the composite operation (composite operation effect) is lower than the selectivity of the first operation unit operation, for example, 1%. Is set to less than. Either the selectivity of the composite operation (composite operation effect) or the selectivity of the operation of the second operation unit may be larger or the same. Further, regarding the pending change notice, the selection rate without operation may be the highest.

  The pending change notice (second effect) is an example of a look-ahead effect relating to the result of the variable display game to be executed in the next and subsequent times (in the future), and the pending change notice may be replaced with another look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice. it can. In the suspension change notice, when an operation is performed, the form of suspension changes as an operation corresponding effect.

  Since the winning timing at which the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is random, the change notice of the hold at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the tanning effect or the line effect are overlapped, and the combined operation (the combined operation) Production) may occur at the same time. In this case, for example, it is difficult to make an adjustment such as performing two operations corresponding to one composite operation, and even if the adjustment is performed, the effect may be uncomfortable. For example, it is necessary to match the composite operation of the pending change notice, which needs to be performed very simply and briefly, with the relatively long composite operation in the fanning or speech production, which causes a sense of incongruity. Alternatively, even when the hold change notice and the line effect at the time of the hold shift overlap, and the occurrence timing of the composite operation (composite operation effect) in both of them overlaps, for example, two operation corresponding effects are performed by one composite operation. Adjustment is difficult, and even if it is adjusted, the effect is uncomfortable.

  In addition, even if the generation timing of the composite operation and the single operation (the first operation or the second operation) overlap, the adjustment is relatively easy because the first operation and the second operation are included in the composite operation. Yes, there is little discomfort even after adjustment. Further, the occurrence timing of a composite operation having a long entire operation validity period and a single operation (a first operation or a second operation) having a short total operation validity period rarely overlap.

  Therefore, in the operation distribution tables (operation effect distribution tables) of FIGS. 162 (A) and (B), the ratio (composite operation) in which the composite operation (composite operation effect) is selected in the first effect (fanning effect or dialogue effect) (Selection rate) and the ratio (composite operation selection rate) at which the composite operation (composite operation effect) is selected in the second effect (hold change notice at the time of hold occurrence or hold shift). That is, the ratio at which the composite operation effect is executed in relation to the first effect and the ratio at which the composite operation effect is executed in relation to the second effect of a type different from the first effect are set differently. As a result, the occurrence timing of the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the first effect and the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the second effect is rarely duplicated, and it is less likely that the effect will be uncomfortable. Produces an effect. Further, by making the ratio at which the composite operation is selected different between the first effect and the second effect in this way, there is an effect that the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. By making the rate at which the composite operation is selected different between a specific effect of the first effect (for example, a fantastic effect) and a specific effect of the second effect (for example, a change notice when a hold occurs). This also produces the above effects.

  For example, the selectivity of the compound operation in the first effect is set to a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the compound operation in the second effect is equal to or less than a second predetermined value (for example, 0.4%). May be set to Alternatively, the selection rate of the composite operation in the second effect is set to a fraction or less (for example, 1/8) of the selection rate of the composite operation in the first effect. In short, if one of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the composite operation in the second effect is set to 0%, the composite operation in the first effect and the compound operation in the second effect It is possible to completely prevent the occurrence timings of the operations from being duplicated, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being uncomfortable.

  In addition, for example, when the occurrence timing of the composite operation in the first effect and the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect overlaps and the effect is uncomfortable, the composite operation in the first effect Is set to a first predetermined value (eg, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to a second predetermined value (eg, 0.3%) or less. May do it. Alternatively, in this case, the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to a fraction of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect (for example, one-fifth or less). ) May be set. In short, if either one of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to 0% (in FIG. The selection rate of the second operation in the second effect is 0%), and the occurrence timing of the composite operation in the first effect and the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect can be completely prevented, There will be no discomfort in the production.

  In addition, as in the modification example of FIG. 163, when the variable display game is a big hit (A) and when it is out of the case (B), a specific effect (propelling effect) is obtained using a different operation distribution table. By changing the selectivity of the operation (the first operation, the second operation, the composite operation), the degree of expectation of a big hit can be changed in each operation of a specific effect (fanning effect), and the interest of the game can be improved. In the example of FIG. 163, the composite operation in the fanning effect has an expectation of 90% (= 45% / (45% + 5%)), the second operation has an expectation of 67.7%, and the first operation has An expectation of 67.7% and an expectation of 23.8%.

  FIGS. 164A and 164B are diagrams illustrating an example of a composite operation by operating a plurality of operation units. That is, it is a diagram illustrating an example of a composite operation of operating a plurality of operation units (a first operation unit and a second operation unit).

  In FIG. 164A, as an example of the composite operation, after the operation of the touch panel 25b as the second operation unit (the operation of the second operation unit) is performed, the pressing operation of the effect button switch 25a as the first operation unit (the first operation) (Operation of a part) is shown (solid arrow). The operation types of the operation on the touch panel 25b include the hand-holding operation, the swipe operation, and the flick operation as described above. As described above, the pressing operation of the effect button switch 25a includes a single pressing operation (single operation), a long pressing operation, and a continuous hitting operation.

  Conversely, after the operation of the effect button switch 25a as the first operation unit (the first operation unit operation) is performed, the operation of the touch panel 25b as the second operation unit (the second operation unit operation) is performed. (Dotted arrow). In this case, in the operation distribution table of FIG. 162, a composite operation (first composite operation) in which operations are performed in the order of the second operation unit operation → the first operation unit operation, and a first operation unit operation → a second operation unit operation The selection rate may be separately determined for the composite operation (the second composite operation) in which the operations are performed in the following order, and a different operation distribution table is provided for the case of a big hit and a case of a big hit as shown in FIG. The expectations of the first composite operation and the second composite operation may be different. If there are two types of compound operations, the first compound operation and the second compound operation, or if the first compound operation and the second compound operation have different expectations, the compound operation becomes more interesting and the interest of the game is improved.

  In FIG. 164B, as an example of the composite operation, after the effect button switch 752a as the second operation unit is pressed (the second operation unit is operated), the lever 752b as the first operation unit is pulled down (the second operation unit). 1 operation section operation) (solid arrow). After the lever 752b is pulled down, the effect button switch 752a may be pressed (dotted arrow). Here, the effect button switch 752a may be a normal effect button without a touch panel.

  The effect button switch 752a and the lever 752b constitute a lever 752 with a button. The lever 752 with a button is pivotally supported by the glass frame 15 at the lever mounting portion 753 by providing a lever mounting portion 753 below the glass frame 15. The lever 752b has a shaft 752c, and is swingable (rotatable) around the shaft 752c. When the lever 752b is pulled down, the lever 752b is detected by an optical sensor or a magnetic sensor, and a detection signal is output. It is input to effect control device 300 via switch input circuit 336.

[Screen transition]
FIGS. 165A to 165D are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the nineteenth embodiment, and are examples of screen transition of the entire game.

  In (c) of FIG. 165A, the special figure variable display game is being executed in the variable display area 610 with a decorative special symbol of a normal size, and being executed in the variable display area 615 with a decorative reduced symbol. The first hold display unit 630a has three hold displays 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory, and a hold corresponding display 633a as a hold display during digestion (during change) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. ing. At the present time, the second hold display section 630b does not have a hold display (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory. The special figure 1 hold number display section 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 show a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. The indicated numeral "0" is displayed.

  Next, in (h), a game ball wins in the start winning port 36, a first start memory is generated, and a hold display 633 corresponding to the generated first start memory is displayed on the first hold display section 630a. You. Further, by winning in the prefetch lottery process (B4712), the suspension change notice at the time of occurrence of suspension starts (B4713-B4716). The operation effect selected in the operation effect lottery (B4717) starts in association with the suspension change notice at the time of occurrence of the hold, and the button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed. Here, the first operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. Further, the hold display 633 generated as part of the hold change notice is blinking. Further, another effect may be performed, for example, when a character appears as part of the suspension change notice.

  When the first operation effect is selected, an image display 636a (including a character display such as "press a button" or "PUSH") that prompts the user to press a button, and a gauge 636b indicating the operable time are displayed. Button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed. If the second operation effect is selected, a touch panel operation promotion display 639 described later is displayed. On the gauge 636b, the remaining operable time (white portion) and the elapsed time (black portion) are displayed by meters. The length (width) of the gauge corresponds to the operation valid period (operation detectable period).

  In (f), when the player performs a button pressing operation (first operation unit operation, first operation) on the effect button switch 25a as the set operation type (B4718) (B5016), an operation corresponding effect is obtained. The form of the hold display changes. Here, as an example, a single-press operation is performed as the set button operation type, and the color of the hold display changes. Here, as the operation-response effect, an image may be displayed or a sound may be generated from a speaker. As described above, the set operation type (B4718) may be a touch panel operation (second operation unit operation, second operation) or a composite operation (button pressing operation and touch panel operation). May be a long press operation or a continuous hit operation.

  After that, in (f), the special figure change display game is ended, and the stop result (stop symbol) of the special figure change display game is displayed in an outlier result mode.

  Subsequently, in (e), the hold display 633 moves one step to the right (hold shift), and the next special figure change display game starts. By winning in the pre-read lottery process (B4712), the suspension change notice at the time of the suspension shift starts (B4713-B4720). In association with the suspension change notice at the time of the suspension shift, the operation effect selected in the operation effect lottery (B4721) starts, and the button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed. Here, the first operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. Further, the hold display 633 generated as part of the hold change notice is blinking. Further, another effect may be performed, for example, when a character appears as part of the suspension change notice. The button operation promotion display 636 here is the same as the suspension change notice at the time of (H) suspension occurrence, but a different button operation promotion display 636 may be displayed.

  In (M), when the player performs a button pressing operation (first operation unit operation, first operation) on the effect button switch 25a as the set operation type (B4722) (B5016), an operation corresponding effect is obtained. The form of the hold display 633 changes. Here, as an example, a single push operation is performed as the set button operation type, and the color and shape of the hold display 633 are changed. Here, as the operation-response effect, an image may be displayed or a sound may be generated from a speaker. In addition, as the operation corresponding effect in the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift, the form of the hold corresponding display 633a which is the hold display moved to the hold digestion area 640 may be changed.

  Thereafter, in (M), a dialogue announcement before reach (B4406) is started. The operation effect selected in the operation effect lottery (B4412) starts in association with the dialogue notice, and the button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed. Here, the first operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. If the second operation effect is selected, a touch panel operation promotion display 639 described later is displayed. Further, as a part of a speech notice, a character or the like emitting speech on the screen may appear. The operation prompting display 636 here is the same as the suspension change notice at the time of (c) suspension occurrence, but may be different. It should be noted that a plurality of dialogue notices may be generated at different timings.

  In (m), when the player performs a button press operation (first operation unit operation, first operation) on the effect button switch 25a as the set operation type (B4413) (B5016), an operation corresponding effect is obtained. Words are displayed in words. Here, as an example, a single-push operation as the set button operation type is performed, and a line (“Chance!”) Is displayed. In this case, a speech sound may be generated from a speaker as the operation-response effect. As described above, the set operation type (B4413) may be a touch panel operation (second operation unit operation, second operation) or a composite operation (button pressing operation and touch panel operation). May be a long press operation or a continuous hit operation.

  Thereafter, in (M), the two decorative special symbols stop at the same symbol in the left area 610a and the right area 610b of the plurality of variable display areas 610, and the decorative special symbol fluctuates in the remaining middle area 610c. A reach occurs that keeps displaying.

  In (m), immediately before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game after the occurrence of the reach (final phase), a swaying effect (here, a group notice) (set in B4409) starts. A movie of a meteor shower is displayed on the screen as a stir-up effect. It should be noted that not only one stir effect but also a plurality of stir effects may be generated at different timings after the occurrence of the reach, and an operation effect may be performed in each stir effect. Thereby, it becomes a lively performance and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as a flirting effect, the middle symbol 893 may be fluctuated and fluctuated as shown in FIGS.

  Subsequently, in (a), the operation effect selected in the operation effect lottery (B4412) is started in relation to the fanning effect. Here, the composite operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. The touch panel operation validity period (B5001) starts, and a touch panel operation promotion display 639 (operation promotion image) is displayed. For example, the touch panel operation promotion display 639 includes an image display 639a that prompts the user to perform a hand operation on the touch panel 25b (second operation unit) as the set touch panel operation type. The image display 639a has a character display such as "Holding Hands", "Hold Hands" or "Place Hands" to indicate the operation mode. Further, the touch panel operation promotion display 639 includes a meter 639b indicating the operation time, an image display 639c (an image indicating the operation unit to be operated) imitating the touch panel 25b (second operation unit) indicating the touch panel 25b itself. May be included. The meter 639b displays the operation continuation time, which is the time during which the hand-over operation is being performed (black portion). The black portion changes in a direction extending in one direction (right side) as the operation duration increases. The operation of the touch panel 25b may be a swipe operation or a flick operation instead of the hand-hold operation. When the operation continuation time of the touch panel 25b is equal to or longer than a predetermined long time (for example, 90% of the touch panel operation validity period), it is determined that there is a hand-over operation (set touch panel operation type) (B5006).

  In (i), after the operation continuation time display (black portion) of the meter 639b reaches the vicinity of the right end of the meter 639b and the hand-over operation is completed, the button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed. This prompts a button press operation on the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit). Note that, here, the meter 639b is continuously displayed as the gauge 636b, but a gauge 636b indicating the operation valid period of the effect button switch 25a may be displayed as in (h), (e), and (mi). .

  Note that the button operation promotion display 636 and the touch panel operation promotion display 639 of (a) and (li) may be collectively displayed as one display. For example, a character display such as "press the button after holding the hand" may be displayed.

  In (l), the player performs a button press operation as the set button operation type (B4413), and performs a composite operation (both the first operation unit and the second operation unit) related to the selected composite operation effect (B4412). When the (operation) is completed (B5016, B5017), an image 642 (here, clouds or smoke) is displayed as an operation corresponding effect to the execution of the composite operation. The image 642 may be displayed on the front side so as to hide the fluttering effect and the variable display in the middle region 610c in preference to the fluttering effect (meteor shower) and the variable display of the special decoration in the middle region 610c. Thereby, the operation corresponding effect is displayed so as to be conspicuous.

  In addition, when a composite operation effect is executed in connection with the tanning effect, at the same time, if another compound operation effect is also executed due to a notice of a change in hold when a hold occurs, a sense of incongruity occurs. The ratio of executing the composite operation effect in relation to the change notice (second effect) is set to be very small (for example, 0.3% or less) unlike the fanning effect (first effect), and the fanning effect (second effect) is set. There is almost no chance that the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the first effect overlaps with the occurrence timing of the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the pending change notice (second effect).

  On the other hand, in (ル), the player does not perform the button pressing operation, and the composite operation (the operation on both the first operation unit and the second operation unit) related to the selected composite operation effect (B4412) is not completed ( B5016, B5017), the image 642 (here, clouds or smoke) is not displayed as the operation-response effect.

  Next, in (v), immediately after the operation corresponding to the composite operation is performed in (v), the special figure change display game ends, and the stop result (stop symbol) of the special figure change display game is a big hit result. It is displayed in a mode (special result mode). This makes it possible to give an impression that the stop symbol of the middle symbol 893 suddenly appears from the image 642 (here, clouds or smoke) covering the middle region 610c by the composite operation. Even if the composite operation is not completed, it does not affect the result of the special figure change display game. Therefore, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, even after (R ′), as in (Re), The result of stopping the special figure change display game is displayed in a jackpot result mode.

  On the other hand, in (レ ′), after the operation corresponding to the composite operation is performed in (）), the special figure change display game ends, and the stop result (stop symbol) of the special figure change display game is lost. Is displayed with. Note that even if the composite operation is not completed, the result of the special figure change display game is not affected. Therefore, if the result of the special figure change display game is out of order, even after (R ′), even after (R ′), Thus, the stop result of the special figure change display game is lost and the result mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (b), since the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, a round game of the big hit starts. In the case where the result of the special figure change display game is out of order as in (（′), the next special figure change display game starts.

  In (b), music change (music selection) during a big hit can be performed by a combined operation of the touch panel 25b and the effect button switch 25a. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of music pieces stored in the sound ROM 327 (voice ROM) are displayed on the menu display 644. The player can change the highlighted music on the menu display 644 by swiping the touch panel 25b, and select and determine the highlighted music by pressing the effect button switch 25a. When the composite operation is completed, the effect control device 300 changes the music output from the speaker from the music A to the music C, for example.

  In (Y), the volume adjustment and the LED brightness adjustment during the big hit can be performed only by a swipe operation on the touch panel 25b. On the screen of the display device 41, the above-described volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for adjusting the volume and the above-described luminance adjustment display 815 (gauge) for adjusting the LED brightness are displayed. Either volume adjustment or LED brightness adjustment is selected by a vertical swipe operation on the touch panel 25b (operation by the movement of a finger in the vertical direction). If the item displayed in the specific display mode such as the highlight display is the volume adjustment display 810, the volume adjustment is selected, and if the item is the brightness adjustment display 815, the LED brightness adjustment is selected. In addition, the value of the volume and brightness (LED brightness) can be selected by the swipe operation in the left and right direction (operation by the movement of the finger in the left and right direction) on the touch panel 25b. The effect control device 300 may display the volume adjustment display 810 and the brightness adjustment display 815 for a predetermined period, and determine the value of the volume and brightness (LED luminance) after the predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the effect control device 300 may set the setting information regarding the volume adjustment (the volume adjustment display 810) and the LED luminance adjustment (the luminance adjustment display 815) in the round effect setting process (B2105 in FIG. 93).

  When the gaming machine has a cross key (direction key) for volume adjustment and LED brightness adjustment, a cross key (direction key) can be used instead of the touch panel 25b.

  When the song change during the big hit of (b) and the volume adjustment and LED brightness adjustment of (Y) are performed at random timing or at the start of each round, the song change and the volume adjustment or LED brightness adjustment overlap. However, the effect control device 300 is set so that the composite operation is performed in the music change while the composite operation is not performed in the volume adjustment and the LED brightness adjustment (the composite operation selection rate is 0%).

  Then, in (U), a certainty change notification effect (including an operation effect) for notifying whether or not to enter a certainty change state (RUSH, specific game state) after the big hit is started. A start display 647 for notifying the start of the certainty change notification effect is displayed on the screen of the display device 41. The effect control device 300 may set the probability change notification effect in the round effect setting process (B2105 in FIG. 93).

  In (Y), the operation effect selected by the lottery is started in relation to the probability change notification effect. Here, the composite operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. As the touch panel operation validity period starts, a touch panel operation promotion display 639 (operation promotion image) is displayed. The operation of the touch panel 25b (the second operation unit) may be a swipe operation or a flick operation instead of the hand operation.

  In (W), the operation continuation time of the touch panel 25b becomes longer than a predetermined time, a button operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) is displayed, and a button press operation on the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit) is prompted.

  In (ヲ), when the player performs a button press operation and completes a composite operation (operations on both the first operation unit and the second operation unit) related to the selected operation effect, a response to the execution of the composite operation As the operation corresponding effect, a notification image 648 indicating that the vehicle enters a certain change state (RUSH, specific game state) is displayed.

  In addition, since the composite operation is always performed in the music change (selection rate of the composite operation is 100%), the chance of the composite operation in the music change and the occurrence timing of the composite operation in the probable change notification effect to be rare is reduced. The selectivity of the composite operation in the effect may be set to a few percent or less (in short, 0%).

  Thereafter, the screen of the display device 41 changes from (f) to (k) in FIG. Since it is already determined whether or not to enter the probable change state regardless of the game operation, even if the composite operation is not completed, only the operation corresponding effect (display of the notification image 648) is not performed. The screen of the display device 41 changes from (f) to (h) in 96.

[Operations and effects of the nineteenth embodiment]
In the nineteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes: a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a game; an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game; A plurality of operable operation means (for example, effect button switch 25a and touch panel 25b) are provided. The effect control means is capable of executing a composite operation effect corresponding to a composite operation of operating a plurality of operation means. The production control means relates to a ratio of executing the composite operation production in relation to the first production (for example, a fantastic production or a dialogue production) and to a second production (for example, a pending change notice) different from the first production. And set different ratios for executing composite operation effects.

  Therefore, it is possible to rarely cause the occurrence timing of the composite operation effect in the first effect and the composite operation effect in the second effect to be duplicated, thereby reducing a situation in which the effect is uncomfortable. Further, by making the ratio at which the composite operation effect is executed different between the first effect and the second effect, the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the nineteenth embodiment, the effect control means relates to each of the first effect and the second effect, and the effect corresponding to the operation of only one of the plurality of operation means (the first operation effect or the first operation effect). 2 operation effects) can be executed. Therefore, in addition to the composite operation effect, an operation effect by a single operation is also possible, and the variation of the operation effect is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Twentieth embodiment]
The twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Configurations not particularly described below may be the same configurations as the first to nineteenth embodiments.

  In the twentieth embodiment, among composite operations, operations performed on any one operation unit in a plurality of modes will be mainly described. In the nineteenth embodiment, among the multiple operations, the one that performs an operation on each of the plurality of operation units has been mainly described.

  FIG. 166A is an example of a composite operation of operating the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit, first operation means) in a plurality of modes. As shown in (A) and (B), after a long push operation (first operation) is performed on the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit, first operation means) as a first operation mode, (C) ), The effect button switch 25a is displaced (protrudes) to change its mode. Thereafter, as shown in (D), a single-press operation (second operation) is performed on the displaced effect button switch 25a as a second operation mode (a continuous hit operation may be performed). The effect control device 300 enables the effect button switch 25a to be displaced (change in mode) by a driving unit (not shown) such as a motor or a solenoid. As described above, since the displacement (change in mode) of the effect button switch 25a is performed between the long press operation (first operation) and the single press operation (second operation), the player can be surprised, Interestingness of operation production is improved. Further, the timing of the single push operation (second operation) can be notified by the displacement of the effect button switch 25a. In addition, the displacement (change of mode) of the effect button switch 25a may be omitted. That is, (C) may be omitted, and after the long-pressing operation (second operation) of (B), the single-pressing operation of (D) may be performed immediately (dotted arrow).

  FIG. 166B is an example of a composite operation of performing an operation on the touch panel 25b (second operation unit, second operation means) in a plurality of modes. As shown in (A) and (B), after the hand holding operation (first operation) is performed as the first operation mode on the touch panel 25b (the second operation unit, the second operation means), (C) Thus, the touch panel 25b is displaced (vibrated) to change its aspect. Thereafter, as shown in (D), a swipe operation (second operation) is performed as a second operation mode on the touched panel 25b after the vibration (a flick operation may be performed). The effect control device 300 enables the touch panel 25b to be displaced (change in aspect) by a driving unit (not shown) such as a motor or a solenoid. As described above, since the displacement (change in form, vibration) of the touch panel 25b is performed between the hand-holding operation (first operation) and the swipe operation (second operation), the player can be surprised, The amusement of the production improves. Further, the timing of the swipe operation (second operation) can be notified by the displacement (vibration) of the touch panel 25b. Note that the displacement of the touch panel 25b (change in mode) may be omitted. That is, (C) may be omitted, and the swipe operation of (D) may be performed immediately after the hand operation of (B) (dotted arrow).

  FIG. 167A and FIG. 167B are flowcharts respectively showing the procedure of the first half and the second half of the effect button input processing according to the twentieth embodiment. The effect button input process is executed by effect controller 300 in step B1009 of the main process (FIG. 78).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the first button operation validity period in which the operation of the effect button switch 25a (the main part of the effect button) can be detected (B5201). If it is not the first button operation valid period (the result of B5201 is “N”), the detection of the button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a) is invalidated (B5202), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5212. If it is the button operation valid period (result of B5201 is “Y”), detection of button operation is set to be valid (B5203).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation has been detected (B5014). If a button operation has not been detected (the result of B5204 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5212. If a button operation is detected (result of B5204 is “Y”), the button operation type for the operation of the effect button switch 25a is determined and stored (B5205).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined button operation type is the first operation set corresponding to the first button operation validity period in step B5201 (B5206). In steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the first button operation valid period and the first operation are set in association with each other. If the determined button operation type is not the first operation set corresponding to the first button operation validity period (result of B5206 is "N"), the process shifts to step B5212.

  If the determined button operation type is the first operation set corresponding to the first button operation valid period (result of B5206 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines the first button operation valid period in step B5201. It is determined whether or not a composite operation effect corresponding to is set (B5017). That is, in steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, it is determined whether the first button operation validity period is set corresponding to the composite operation effect.

  When the composite operation effect corresponding to the first button operation validity period is not set (result of B5207 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of the operation-related effect accompanying the first operation ( B5208), the detection of the button operation is invalidated (B5211). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  When a composite operation effect corresponding to the first button operation validity period is set (result of B5207 is “Y”), effect control device 300 indicates a first operation flag indicating that the first operation has been performed with respect to the button operation. Is set (B5209). Then, a setting for executing the displacement (change of mode) of the effect button switch 25a is performed. After that, the detection of the button operation is invalidated (B5211).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the second button operation validity period in which the operation of effect button switch 25a can be detected (B5212). The second button operation valid period is set to a period after the effect button switch 25a is displaced (change in mode) or a period after the first button operation valid period. If it is not the second button operation valid period (the result of B5212 is “N”), detection of button operation is set to invalid (B5213), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5223. If it is the second button operation valid period (result of B5212 is “Y”), detection of button operation is set to be valid (B5214).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation has been detected (B5215). If there is no button operation (the result of B5215 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5223. When a button operation is detected (result of B5215 is “Y”), the button operation type for the operation of the effect button switch 25a is determined and stored (B5216).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined button operation type is the second operation set in accordance with the second button operation validity period in step B5212 (B5217). In the above-described steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the second button operation validity period and the second operation are set in association with each other. If the determined button operation type is not the second operation set corresponding to the second button operation validity period (result of B5217 is “N”), the process shifts to step B5223.

  If the determined button operation type is the second operation set corresponding to the second button operation validity period (result of B5217 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets the first operation flag related to the button operation. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (B5218). That is, it is determined whether or not the composite operation of the effect button switch 25a has been completed.

  When the first operation flag is not set (result of B5218 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of the operation-related effect accompanying the second operation (B5219), and detects the detection of the button operation. It is set to invalid (B5222). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  When the first operation flag is set (result of B5218 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines that there has been a second operation in addition to the first operation (ie, that there has been a composite operation). No), the execution information of the operation corresponding effect accompanying the composite operation of the effect button switch 25a is set (B5220). After that, the first operation flag relating to the button operation is cleared (B5221), and the detection of the button operation is set to be invalid (B5222).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the first touch panel operation validity period in which the operation of touch panel 25b can be detected (B5223). If it is not the first touch panel operation validity period (the result of B5223 is “N”), detection of touch panel operation (operation of the touch panel 25b) is set to invalid (B5224), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5234. If it is the touch panel operation valid period (the result of B5223 is “Y”), the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be valid (B5225).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a touch panel operation has been detected (B5226). If there is no touch panel operation (the result of B5226 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5234. If a touch panel operation is detected (the result of B5226 is “Y”), the touch panel operation type is determined for the operation of the touch panel 25b and stored (B5227).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined touch panel operation type is the first operation set corresponding to the first touch panel operation validity period in step B5223 (B5228). In the above-described steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the first touch panel operation validity period and the first operation are set in association with each other. If the determined touch panel operation type is not the first operation set corresponding to the first touch panel operation validity period (the result of B5228 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5234.

  If the determined touch panel operation type is the first operation set in correspondence with the first touch panel operation validity period (result of B5228 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines the first touch panel operation validity period in step B5223. It is determined whether or not a composite operation effect corresponding to is set (B5229). That is, in steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, it is determined whether the first touch panel operation validity period is set in accordance with the composite operation effect.

  If the composite operation effect corresponding to the first touch panel operation validity period is not set (result of B5229 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of the operation-related effect accompanying the first operation ( B5230), the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5233). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  If the composite operation effect corresponding to the first touch panel operation validity period is set (result of B5229 is “Y”), effect control device 300 indicates a first operation flag indicating that the first operation has been performed with respect to the touch panel operation. Is set (B5231). Then, a setting for executing the displacement (change of the mode) of the touch panel 25b is performed (B5232). After that, the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5233).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the second touch panel operation validity period in which the operation of touch panel 25b can be detected (B5234). Note that the second touch panel operation effective period is set to a period after the displacement (change of aspect) of the touch panel 25b is executed or a period after the first touch panel operation effective period. If it is not the second touch panel operation valid period (the result of B5234 is “N”), the detection of the touch panel operation is set to invalid (B5235), and the effect button input processing ends. If it is the second touch panel operation validity period (result of B5234 is “Y”), detection of touch panel operation is set to be valid (B5236).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a touch panel operation has been detected (B5237). When there is no touch panel operation (the result of B5237 is “N”), the effect button input processing ends. If a touch panel operation is detected (result of B5237 is “Y”), the touch panel operation type for the operation of touch panel 25b is determined and stored (B5238).

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined touch panel operation type is the second operation set corresponding to the second touch panel operation validity period in step B5234 (B5217). In the above-described steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the second touch panel operation validity period and the second operation are set in association with each other. If the determined touch panel operation type is not the second operation set corresponding to the second touch panel operation validity period (the result of B5239 is “N”), the effect button input processing ends.

  If the determined touch panel operation type is the second operation set corresponding to the second touch panel operation validity period (result of B5239 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets the first operation flag relating to the touch panel operation. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (B5240). That is, it is determined whether or not the composite operation of the touch panel 25b has been completed.

  If the first operation flag is not set (result of B5240 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets execution information of an operation-related effect associated with the second operation (B5241), and detects the touch panel operation. It is set to invalid (B5244). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  When the first operation flag is set (result of B5240 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines that there has been a second operation in addition to the first operation (ie, that there has been a composite operation). No), the execution information of the operation corresponding effect accompanying the composite operation of the touch panel 25b is set (B5242). After that, the first operation flag relating to the touch panel operation is cleared (B5243), the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5244), and the effect button input processing ends.

  FIGS. 168 (A) and (B) are examples of tables showing the operation selectivity for a predetermined effect (that is, the operation effect selectivity), similarly to FIGS. 162 (A) and (B). The effect control device 300 stores this table in a ROM or the like, and can refer to the operation effect lottery in steps B4412, B4717, and B4721.

  FIGS. 168 (A) and (B) are tables showing the selectivity of the operation (operation effect) for the effect button switch 25a (first operation unit, first operation means). A combination of a single-press operation (first operation, single operation) and a long-press operation (second operation) is shown as a composite operation for performing a plurality of operations on the effect button switch 25a. May be used in combination. Note that, similarly to FIGS. 168 (A) and (B), it is possible to set a table indicating a selectivity of an operation (operation effect) on the touch panel 25b (second operation unit, second operation means).

  For example, with respect to the dialogue effect, the probability that the first operation (operation in the first operation mode) that is easy to operate is selected, that is, the selectivity of the first operation effect is high, and the second operation (operation in the second operation mode) that is difficult to operate is selected. ) Is selected, that is, the selection rate of the second operation effect is set to be low (here, 0%). In addition, since the line effect needs to be performed in a short time, the selectivity of the compound operation (the compound operation effect) for performing the first operation and the second operation is set to a few percent or less lower than the first operation and the second operation. (0% in (A), 2% in (B)). In the line effect, when an operation is performed, a line is displayed as an operation corresponding effect.

  Regarding the fanning effect, the selectivity of the first operation (first operation effect) is, for example, 0%, the selectivity of the second operation (second operation effect) is, for example, 0 to 10%, and the selection of the composite operation (composite operation effect) is selected. The rate is, for example, 90 to 100%. When an operation is performed in the stir-up effect, for example, an image is displayed or a movable character operates as an operation-corresponding effect. A plurality of stir effects may occur after the reach occurs, and the selectivity of the first operation, the second operation, the composite operation, and the no operation may be different for each type of stir effect. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect from being monotonous due to the first operation, the second operation, and the composite operation always occurring at the same ratio in each of the stir effects.

  Regarding the suspension change notice at the time of suspension occurrence or suspension shift, the selectivity of the first operation that is easy to operate may be set high and the selectivity of the second operation that is difficult to operate may be set low, but is not limited thereto. In the pending change notice, since the operation effect needs to be performed more quickly than the fanning effect, the selectivity of the composite operation (composite operation effect) is lower than the selectivity of the first operation, for example, less than 1%. Is set. Either the selectivity of the composite operation or the selectivity of the second operation may be higher or the same. In the suspension change notice, when an operation is performed, the form of suspension changes as an operation corresponding effect.

  In the operation distribution table (operation effect distribution table) of FIGS. 168 (A) and (B), the first effect (fanning effect or dialogue effect) is performed for the same reason as in FIGS. 162 (A) and (B) of the nineteenth embodiment. The ratio at which the composite operation (composite operation effect) is selected (composite operation selection ratio) and the ratio at which the composite operation (composite operation effect) is selected in the second effect (holding change notice when a hold occurs or when a hold shift occurs) (Composite operation selection rate). As a result, the occurrence timing of the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the first effect and the composite operation (composite operation effect) in the second effect is rarely duplicated, and it is less likely that the effect will be uncomfortable. Produces an effect. Further, by making the ratio at which the composite operation is selected different between the first effect and the second effect in this way, there is an effect that the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. By making the rate at which the composite operation is selected different between a specific effect (induction effect) of the first effect and a specific effect (hold change notice when a hold occurs) of the second effect, The above effects are produced.

  For example, the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect is set to a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the composite operation in the second effect is equal to or less than a second predetermined value (for example, 0.3%). May be set to Alternatively, the selection rate of the composite operation in the second effect is set to a fraction or less (for example, 1/8) of the selection rate of the composite operation in the first effect. In short, if one of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the composite operation in the second effect is set to 0%, the composite operation in the first effect and the compound operation in the second effect It is possible to completely prevent the occurrence timings of the operations from being duplicated, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being uncomfortable.

  Further, for example, when the composite operation in the first effect and the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect overlap with each other, and when the effect is uncomfortable, the compounding in the first effect is performed. The selectivity of the operation is set to a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to be equal to or less than a second predetermined value (for example, 0.3%). May be set. Alternatively, in this case, the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to a fraction of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect (for example, one-fifth or less). ). In short, if either one of the selectivity of the composite operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to 0% (FIG. The selection rate of the second operation in the second effect is 0%), and the occurrence timing of the composite operation in the first effect and the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect can be completely prevented, There will be no discomfort in the production.

[Operation and Effect of Twentieth Embodiment]
In the twentieth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes: a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a game; an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game; Operation means (for example, effect button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) operable in a plurality of operation modes is provided. The effect control means can execute a composite operation effect corresponding to a composite operation of operating the operation means in a plurality of operation modes. The production control means relates to a ratio of executing the composite operation production in relation to the first production (for example, a fantastic production or a dialogue production) and to a second production (for example, a pending change notice) different from the first production. And set different ratios for executing composite operation effects.

  Therefore, it is possible to rarely cause the occurrence timing of the composite operation effect in the first effect and the composite operation effect in the second effect to be duplicated, thereby reducing a situation in which the effect is uncomfortable. Further, by making the ratio at which the composite operation effect is executed different between the first effect and the second effect, the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the effect control means relates to each of the first effect and the second effect, and the effect (first operation) corresponding to the operation of only one of the plurality of operation modes. Effect or second operation effect). Therefore, in addition to the composite operation effect, an operation effect by one operation on the operation means is also possible, and the variation of the operation effect is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the operation means can be displaced between one operation (for example, the first operation) and another operation (for example, the second operation) of the composite operation, and the player can be surprised. Interestingness of operation effects is improved. Further, the timing of the operation to be executed after the composite operation can be notified by displacing the operation means after the operation to be executed first is completed.

[Twenty-first embodiment]
The twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 172. Configurations not particularly described below may be the same configurations as those of the first to twentieth embodiments.

  The twenty-first embodiment is an embodiment relating to an operation effect related to the operation of the operation unit, as in the nineteenth and twentieth embodiments. The operation effect includes a normal operation effect (normal operation effect) accompanied by an operation prompting display for prompting the player to operate the operation unit, and a special operation effect (back operation effect) without the operation prompting display. When the player performs a back operation (special operation), a special operation effect (back operation effect) corresponding to the back operation can be executed.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the operation prompting display (pre-operation effect, pre-operation processing) is a display that suggests the operation mode (or operation method) or the operation unit to be operated and prompts the player to perform the operation. The operation promotion image at 41 and the light emission of the LED 690 part of the effect button 25 are shown. For example, the operation promotion image includes the above-described image display 639c corresponding to the operation unit (an image indicating the operation unit to be operated) and image displays 636a and 639a indicating the operation mode (“press the button”, “hand-hold”). Etc.), a gauge 636b and a meter 639b representing an operation validity period, an operation continuation time, and the like.

  The back operation (special operation) refers to the operation of the back operation unit (special operation unit) or the above-described first operation unit (specified timing, predetermined operation valid period) without the operation promotion display. This includes operating the effect button switch 25a) and the second operation unit (the touch panel 25b), and operating the first operation unit and the second operation unit in a special operation mode. The back operation unit (special operation unit) is an operation unit such as a button switch or a cross key (cross-shaped button) different from the first operation unit and the second operation unit used in a normal operation effect. For example, the special operation mode of the first operation unit or the second operation unit is that the effect button switch 25a is pressed down at a certain rhythm according to the effect display on the display device 41, or a finger is pressed on the touch panel 25b. An operation such as cutting a cross is included.

The back operation effect is an effect related to the back operation, and is a display effect on the display device 41, an operation effect of a movable character included in the board effect device 44, and a light emitting effect of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46. , An effect by sound from a speaker, or a combination thereof. In addition, the back operation effect (special operation effect) does not include an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform the back operation (pre-operation effect), and includes a special operation corresponding effect executed in response to the back operation being performed ( Production after back operation, processing after back operation).
(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable effect setting process according to the twenty-first embodiment. The variable effect setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1905 of the variable command process (FIG. 92), as in the nineteenth embodiment.

  The flowchart of the variable effect setting process according to the twenty-first embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the nineteenth embodiment (see FIG. 158) in steps B4401 to B4411, steps B4413 to B4416, and steps B4418 to B4422. That is, in the variable effect setting processing according to the twenty-first embodiment, processing (B5401, B5402) different from the processing of step B4412 and step B4417 of the nineteenth embodiment is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the effect control device 300 executes the processing from step B4401 to step B4411, as in the nineteenth embodiment, and determines the contents of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the preliminary lottery result (B4411). ), Lottery of the operation effect for each notice (decision of the first operation effect, the second operation effect, or the back operation effect) is performed (B5401).

After that, the effect control device 300 executes the processing from step B4413 to step B4416 in the same manner as in the nineteenth embodiment, and performs the display setting of the notice effect (B4413). (B5402). Note that the effect control device 300 does not set the display of the operation promotion display (operation promotion image or the like) in the back operation effect. Then, the effect control device executes the processing from step B4418 to step B4422 as in the nineteenth embodiment, and ends the variable effect setting processing.
[Direction button input processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect button input processing according to the twenty-first embodiment. The effect button input process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1009 of the main process (FIG. 78), as in the nineteenth and twentieth embodiments.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not a touch panel operation valid period (operation detectable period) in which operation of the touch panel 25b (touch sensor) of the effect button 25 can be detected (B5601). If it is not the touch panel operation valid period (the result of B5601 is “N”), the detection of the touch panel operation (operation of the touch panel 25b) is set to be invalid (B5602), and the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5611. If it is the touch panel operation valid period (result of B5601 is “Y”), detection of touch panel operation is set to be valid (B5603).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not a touch panel operation has been detected (B5604). If a touch panel operation has not been detected (the result of B5604 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step B5611. If a touch panel operation is detected (result of B5604 is “Y”), the type of touch panel operation for the operation of touch panel 25b is determined and stored (B5605).

  The touch panel operation types include a hand-hold operation, a swipe operation, a flick operation, a back operation, and the like. For example, when the back operation is determined as the touch panel operation type, in the state where the operation promotion display is not performed, any operation of the hand-hold operation, the swipe operation, or the flick operation is performed by the player. Is the case.

  In the present embodiment, the touch panel 25b is a capacitive touch sensor that receives an input operation from a player, as in the nineteenth embodiment.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined touch panel operation type is the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period in step B5601 (B5606). In steps B4413, B4718, and B4722 described above, the touch panel operation validity period and the touch panel operation type are set in association with each other. If the determined touch panel operation type is not the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period (result of B5606 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B5611.

  If the determined touch panel operation type is the touch panel operation type set corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period (result of B5606 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets the back side corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period of step B5601. It is determined whether or not an operation effect has been set (B5607). That is, in steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, it is determined whether or not the touch panel operation validity period is set corresponding to the back operation effect.

  If the back operation effect corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period has not been set (result of B5607 is “N”), effect control device 300 sets operation execution effect information associated with the touch panel operation (operation of touch panel 25b). Then, the detection of the touch panel operation is set to be invalid (B5610). For example, the operation corresponding effect is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 or an operation of a movable accessory.

  When the back operation effect corresponding to the touch panel operation validity period is set (result of B5607 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes an operation corresponding effect accompanying the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect). Information is set (B5609), and detection of touch panel operation is set to invalid (B5610). For example, the back operation effect here is the display of a predetermined image on the display device 41, the operation of a movable accessory, or the output of sound from a speaker.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button switch 25a (the main body of the effect button) or the back operation unit (the button here) is a button operation valid period (operation detectable period). Is determined (B5611). If it is not the button operation valid period (the result of B5611 is “N”), the detection of the button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a and the back operation unit) is set to be invalid (B5612), and the effect button input processing ends. If it is the button operation valid period (the result of B5611 is “Y”), the detection of the button operation corresponding to this button operation valid period among the effect button switch 25a and the back operation unit is set to be valid (B5613).

  Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the corresponding button operation (operation of effect button switch 25a or operation of the back operation unit) has been detected (B5614). If there is no corresponding button operation (result of B5614 is "N"), the effect button input processing is terminated. When the corresponding button operation is detected (result of B5614 is “Y”), the button operation type for the corresponding button operation is determined and stored (B5615).

  Note that the button operation types include a single push, a long push, a continuous hit, a back operation, and the like. For example, when the back operation is determined as the button operation type, it is a case where any one of the single press, the long press, and the continuous hit is performed by the player in a state where the operation promotion display is not performed. .

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period in step B5611 (B5616). In the above-described steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, the button operation valid period and the button operation type are set in association with each other. When the determined button operation type is not the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period (result of B5616 is “N”), the effect button input process ends.

  If the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation validity period (result of B5616 is “Y”), effect controller 300 sets the back side corresponding to the button operation validity period of step B5611. It is determined whether or not an operation effect has been set (B5617). That is, in steps B4413, B4718, and B4722, it is determined whether or not the button operation validity period is set corresponding to the back operation effect.

  If the back operation effect corresponding to the button operation validity period is not set (result of B5617 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs the operation corresponding effect accompanying the button operation (here, operation of effect button switch 25a). The execution information is set (B5618), and the detection of the button operation is set to be invalid (B5621). For example, the operation corresponding effect here is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 (including a change in the suspension display relating to the suspension change notice) and an operation of the movable role.

  When the back operation effect corresponding to the button operation validity period is set (result of B5617 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes the operation corresponding effect associated with the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect). The setting is performed (B5619). For example, the back operation effect here is the display of a predetermined image on the display device 41, the operation of a movable accessory, or the output of sound from a speaker.

  After that, the effect control device 300 disables detection of button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a and the back operation unit) (B5621), and ends the effect button input processing.

  As described above, when the operation promotion display (pre-operation effect) is performed as the operation effect by the control of FIGS. 169 and 170, the touch panel operation (including the back operation) or the button operation (including the back operation) selected by lottery is performed. ), An operation corresponding effect (effect after operation) can be executed in relation to a predetermined effect. In addition, the predetermined effect includes a fanning effect and a notice of a change in suspension.

  In addition, under the control of FIGS. 169 and 170, at a predetermined timing (operation valid period) at which the back operation effect corresponding to the back operation can be executed, a touch panel operation or a button operation (an operation of the special operation unit) is performed as the back operation. ), The operation corresponding effect (back operation effect, special operation effect) can be executed in relation to a predetermined effect. Thereby, the operation effect by the operation selected in the lottery is executed in relation to the predetermined effect, and the interest of the predetermined effect increases, and even when the operation promotion display is not displayed, the player performs the back operation at the predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to intervene in the production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 171 is an example of a table showing the operation selectivity for a predetermined effect (that is, the operation effect selectivity), as in FIGS. 162 (A), (B) and FIGS. 168 (A), (B). The effect control device 300 stores this table in a ROM or the like, and can refer to the operation effect lottery in steps B5401, B4717, and B4721.

  For example, with respect to the dialogue effect, the probability that the first operation (e.g., button operation) that is easy to operate is selected, that is, the selectivity of the first operation effect is high (here, 100%), and the second operation that is difficult to operate (for example, touch panel operation) ) Is selected, that is, the selection rate of the second operation effect is set to be low (here, 0%). In the dialogue effect, the probability that a back operation (for example, a button operation or an operation of the back operation unit at a predetermined timing in a state where there is no operation promotion display) is selected, that is, a back operation effect (a special operation effect) Is preferably set to a lower probability than the first operation unit operation and the second operation unit (0% here). In the line effect, when an operation is performed, a line is displayed as an operation corresponding effect.

  Regarding the fanning effect, the selectivity of the first operation is, for example, 60%, the selectivity of the second operation is, for example, 30%, and the selectivity of the back operation is, for example, 5%. It should be noted that, when an operation is performed in the flirting effect, for example, an image is displayed or a movable auditorium operates as an operation corresponding effect. A plurality of stir effects may occur after the reach has occurred, and the selectivity of the first operation, the second operation, the back operation, and no operation may be different for each type of stir effect. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first operation, the second operation, and the back operation from occurring at the same ratio in each of the staging effects, thereby preventing the effect from becoming monotonous.

  Regarding the suspension change notice at the time of suspension occurrence or suspension shift, the selectivity of the first operation that is easy to operate may be set high (100% here) and the selectivity of the second operation that is difficult to operate may be set low (here, 0%), but not limited to this. In the pending change notice, the selectivity of the back operation is lower than the selectivity of the first operation, and may be set to, for example, less than 1% (0% here).

  Since the winning timing at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is random, the notice of the change in the hold when the hold occurs, the tanning effect or the speech effect overlaps, and the back operation (the special operation) ) May occur at the same time. Alternatively, there may be a case where the hold change notice and the line effect at the time of the hold shift overlap, and the occurrence timing of the back operation (special operation) in both of them overlaps. In these cases, if the back operation is of a different type between the pending change notice and the tanning effect, etc., it may be difficult to perform both the back operation in the pending change notice and the back operation with the tanning effect, etc. is there. For example, when the back operation is performed on the first operation unit in the pending change notice, but the back operation is performed on the second operation unit or the special operation unit in the flirting effect, both back operations are performed. Becomes difficult. Even if adjustment is made to make the back operation the same as the back operation in the suspension change notice and the backstage effect, etc., the effect may be uncomfortable. In general, in the back operation, a different operation is often defined for each related effect (such as a fantastic effect or a notice of a pending change) in order to enhance the interest.

  Therefore, in the operation distribution table (operation effect distribution table) of FIG. 171, the ratio (back operation selection rate) in which the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect) is selected in the first effect (fanning effect or speech effect). ) And the second operation (holding change notice at the time of hold occurrence or hold shift) differs in the ratio (back operation selection ratio) at which the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect) is selected. That is, the ratio of executing the back operation effect in relation to the first effect and the ratio of executing the back operation effect in relation to the second effect of a type different from the first effect are set differently. As a result, the occurrence timing of the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect) in the first effect (fanning effect or dialogue effect) and the back operation (back operation effect) in the second effect (hold change notice) overlap. Opportunities are rare. In addition, by making the ratio at which the back operation is selected different between the first effect and the second effect in this way, there is an effect that the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. By making the ratio at which the back operation is selected different between a specific effect (fanning effect) of the first effect and a specific effect (holding change notice when a hold occurs) of the second effect, The above effects are produced.

  For example, the selectivity of the back operation in the first effect is set to a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the back operation in the second effect is equal to or less than a second predetermined value (for example, 0.3%). May be set to Alternatively, the selection rate of the back operation in the second effect is set to be a fraction or less (for example, 1/8) of the selection rate of the back operation in the first effect. In short, if one of the selectivity of the back operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the back operation in the second effect is set to 0% as shown in FIG. 171, the back operation in the first effect And the occurrence timing of the back operation in the second effect can be completely prevented.

  Further, for example, when the timing of the back operation in the first effect and the timing of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect overlap with each other, if the effect is uncomfortable, the back operation in the first effect is performed. The selectivity of the operation is set to a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) or more, and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to be equal to or less than a second predetermined value (for example, 0.3%). May be set. Alternatively, in this case, the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to a fraction of the selectivity of the back operation in the first effect (for example, 1/5 or less). ). In short, if one of the selectivity of the back operation in the first effect and the selectivity of the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect is set to 0% (the second effect in FIG. 171). The selection rate of the second operation in the first effect is 0%), and the occurrence timing of the back operation in the first effect and the second operation (or the first operation) in the second effect can be completely prevented. The discomfort does not occur.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 172 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the twenty-first embodiment, and is an example of a screen transition of the entire game. Note that, in the twenty-first embodiment, an example of the screen transition until the special figure variable display game is executed with the special decoration pattern or the reduced decoration pattern and the reach occurs in the special decoration pattern is shown in FIG. 165A in the nineteenth embodiment. These are the same as those from (c) to (e) of FIG. 165B, and the description is omitted. In the twenty-first embodiment, the display screen of the display device 41 transitions to (m) in FIG. 172 after a reach has occurred in the decorative special symbol as shown in (m) of FIG. 165B.

  In (m) of FIG. 172, immediately before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game after the occurrence of the reach (final phase), the fanning effect (here, group notice) (set in B4409) starts. A movie of a meteor shower is displayed on the screen as a stir-up effect. It should be noted that not only one stir effect but also a plurality of stir effects may occur at different timings after the occurrence of the reach. Thereby, it becomes a lively performance and the interest of the game is improved.

  Subsequently, the operation effect selected in the operation effect lottery (B5401) is started in relation to the fanning effect. Here, the back operation effect is selected by lottery as the operation effect. The touch panel operation validity period (B5601) and the button operation validity period (B5611) sequentially start, but in the back operation effect, an operation promotion display that prompts the player to perform a back operation (touch panel operation promotion display 639 (see (a) in FIG. 165B)). And an operation promotion display such as a button operation promotion display 636 (see (i) of FIG. 165B) are not displayed.

  In (l), when the player performs a button press operation and the back operation as the set operation type (B4413) is completed (B5609 or B5619), an image 642 is displayed as an operation corresponding effect to the execution of the back operation. (Here clouds or smoke) is displayed. The image 642 may be displayed on the front side so as to hide the fluttering effect and the variable display in the middle region 610c in preference to the fluttering effect (meteor shower) and the variable display of the special decoration in the middle region 610c. Thereby, the operation corresponding effect is displayed so as to be conspicuous.

  In addition, when the back operation effect is executed in connection with the panting effect, at the same time, if another back operation effect is also executed due to a change notice of the hold when the hold occurs, a sense of incongruity occurs. The ratio of executing the back operation effect in relation to the change notice (second effect) is set to be very small (for example, 0.3% or less) unlike the fanning effect (first effect), and the fanning effect (second effect) is set. There is almost no chance that the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect) in the first effect) overlaps with the occurrence timing of the back operation (back operation effect, special operation effect) in the hold change notice (second effect). Keep it.

  On the other hand, in (R ′), the player does not perform a touch panel operation or a button operation, does not perform a back operation as the set operation type (B4413) (B5604, B5606, B5614, B5616), and displays an image corresponding to the operation corresponding effect. 642 (here clouds or smoke) are not displayed.

  Subsequently, in (d), after the operation corresponding to the back operation (rear operation effect, special operation effect) is performed in (l), the special figure change display game ends, and the special figure change display game is stopped. The result (stop symbol) is displayed in a jackpot result mode (special result mode). This makes it possible to give an impression that the stop symbol of the middle symbol 893 suddenly appears from the image 642 (here, clouds or smoke) covering the middle region 610c by the back operation. Even if the back operation is not completed, it does not affect the result of the special figure change display game. Therefore, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, even after (R ′), as in (Re), , The stop result (stop symbol) of the special figure change display game is displayed in a big hit result mode (special result mode). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, a big hit round game is started, and the display screen of the display device 41 changes as shown in the screen transition diagram after (b) of FIG. 165C.

  On the other hand, in (R '), after the operation corresponding to the back operation (reverse operation effect, special operation effect) is performed in (R), the special figure change display game ends, and the special figure change display game is stopped. The result (stop symbol) is displayed in a loss result mode. Even if the back operation is not completed, the result of the special figure change display game is not affected. Therefore, if the result of the special figure change display game is out of order, even after (R ′), even after (R ′), As described above, the stop result (stop symbol) of the special figure change display game is lost, and the result mode (special result mode) is displayed. In the case where the result of the special figure change display game is out of order as in (（′), the next special figure change display game starts.

[Operation and Effect of Twenty-First Embodiment]
In the twenty-first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can display a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game and an effect display related to the game on a display means (the display device 41 or an LED of an operation unit, etc.). Effect control means (effect control device 300), normal operation means (effect button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) each of which can be operated by a player, and special operation means (back operation unit). The effect control means displays an operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the normal operation means on the display means, and can execute a normal operation effect corresponding to the operation of the normal operation means. The special operation effect (back operation effect) corresponding to the operation of the special operation means can be executed without displaying the operation prompting prompting the user on the display means. The effect control means is configured to execute a special operation effect in relation to a first effect (for example, a fan effect or a line effect) and to a second effect (for example, a pending change notice) different from the first effect. And set the ratio of executing special operation effects differently.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes operation means (effect button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) that can be operated by the player through normal operation and special operation (back operation). The effect control means displays on the display means (such as the display device 41 or the LED of the operation unit) an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation in the normal operation, and executes a normal operation effect corresponding to the operation in the normal operation. It is possible to execute a special operation effect corresponding to the operation in the special operation without displaying on the display means an operation promotion display for urging the player to perform the operation in the special operation. The effect control means is configured to execute a special operation effect in relation to a first effect (for example, a fantastic effect or a line effect) and a second effect (for example, a pending change notice) different from the first effect. And set the ratio of executing special operation effects differently.

  Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the occurrence timing of the special operation (special operation effect) is duplicated. Further, by making the ratio at which the special operation effect (back operation effect) is executed different between the first effect and the second effect, the effect is sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined.

  The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as pachislot machines.

  The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Gaming machine 30 Gaming board 30b Out mouth 32 Gaming area 35 General winning opening 36 First starting winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (2nd starting winning area)
39 Special floating winning device 41 Display device 50 Batch display device (LED)
65 Out ball detection switch 66 Number of ejected balls display section 67 Outgoing ball rate display section 68 Special item ratio display section 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Dispensing control device (dispensing control board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply device 636 button operation promotion display 639 touch panel operation promotion display 760 big hit history display section 800 bonus item ratio display area 830 sub-display device 842 general winning opening ratio display area 844 first substance ratio warning display section 846 second role substance ratio Warning display part 865 Over winning warning setting display

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game,
An operation means that can be operated by the player in a plurality of operation modes,
The effect control means,
A composite operation effect in which a first operation effect of operating the operation means in a first operation mode and a second operation effect of operating the operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode can be executed. Is executable,
The operation means can be displaced between an operation in the first operation mode and an operation in the second operation mode;
In relation to the first effect, the the ratio to perform the combined operation effect, the a in the first operation effect or proportion for executing the second operation effect, towards the percentage executing the combined operation effect much,
In connection with the second rendition of different types from the first effect, the the ratio to perform the combined operation effect, in the ratio to perform the first operation effect or the second operation effect, the first operation effect Or the ratio of executing the second operation effect is higher ,
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect and the second effect can be executed in an overlapping manner. In a gaming machine comprising a game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the game,
An operation means that can be operated by the player in a plurality of operation modes,
The effect control means,
A composite operation effect in which a first operation effect of operating the operation means in a first operation mode and a second operation effect of operating the operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode can be executed. Is executable,
The operation means can be displaced between an operation in the first operation mode and an operation in the second operation mode;
In relation to the first effect, the the ratio to perform the combined operation effect, the a in the first operation effect or proportion for executing the second operation effect, towards the percentage executing the combined operation effect much,
In connection with the second rendition of different types from the first effect, the the ratio to perform the combined operation effect, in the ratio to perform the first operation effect or the second operation effect, the first operation effect Or the ratio of executing the second operation effect is higher ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the game has a special result that gives a player a gaming value. The operating means includes one or more operable operating units,
The ratio of executing the composite operation effect in relation to the first effect and the ratio of executing the compound operation effect in relation to the second effect include 0. A gaming machine according to claim 1.